HIGH FUNCTION
&
LOW ACOUSTIC NOISE
FR-A500
TRANSISTORIZED INVERTER
– INSTRUCTION MANUAL –
FR-A520-0.4K to 55K(-NA)
FR-A540-0.4K to 55K(-NA)(-EC)
A - 1
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi transistorized Inverter.
This instruction manual gives handling information and precautions for use of this
equipment.
Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, please read
this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.
Please forward this manual to the end user.
This section is specifically about safety matters
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read through this
instruction manual and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly.
Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and
instructions.
In this instruction manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into “WARNING” and “CAUTION”.
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in
death or severe injury.
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in
medium or slight injury, or may cause physical damage only.
Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow
the instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety.
CAUTION
WARNING
A - 2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. Electric Shock Prevention
WARNING
z
While power is on or when the inverter is r unning, do not open the front c over. You m ay get an electr ic
shock.
z
Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed. Otherwise, you may access the exposed high-
voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and get an electric shock.
z
If power is of f, do not rem ove the front cover exc ept for wiring or periodic inspec tion. You m ay access
the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.
z
Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for m ore at least 10 minutes and check for
the presence of any residual voltage wi th a meter (check chapter 2 for further details.) etc.
z
Use class 3 (200V) or special class 3 (400V) or higher earthing method to earth the inverter.
z
Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should be fully competent to do
the work.
z
Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or be injured.
z
Operate the switches with dry hands to prevent an electric shock.
z
Do not subject the c ables to s cratches , exc essive str ess, heavy loads or pinc hing. O therwise, you m ay
get an electric shock.
z
Do not change the cooling fan while power is on. To do so will invite a hazardous condition.
2. Fire Prevention
CAUTION
z
Mount the inverter on an inco m bustible sur fac e. Installing the inver ter direc tly on or near a com bus tible
surface could lead to a fire.
z
If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inver ter power. A continuous flow of lar ge current c ould
cause a fire.
z
Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P, N. This could cause a fire.
3. Injury Prevention
CAUTION
z
Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal to prevent damage etc.
z
Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise, damage etc. may occur.
z
Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage etc.
z
After the invert er has been operating for a relativly long period of time, do not touc h the inverter as it
may be hot and you may get burnt.
A - 3
4. Additional instructions
Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.:
(1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
z
When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury.
z
Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended.
z
Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the inverter. Install
according to the information in the Instruction Manual.
z
Do not operate if the inverter is damaged or has parts missing.
z
Do not hold the inverter by the front cover; it may fall off.
z
Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the inverter.
z
Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.
z
Prevent screws, wire fragm ents, conductive bodies, oil or other flam mable subs tances from entering
the inverter.
z
Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact.
z
Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:
Ambient temperature
Constant torque: -10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F) (non-freezing)
(-10°C to +40°C with FR-A5CV
attachment)
Variable torque: -10°C to +40°C (14°F to 104°F) (non-freezing)
(-10°C to +30°C with FR-A5CV
attachment)
Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage temperature -20°C to +65°C* (-4°F to 149°F)
Ambience Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Environment
Altitude, vibration Maximum 1000m (3280.80 feet.) above sea level for standard operation.
After that derate by 3% for every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%).
••*Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
(2) Wiring
CAUTION
z
Do not fit capacitive equipment such as a power factor correction capacitor, noise filter or surge
suppressor to the output of the inverter.
z
The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect the direction of
rotation of the motor.
(3) Trial run
CAUTION
z
Check all parameters, and ensure that the machine will not be damaged by a sudden start-up.
(4) Operation
CAUTION
z
When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it will restart suddenly
after an alarm stop.
z
The [STOP] key is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been made. Prepare an
emergency stop switch separately.
z
Make s ure that the s tar t signal is of f bef or e res etting the inver ter alarm . A f ailure to do s o may restart
the motor suddenly.
A - 4
CAUTION
z
The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any other electrical
equipment to the inverter output may damage the equipment.
z
The electronic overcurrent protection does not guarantee protection of the motor from overheating.
z
Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter.
z
Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise nearby electronic
equipment may be affected.
z
Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power harmonics from the inverter may
heat/damage the power capacitor and generator.
z
When a 400V class motor is inverter-driven, it should be insulation-enhanced or surge voltages
suppressed. Surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals,
deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
z
When parameter clear or all clear is per for m ed, each param eter returns to the f actor y setting. Re-set
the required parameters before starting operation.
z
The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its setting, examine the
performance of the motor and machine.
z
In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure safety.
z
Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always perform inspection and
test operation.
(5) Emergency stop
CAUTION
z
Provide a safety back up such as an em ergency brake which will prevent the m achine and equipm ent
from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
CAUTION
z
Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the inverter.
(7) Disposing of the inverter
CAUTION
z
Treat as industrial waste.
(8) General instructions
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruc tion m anual show the inverter without a cover, or par tially
open. Never run the inverter like this. Always replace the cover and follow this instruction manual when
operating the inverter.
CONTENTS
I
287/,1(
1.1 Pre-Operation Information.................................................................................................. .......................................1
1.1.1 Precautions for operation....................................................................................................................................1
1.2 Basic Configuration....................................................................................................................................................2
1.2.1 Basic configuration .............................................................................................................................................2
1.3 Structure....................................................................................................................................................................3
1.3.1 Appearance and structure ..................................................................................................................................3
1.3.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover .....................................................................................................4
1.3.3 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel..............................................................................................6
,167$//$7,21 $1' :,5,1*
2.1 Installation..................................................................................................................................................................7
2.1.1 Instructions for installation..................................................................................................................................7
2.2 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................................................9
2.2.1 Terminal connection diagram .............................................................................................................................9
2.2.2 Wiring of the main circuit..................................................................................................................................12
2.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit...............................................................................................................................18
2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector.......................................................................................................................22
2.2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units ............................................................................................................24
2.2.6 Design information............................................................................................................................................28
2.3 Other wiring .............................................................................................................................................................29
2.3.1 Power harmonics..............................................................................................................................................29
2.3.2 Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines.....................................................................................................30
2.3.3 Inverter-generated noises and reduction techniques........................................................................................33
2.3.4 Leakage currents and countermeasures..........................................................................................................37
2.3.5 Inverter-driven 400V class motor......................................................................................................................38
2.3.6 Peripheral devices............................................................................................................................................39
2.3.7 Instructions for compliance with the UL and CSA standards............................................................................41
2.3.8 Instructions for compliance with the European standards................................................................................42
2.3.9 Earthing (EC version)........................................................................................................................................43
23(5$7,21
3.1 Pre-Operation Information.................................................................................................. .....................................45
3.1.1 Devices and parts to be prepared for operation ...............................................................................................45
3.1.2 Power on...........................................................................................................................................................47
3.1.3 Parameter check ...............................................................................................................................................47
3.2 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................53
3.2.1 Pre-operation checks........................................................................................................................................53
3.2.2 External operation mode (Operation using external input signals)...................................................................54
3.2.3 PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel (FR-DU04))...........................................................55
3.2.4 Combined operation mode (Operation using the external input signals and PU)............................................56
3$5$0(7(5
4.1 Parameter List .........................................................................................................................................................57
4.2 Parameter Function Details.....................................................................................................................................63
z
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112).......................................................................................................................63
z
Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18) ..........................................................................................................64
II
z
Base frequency, base frequency voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47, Pr. 113).................................................................65
z
Multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)..............................................................66
z
Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111)..................................67
z
Electronic overcurrent protection (Pr. 9)..................................................................................................................68
z
DC dynamic brake (Pr. 10, Pr. 11, Pr. 12)...............................................................................................................69
z
Starting frequency (Pr. 13)......................................................................................................................................70
z
Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)................................................................................................................................70
z
Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)..................................................................................................................................71
z
MRS input selection (Pr. 17) ...................................................................................................................................72
z
Stall prevention (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154)...........................................................................73
z
Multi-speed input compensation (Pr. 28).................................................................................................................74
z
Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143).................................................................................75
z
Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70).................................................................................................................76
z
Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)...........................................................................................................................77
z
Speed display (Pr. 37, Pr. 144)...............................................................................................................................78
z
Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 41).........................................................................................................................79
z
Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116) ...................................................................................79
z
Second/third stall prevention (Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 114, Pr. 115)...............................................................................80
z
Monitor display/FM, AM terminal function selection (Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158).......................................................82
z
Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56).......................................................................................................................84
z
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165).........................................85
z
Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)..............................................................................................................87
z
Intelligent mode selection (Pr. 60)...........................................................................................................................88
z
Acceleration/deceleration reference current/lift mode starting frequency (Pr. 61 to Pr. 64)....................................90
z
Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)...................................................................................................................91
z
Applied motor (Pr. 71).............................................................................................................................................93
z
PWM carrier frequency (Pr. 72, Pr. 240).................................................................................................................94
z
Voltage input (Pr. 73) ..............................................................................................................................................95
z
Input filter time constant (Pr. 74).............................................................................................................................96
z
Reset selection/PU disconnection detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75).................................................................96
z
Alarm code output selection (Pr. 76).......................................................................................................................98
z
Parameter write inhibit selection (Pr. 77) .................................................................................... ............................99
z
Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)......................................................................................................100
z
Operation mode selection (Pr. 79) ........................................................................................................................101
z
Motor capacity/number of motor poles/speed control gain (Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89) ...............................................104
z
Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96)..................................................................105
z
Online auto tuning selection (Pr. 95).....................................................................................................................111
z
V/F control frequency (voltage) (Pr. 100 to Pr. 109)..............................................................................................113
z
Computer link operation (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124).........................................................................................................114
z
PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134).............................................................................................................................124
z
Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over function (Pr. 135 to Pr. 139)........................................................131
z
Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151)..............................................................................................135
z
Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)...............................................................................................................136
z
RT signal activated condition selection (Pr. 155)..................................................................................................137
z
Stall prevention function and current limit function (Pr. 156).................................................................................137
z
OL signal output timer (Pr. 157)............................................................................................................................139
z
User group selection (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176)............................................................................ ....................140
z
Watt-hour meter clear/actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 170, Pr. 171).........................................................141
z
Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 186)............................................................................................141
z
Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 195) .........................................................................................144
III
z
User initial value setting (Pr. 199) .........................................................................................................................146
z
Programmed operation function (Pr. 200 to Pr. 231) ............................................................................................147
z
Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)..............................................................................................................151
z
Stop selection (Pr. 250).........................................................................................................................................152
z
Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266) ...................................................................154
z
Stop-on-contact, load torque high-speed frequency selection (Pr. 270)...............................................................156
z
High-speed frequency control (Pr. 271 to Pr. 274)................................................................................................157
z
Stop on contact (Pr. 275, Pr. 276).........................................................................................................................161
z
Brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285).......................................................................................................164
z
Droop control (Pr. 286, Pr. 287)............................................................................................................................168
z
Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. 900, Pr. 901)..........................................................................................169
z
Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905).................................................................171
z
Buzzer control (Pr. 990) ........................................................................................................................................173
3527(&7,9( )81&7,216
5.1 Errors (alarms).......................................................................................................................................................174
5.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions..................................................................................................................................174
5.1.2 Correspondences between digital and actual characters...............................................................................177
5.1.3 Alarm code output...........................................................................................................................................178
5.1.4 Resetting the inverter......................................................................................................................................178
5.2 Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................................................................179
5.2.1 Checking the operation panel display at alarm stop.......................................................................................179
5.2.2 Faults and check points..................................................................................................................................180
5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection.........................................................................................................182
5.3.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection..................................................................................................182
5.3.2 Check items....................................................................................................................................................182
5.3.3 Periodic inspection..........................................................................................................................................182
5.3.4 Insulation resistance test using megger .........................................................................................................183
5.3.5 Pressure test...................................................................................................................................................183
5.3.6 Replacement of parts......................................................................................................................................186
5.3.7 Inverter replacement.......................................................................................................................................187
5.3.8 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and power............................................................................188
63(&,),&$7,216
6.1 Standard Specifications.........................................................................................................................................190
6.1.1 Model specifications .......................................................................................................................................190
6.1.2 Common specifications...................................................................................................................................192
6.1.3 Outline drawings.............................................................................................................................................194
237,216
7.1 Option List................................................................................................................ ..............................................198
7.1.1 Stand-alone options........................................................................................................................................198
7.1.2 Inboard dedicated options ..............................................................................................................................200
$33(1',&(6
Appendix 1 Data Code List..........................................................................................................................................201
Appendix 2 List of Parameters Classified by Purposes of Use....................................................................................207
Appendix 3 Operating the Inverter Using a Single-Phase Power Supply....................................................................208
1
CHAPTER 1
OUTLINE
This chapter gives information on the basic "outline" of this
product.
Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the
equipment.
1.1 Pre-Operation Information........................................1
1.2 Basic Configuration..................................................2
1.3 Structure..................................................................3
<Abbreviations>
y
DU
Operation panel (FR-DU04)
y
PU
Operation panel (FR-DU04) and parameter unit (FR-PU04)
y
Inverter
Mitsubishi transistorized inverter FR-A500 series
y
Pr.
Parameter number
y
PU operation
Operation using the PU (FR-DU04/ FR-PU04)
y
External operation
Operation using the cont rol circuit signals
y
Combined operation
Operation using both the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) and
external operation
y
FR-A200E
Mitsubishi transistorized inverter FR-A200 series
<EXCELLENT> series
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION
CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS
CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 6 SPECIFICAT IONS
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS
APPENDICES
1.1 Pre-Operation Information
OUTLINE
1
1 OUTLINE
1.1 Pre-O per ation Inform ation
1.1.1 Precautions for operation
Incorrec t handling might cause the inver ter to oper ate improperly, its life to be r educed c ons iderably, or at the
worst, the inverter to be damaged. Handle the inverter properly in accordance with the information in each
section as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual to use it correctly.
This manual is written for the FR-A500 series transistorized inverters.
For handling infor mation on the parameter unit (F R- PU04), inboar d options, s tand- alone options , etc., r ef er to
the corresponding manuals.
(1) Unpacking and product check
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side
face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.
1) Inverter type
FR-A520-0.4K/
MITSUBISHI
MODEL FR-A520-0.4K
INVERTER
POWER
INP UT
OUTPUT
SERIAL
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
0.4kW
XXXXX
MADE IN JAPAN
XXXXX
Capacity plate
Inverter type Serial number
Capacity plate Rating plate
Rating plate
Input rating
Output rating
Seri al nu mb e r
Inverter type
FR- A520 - 0.4K -
Symbol Voltage Class
A520
A540 200V class
400V class
Symbol Applicable Motor Capacity
0.4K to 55K Indicates capacity in "kW". Symbol Specifications
None
NA Japanese specifications
U.S. specifications
EC European specif ications
Applicable moto
r
capacity
2) Accessory
Instruction manual
If you have found any discrepancy, damage, etc., please contact your sales representative.
(2) Preparations of instruments and parts required for operation
Instrum ents and parts to be prepared depend on how the inverter is operated. Prepare equipm ent and parts
as necessary. (Refer to page 45.)
(3) Installation
To operate the inverter with high performance for a long time, install the inverter in a proper place, in the
correct direction, and with proper clearances. (Refer to page 7.)
(4) Wiring
Connect the power supply, motor and operation signals (control signals) to the terminal block. Note that
incorrect connection may damage the inverter and peripheral devices. (See page 12.)
1.2 Basic Configuration
OUTLINE
2
1.2 Basic Configuration
1.2.1 Basic configuration
The following devices are required to operate the inverter. Proper peripheral devices must be selected and
correct connections made to ensure proper operation. Incorrect system configuration and connections can
cause the inverter to operate improperly, its life to be reduced considerably, and in the worst case, the
inverter to be damaged.
Please handle the inverter properly in accordance with the information in each section as well as the
precautions and instructions of this manual. (For connections of the peripheral devices, refer to the
corresponding manuals.)
Name Description
Power supply Use the power supply within t he perm is si ble
power supply specifications of the inverter.
(Refer to page 39.)
Earth leak age
circui t breaker
(ELB) or no-fu se
breaker (NFB)
The breaker should be selected with care
since a large inrush current flows in the
inverter at power on. (Refer to page 39.)
Magnetic
contactor
The magnetic contactor need not be
provided. When installed, do not use it to
start or s t op the invert er. I t m i ght reduc e the
inverter life.
(Refer to page 39.)
Reactors
The reactors must be us ed when the power
factor is to be improved or the inverter is
installed near a large power supply system
(1000KVA or more and wiring distance
within 10m (32.81 feet)). Make selection
carefully.
Inverter
z
The inverter life is influenced by ambient
temperature. The ambient temperature
should be as low as possible within the
permissible range.
This must be noted especially when the
inverter is installed in an enclosure.
(Refer to page 7.)
z
Incorrect wiring might lead to inverter
damage. The control signal lines should
be kept away from the main circuit to
protect them from noise. (Refer to page
9.)
Devices
connect ed t o the
output
Do not connect a power capacitor, surge
suppress or or radio noise filt er to the output
side.
(MC)
Ground
DC reactor
(FR-BEL)
Ground
(NFB)
or
(ELB)
AC reactor
(FR-BAL)
Ground To prevent an electric shoc k , always ground
the m otor and inverter.
Japanese Harmonic Suppression Guideline
The "harm onic suppres sion
g
uideline for hous ehold appliances and
g
eneral-purpos e products" was is sued
by the Ministry of International Trade and Industry in September, 1994. This
g
uideline applies to the
FR-A520-0.4K to 3.7K. By connection of the power factor improvin
g
reactor (FR-BEL or FR-BAL), this
product conf orm s to the "harm onic suppres sion technique for tr ansistorized inverters (input cur rent 20A or
less)" set forth by the Japan Electrical Manufactures' Association.
1.3 Structure
OUTLINE
3
1.3 Structure
1.3.1 Appearance and structure
(1) Front view (2) Without front cover
POWER lamp
ALARM lamp
Operation panel (FR-DU04)
Brake resistor* (Fitted to the bac k)
Accessory cover
Wiring port cover for option
Front cover
Rating plate
Capacity plate Wiring cover
PU connector
(Provided with modular jack type relay connector)
(For use of RS-485 cable)
Modular jack type relay connector compartment
Inboard option mounting position
Control circuit terminal block
Main circuit terminal block
*7.5K or less inverters are equipped with an inboard brake resistor.
Note: The "EC" version of the FR-A500 uses pheonix type connectors for the control circuit terminal
block.
OUTLINE
4
1.3.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
FR-A520-0.4K to 11K, FR-A540-0.4K to 7.5K
• Removal
1) Hold both sides of the front cover top and push the front cover down.
2) Hold down the front cover and pull it toward you to remove.
(The front cover may be removed with the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) on.)
Front cover Inverter
Catch
• Reinstallation
1) Insert the catches at the bottom of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Using the catches as supports, securely press the front cover against the inverter.
Note: When the operation panel is mounted and the front cover is removed, remove the operation
panel before reinstalling the front cover.
FR-A520-15K to 22K, FR-A540-11K to 22K
• Removal
1) Remove the installation screw at top of the front cover.
2) Hold both ends of the front cover top.
3) Pull the front cover toward you to remove.
(The front cover may be removed with the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) on.)
• Reinstallation
1) Insert the catches at the front cover bottom into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Using the catches as supports, securely press the front cover against the inverter.
3) Fix the front cover with the top screw.
Note: W hen the operation panel is mounted on the front cover removed, remove the operation panel
before reinstalling the front cover.
OUTLINE
5
FR-A520-30K to 55K, FR-A540-30K to 55K
• Removal
1) Remove the front cover mounting screws.
• Reinstallation
1) Fix the front cover with the mounting screws.
Note: 1. Make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely.
2. The s ame ser ial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front c over and the r ating plate of
the inverter. Bef ore reinstalling the front c over, check the s erial number to ensure that the cover
removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed.
OUTLINE
6
1.3.3 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel
To ensure safety, remove and reinstall the operation panel after switching power off.
• Removal
Hold down the top button of the operation panel and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.
Removal Reinstallation
To reinstall, insert straight and mount securely.
• Reinstallation using the connection cable
1) Remove the operation panel.
2) Disconnec t the modular j ack type relay connector. (Place the disconnec ted m odular jac k type relay
connector in the modular jack type relay connector compartment.)
Modular jack type relay connector compartment
Modular jack type relay connector
3) Securely plug one end of the connection cable into the PU connector (modular jack type relay
connector) of the inverter and the other end into the operation panel.
Note: Install the operation panel only when the front cover is on the inverter.
2
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
This chapter gives information on the basic "installation and
wiring" of this product.
Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the
equipment.
2.1 Installation................................................................ 7
2.2 Wiring ...................................................................... 9
2.3 Other wiring .............................................................29
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION
CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS
CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 6 SPECIFICAT IONS
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS
APPENDICES
2.1 Installation
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
7
2 INSTALLATION AND W IRING
2.1 Instal lation
2.1.1 Instructions for installation
1) Handle the unit carefully.
The inverter uses plastic parts. Handle it gently to protect it from damage. Also, hold the unit with even
strength and do not apply too much strength to the front cover alone.
2) Install the inverter in a place where it is immune to vibration. (5.9 m/s2 {0.6G} or less)
Also note the cart, press, etc.
3) Note on ambient temperature
The inverter life is under great influence of ambient temperature. In the place of installation, ambient
temperature must be within the permissible range (depending upon the operation mode and conditions
(see ambient temperature specifications on page 190). Check that the ambient temperature is within that
range in the positions shown in figure 3).
4) Install the inverter on a non-combustible surface.
The inverter will be very hot (maximum about 150°C). Install it on a non-combustible surface (e.g. metal).
Also leave sufficient clearances around the inverter.
5) Avoid high temperature and high humidity.
Avoid places where the inverter is subjected to direct sunlight, high temperature and high humidity.
6) The amount of heat generated in an enclosure can be reduced considerably by placing the heat sink
outside the enclosure.
Note: 1. Use the option (FR-A5CN
) for installation. The mounting area should be cut to the panel
cutting dimensions.
2. The cooling section outside the enclosure has the cooling fan. Do not use the inverter in any
environment where it is exposed to waterdrops, oil mist, dust, etc.
7) Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust, dirt etc.
Install the inverter in a clean place or inside a "totally enclosed" panel which does not accept any
suspended matter.
8) Note the cooling method when the inverter is installed in an enclosure.
When two or more inverters are installed or a ventilation fan is mounted in an enclosure, the inverters and
ventilation fan must be installed in proper positions with extreme care taken to keep the ambient
temperatures of the inverters below the permissible value. If they are installed in improper positions, the
ambient temperatures of the inverters will rise and ventilation effect will be reduced.
9) Install the inverter securely with screws or bolts in the vertical direction.
3) Note on ambient temperature
Measurement
position
Measurement
position
5cm
(1.97 in ches)
5cm
(1.97 in ches)
5cm
(1.97 in ches)
4) Clearances around the inverter
10cm (3.94 inches)
5cm (1.97 inches)
or more *
*: 1cm (0.39 inches) or more for model 3.7K or less
Leave sufficient
clearances above
and under the
inverter to ensure
adequate ventilation.
Cooling fan built
in the inverter
Cooling air
5cm (1.97 inches)
or more *
or more
10cm (3.94 inches)
or more
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
8
8) For installation in an enclosure
Ventilation fan
(Correct example)
Position of Ventilation Fan
Inveter Inveter
Inveter
(Correct example) (Incorrect example)
Built-in cooling fan
Inveter Inveter
Inveter
Accomm odation of two or mo re inverters
(Incorrect example)
9) Vertical mounting
(1) Wiring cover and handling (22K or less)
1) When cable conduits are not connected
Cut the protective bushes of the wiring cover with nippers or a cutter before running the cables.
Wiring cover
Protective bush
WARNING
Do not remove the protective bushes. O therwise, the cable s heathes m ay be scratched by the wiring cover
edges, resulting in a short circuit or ground fault.
2) When cable conduits are connected
Remove the corresponding protective bushes and connect the cable conduits.
2.2 Wiring
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
9
2.2 Wiring
2.2.1 Terminal connection diagram
NFB
R
S
T
R1
S1
PC
STF
STR
STOP
RH
RM
RL
JOG
RT
MRS
RES
AU
CS
SD
10E(+10V)
10(+5V)
2
5
2
3
1
1
4 (4 to 20mADC)
Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ
RUN
SU
IPF
OL
FU
SE
FM
SD
IM
A
B
C
U
V
W
P1
P
PX
PR
N
+−
(
−
)
(
+
)
AM
5
R
Ground
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit input terminal
Control circuit output terminal
3-phase AC power supply
Jumper
24VDC power output and external transistor common
(Contact input common for source logic)
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
Start self-holding selection
High
Middle
Low
Jog mode
Second acceleration/deceleration time selection
Output stop
Reset
Current input selection
Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure
(Contact input common for sink logic)
Control input signals (no voltage input allowed)
Frequency setting signals (analog)
Common
Auxiliary input
Current input
0 to 5VDC
0 to 10VDC Selected
(Analog common)
0 to ± 5VDC
0 to ±10VDC Selected
PU
connector
(Note)
(Note)
Motor
Ground
Jumper
Remove this jumper when using FR-BEL.
Jumper
Remove this jumper when using FR-ABR.
Note: Terminals PR, PX are provided for
FR-A520-0.4K to 7.5K.
FR-A540-0.4K to 7.5K
Alarm detection
Running
Up to frequency
Instantaneous power failure
Overload
Frequency detection
Open collector output common
Common to sink and source
Open collector
outputs
Meter
(e.g. frequency meter)
Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale
Analog signal outpu t
(0 to 10VDC)
Multi-speed selection
(RS-485)
NFB
L1
L2
L3
L11
L21
3-phase AC power supply
Jumper
EC version
P1
+
PX
PR
–
EC version
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
10
(1) Description of main circuit terminals
Symbol Terminal Name Descript i on
R, S, T
〈L1, L2, L3〉AC power input Connect to the commercial power supply. Keep these terminals unconnected when
using the hi gh power factor converter (FR-HC).
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-c age motor.
R1, S1
〈L11, L21〉Power supply for control
circuit
Connected t o the AC power supply term inals R and S 〈L1 and L2〉. To ret ain the alarm
display and alarm output or when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC),
remove the jumpers from terminals R-R1 and S-S1 〈L1-L11 and L2-L21〉 and apply
external power to these terminals.
P, PR
〈+, PR〉Brake resistor c onnection Disconnect the jumper from terminals PR-PX and connect the optional brake resistor
(FR-ABR) ac ross terminals P-PR.
P, N
〈+, −〉 Brake unit connection Connect the opt ional FR-BU brake unit, power return converter (FR-RC) or hi gh power
fact or converter (FR-HC).
P, P1
〈+, P1〉Power factor improving
DC reactor c onnection Disconnect the jumper from terminals P-P1 〈+
-P1〉 and connect the optional power
factor i mproving reactor (FR-BEL).
PR, PX Built-i n brake circui t
connection
When the jumper is c onnec ted across terminal s PX-PR (factory s etting),
the built -i n brak e circuit i s valid.
(Provided for 7.5K or less.)
Ground For grounding the invert er c hassis. Must be earthed.
Note: 〈 〉 Terminal names in parentheses are those of the EC version.
(2) Description of control circuit terminals
Type Symbol Termi nal Name Descript i on
STF Forward rotation st art
Turn on the STF si gnal to start f orward rotat i on and t urn i t off to
stop. Acts as a programmed operation start signal i n t he
programmed operation mode. (Turn on to s tart and turn off to
stop.)
STR Reverse rotat i on start Turn on the STR s i gnal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to
stop.
When the STF
and STR signal s
are turned on
simultaneously,
the stop
com mand is
given.
STOP Start s el f-holding
selection Turn on the STOP signal t o select the self-hol di ng of the start signal.
RH•RM•RL Multi-speed select ion Use the RH, RM and RL s ignals as appropri a te to sele ct m ultiple
speeds.
JOG J OG mode selec t i on Turn on the JOG s i gnal t o select j og operation (fact ory setting).
Jog operation can be performed with the start signal (STF or
STR).
RT Second acceleration/
decelerati on t i me
selection
Turn on the RT signal t o select the second ac celeration/
decelerati on t i me. When the second functions such as "second
torque boost" and "second V /F (base frequenc y)" f unctions have
been set, these func tions can al s o be selected by turning on the
RT signal.
Input terminal
functi on selecti on
(Pr. 180 t o
Pr. 186) change
terminal
functions.
MRS Output s t op Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or longer) t o stop the invert er output.
Used to s hut off the invert er output to bring t he motor t o a stop by the magnetic
brake.
RES Reset Used to res et the protect i ve c i rcuit activated. Turn on t he RES signal for more t han
0.1 sec ond, then turn it of f.
AU Current input
selection Only when the AU s i gnal i s turned on, t he i nvert er can be
operated with the 4-20mADC frequency setting signal.
CS Automatic restart after
instant aneous power
failure selection
With t he CS signal on, res t art can be m ade automati cally when
the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure. Note
that thi s operation requires restart parameters t o be set. When
the inverter i s shipped f rom the f actory, it is s et to disallow restart.
Input terminal
functi on selecti on
(Pr. 180 t o
Pr. 186) change
terminal
functions.
SD Contact i nput
common (sink) Common to the c ontact input terminal s and term i nal FM. Comm on out put term i nal for
24VDC 0.1A power (PC t erminal).
Input si gnal s
Contacts, e.g. start (STF), stop (STOP) etc.
PC
24VDC power and
external transis tor
common
Contact i nput
com mon (sourc e)
When transi s tor output (open c ol l ec tor output), such as a programmabl e controller, i s
connect ed, connect t he external power supply c omm on for transis tor output to this
term i nal t o prevent a fault caused by leakage c urrent. This terminal can be used as a
24VDC, 0.1A power output. When source logic has been selected, this terminal
serves as a contact i nput com mon.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
11
Type Symbol Termi nal Name Descript i on
10E 10VDC, permissi bl e l oad
current 10mA
10
Frequency set t i ng
power supply 5VDC, permissi bl e l oad current
10mA
When the frequenc y setting pot entiometer is
connect ed i n t he factory-s et state, c onnect it to
term i nal 10.
When it is connected to term i nal 10E , change the
input specific at i ons of terminal 2.
2Frequency set t i ng
(voltage)
By entering 0 to 5VDC (0 to 10VDC), the maxim um output frequency is reac hed at 5V
(or 10V) and I/O are proportional. S witc h between input 0 to 5VDC (factory setting)
and 0 to 10VDC from the operati on panel . Input res i s tance 10kΩ. Maximum
permissible voltage 20V.
4Frequency set t i ng
(current)
By entering 4 to 20mADC, t he maximum output f requency is reached at 20mA and
I/O are proport i onal . Thi s input si gnal i s valid only when the AU si gnal i s on. Input
resistance 250Ω. Maximum permi ssible c urrent 30mA.
1Auxiliary frequency
setting
By entering 0 to ±5VDC 0 to ±10VDC, t hi s signal is added to the frequency sett i ng
signal of t erminal 2 or 4. Switch between input 0 to ±5V DC and 0 to ±10VDC (fac tory
setti ng) from t he operat i on panel . Input res i s tance 10kΩ. Maximum permissible
voltage ±20V.
Input si gnal s
Analog frequency sett i ng
5Frequency set t i ng
input comm on Common to the f requency setti ng signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and anal og output
term i nal A M. Do not earth.
Contact
A, B, C Alarm output
Change-over contac t output indic ating that t he output has been
stopped by t he i nverter protect i ve functi on activated.
200VAC 0.3A , 30VDC 0.3A. Alarm : discont i nui ty across B-C
(continui t y across A-C), normal: continuit y ac ross B-C
(discontinuity across A-C).
RUN Inverter running
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or
higher than the starting frequency (fac tory set to 0.5Hz, variabl e).
Switched high during stop or DC dynam i c brake operation (*2).
Permi ssible l oad 24V DC 0.1A.
SU Up to frequency
Switched low when the output frequency has reached within
±10% of t he set frequenc y (factory s etting, variable). Switched
high during acc el eration, decel erat i on or stop (*2). Permissible
load 24VDC 0.1A .
OL Overload al arm Switched low when the stall prevent i on function has caused st al l
prevention to be ac tivated. S witched high when stall prevent i on i s
reset (*2). Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A.
IPF Instantaneous power
failure Switched low when instantaneous power failure or undervol t age
protecti on i s activated (*2). Permissi bl e l oad 24VDC 0.1A.
FU Frequency detection
Switched low when the output frequency has reached or
exceeded the detect i on frequency set as appropriate. S witched
high when below the detection f requency (*2). Permissi bl e l oad
24VDC 0.1A
Output terminal
functi on selecti on
(Pr. 190 t o
Pr. 195) change
terminal
functions.
Open collec tor
SE Open collec tor output
common Comm on to the RUN, SU, OL, IPF and FU terminal s.
Pulse
FM For meter
Factory s et ting of output i tem:
Frequency
Permi ssible l oad c urrent 1mA
1440 pulses/second at 60Hz
Output si gnal s
Analog
AM Analog signal output
One selected from 16
monitoring items, s uch as
output frequency, is output. (*3)
The output si gnal i s
proportional t o t he magnitude
of each monitoring i t em.
Factory s et ting of output i tem:
Frequency
Output si gnal 0 to 10VDC
Permi ssible l oad c urrent 1mA
Communication
RS-485
PU connector
With t he operat i on panel connector, c omm uni cation can be made through RS-485.
· Conforming S t andard : E IA Standard RS -485
· Transmis sion format : Multi-drop link
· Communi cation speed: Maximum 19200 baud rat es
· Overall length : 500m
*1: Terminals PR and PX are provided for the FR-A520-0.4K to 7.5K, FR-A540-0.4K to 7.5K.
*2: Low indicates that the open collector outputting transistor is on (conducts). High indicates that the
transistor is off (does not conduct).
*3: Not output while the inverter is reset.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
12
2.2.2 Wiring of the main circuit
(1) Wiring instructions
1) Crimping terminals with insulation sleeves are recommended for use with the power and motor cables.
2) Cut the protective bushes of the wiring cover when running the cables. (22K or less)
3) Power must not be applied to the output terminals (U, V, W ) of the inverter. Otherwise the inverter will be
damaged.
4) After wiring, wire off-cuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire off-cuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in a control box etc., exercise care to prevent chips and other foreign matter
from entering the inverter.
5) Use cables of the recommended size for wiring to make the voltage drop 2% or less.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause
the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
6) The overall wiring length should be 500m (1640.40feet) maximum.
Especially for long distance wiring, the overcurrent protection may be misactivated or the devices connected to the
output side may misoperate or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacitance
of the wiring. Therefore, the maximum overall wiring length should be as indicated in the following table. (When two
or more motors are connected to the inverter, the total wiring length should be within the indicated value.)
Inverter Capac i ty 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K or more
Non-low acoustic noise mode 300m (984. 24 feet) 500m (1640. 40 f eet) 500m (1640.40 feet )
Low acoustic noi s e mode 200m (656.16 feet) 300m (984. 24 f eet) 500m (1640.40 f eet )
Overall wiring length (1.5K or more)
300m (984.24 feet) + 300m (984.24 feet) = 600m (1968.48 feet)
500m
(1640.40 feet) maximum
300m
(984.24 feet)
300m
(984.24 feet)
7) Connect only the recommended optional brake resistor between the terminals P and PR 〈+ and PR〉.
These terminals must not be shorted.
8) Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes harmonic components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, install the FR-BIF optional radio
noise filter (for use in the input side only ) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF line noise filter to minimize interference.
9) Do not install a power capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter (FR-BIF option) in the output side of the
inverter.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices
are installed, immediately remove them. (If the FR-BIF radio noise filter is connected, switching power off during
motor operation may result in E.UVT. In this case, connect the radio noise filter in the primary side of the
electromagnetic contactor.)
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
13
10) W hen rewiring after operation, make sure that the POW ER lamp has gone off, and when more than 10
minutes have elapsed after power-of f , check with a tester that the voltage is zero. After that, star t rewiring
work. For some time after power-off, there is a dangerous voltage in the capacitor.
11) Use the space on the left-hand side of the main circuit terminal block to run the cable for connection of
the control circuit power terminals R1, S1 〈L11, L21〉 of the FR-A520-11K.
N
UVW
P1
R1 S1
P
Screw size (M5)
Connection cable
Charge lamp
T
〈L3〉
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉
〈−〉 〈+〉
〈L11〉〈L
21〉
CAUTION
Do not use residual current protective device as the only protection against indirect contact.
Protective eart h connect ion essent ial.
Do not connect more than 2 wires on the prot ect ive earth terminal.
Use contactor and no fuse breaker EN/IEC standard compliant.
Use transformer or surge absorber EN/IEC standard compliant.
Notes on Grounding
• Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and motor must be
grounded (200V class...class 3 grounding, grounding resistance 100Ω maxim um), (400V class... special
class 3 grounding, grounding resistance 10Ω or less.).
• Use the dedicated ground terminal to ground the inverter. (Do not use the screw in the case, chassis,
etc.) (Unit: mm2)
Ground Cable Gauge
Motor Capacit y 200V clas s 400V clas s
3.7kW (5HP) or less 3.5 2
5.5k, 7.5Kw (7.5HP, 10HP ) 5.5 3.5
11 to 15Kw (15 to 20HP) 14 8
18.5 to 37kW (25 to 50HP) 22 14
45, 55Kw (60, 75HP) 38 22
• The ground cable should be as thick as possible.
Its gauge should be equal to or larger than those
indicated in the following table. The grounding
point should be as near as pos sible to the inverter
to minimize the ground cable length.
• Ground the motor on the inverter side using one
wire of the 4-core cable.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
14
(2) Terminal block layout
In the main circuit of the inverter, the terminals are arranged as shown below:
1) 200V class
FR-A520-0.4K, 0.75K
R
R1
STUVWPR
S1 N P1 P
(M4)
PX
Jumper
Screw size(M4)
Charge lam p
FR-A520-15K, 18.5K, 22K
RSTUVWNP1P
RS
R1 S1
Screw size
15K(M6)
18.5K,22K(M8) Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M6)
FR-A520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
R
R1
STUVW PR
S1
NP1P
PX
(M4)
Jumper
Screw size (M4) Charge lamp
FR-A520-30K
RST UVW
R1 S1
NP1 P
RS
Charge lamp Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M8)
Screw size (M6) Jumper
FR-A520-5.5K, 7.5K
R
N
STUVW
P1 P PR PX
R1
R
S1
S
(
M5
)
Jumpers
Charge lamp
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size(M5)
FR-A520-37K, 45K
RST UVW
R1 S1
NP1 P
RS
Charge lamp Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M10)
Screw size (M8) Jumper
FR-A520-11K
R
N
STUVW
P1 P
R1
R
S1
S
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp
Screw size (M5)
S
crew size (M5)
FR-A520-55K
RSTUVW
R1 S1
NP1 P
RS
Charge lamp Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M12)
Screw size (M8) Jumper
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
15
2) 400V class
FR-A540-0.4K, 0.75K, 2.2K, 3.7K
UVW PRP1
PX
(M4)
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Charge lamp
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉T
〈L3〉N
〈–〉P
〈+〉
R1
〈L11〉S1
〈L21〉
FR-A540-30K
UVW P1
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M6)
Screw size (M6)
Charge lamp
S
〈L2〉
R
〈L1〉T
〈L3〉
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉
R1
〈L11〉S1
〈L12〉
N
〈–〉P
〈+〉
FR-A540-5.5K, 7.5K
UVW
P1 PR PX
(M5)
Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp
Screw size (M4)
Jumpers
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉T
〈L3〉
N
〈–〉P
〈+〉
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉
R1
〈L11〉S1
〈L12〉
FR-A540-37K, 45K, 55K
S
〈L2〉
R
〈L1〉UVW P1
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M8)
Screw size (M8)
Charge lamp
T
〈L3〉
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉
R1
〈L11〉S1
〈L12〉
N
〈–〉P
〈+〉
FR-A540-11K, 15K, 18.5K, 22K
S
〈L2〉UVW P1
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp
Screw size (M6)
Screw size (M6)
R
〈L1〉T
〈L3〉
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉
R1
〈L11〉S1
〈L12〉
N
〈–〉P
〈+〉
Note: 〈 〉 Terminal names in parentheses are those of the EC version.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
16
(3) Cables, crimping terminals, etc.
The following table lists the cables and crimping terminals used with the inputs (R, S, T) 〈L1, L2, L3〉 and
outputs (U, V, W) of the inverter and the torques for tightening the screws:
Cables (Note 1)
Crimping Terminals mm2AWG PVC
Applicable Inverter Type Terminal
Screw
Size
Tightening
Torque
Kgf⋅cm
(N⋅m) R, S, T
〈L1, L2, L3〉U, V, W R, S, T
〈L1, L2, L3〉U, V, W R, S, T
〈L1, L2, L3〉U, V, W R, S, T
〈L1, L2, L3〉U, V,
W
FR-A520-0.4K to 2.2K M4 15 (1) 2-4 〈2.5-4〉2-4 〈2.5-4〉2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
FR-A520-3.7K M4 15 (1) 5.5-4 〈4-4〉5.5-4 〈2.5-4〉3.5 3.5 12 12 4 2.5
FR-A520-5.5K M5 26 (2) 5.5-5 〈6-5〉5.5-5 〈4-5〉5.5 5.5 10 10 6 4
FR-A520-7.5K M5 26 (2) 14-5 〈16-5〉8-5 〈6-5〉14 8 6 8 16 6
FR-A520-11K M5 26 (2) 14-5 〈16-5〉14-5 〈16-5〉14 14 6 6 16 10
FR-A520-15K M6 45 (4) 22-6 〈35-6〉22-6 〈16-6〉22 22 4 4 35 16
FR-A520-18.5K M8 80 (7) 38-8 〈35-8〉38-8 〈25-8〉38 38 2 2 35 25
FR-A520-22K M8 80 (7) 38-8 〈70-8〉38-8 〈35-8〉38 38 2 2 70 35
FR-A520-30K M8 80 (7) 60-8 〈95-8〉60-8 〈30-8〉60 60 1/0 1/0 95 50
FR-A520-37K M10 150 (14) 100-10 〈95-8〉100-10 〈70-8〉100 100 4/0 4/0 75 70
FR-A520-45K M10 150 (14) 100-10 100-10 〈95-40〉100 100 4/0 4/0 −−
FR-A520-55K M12 250 (24) 150-12 150-12 〈110-12〉150 150 MCM300 MCM300 −−
FR-A540-0.4K to 3.7K M4 15 (1) 2-4 〈2.5-4〉2-4 〈2.5-4〉2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
FR-540-5.5K M4 15 (1) 5.5-4 〈4-4〉2-4 〈2.5-4〉3.5 2 12 14 4 2.5
FR-540-7.5K M4 15 (1) 5.5-4 〈4-4〉5.5-4 〈4-4〉3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4
FR-540-11K M6 45 (4) 5.5-6 〈6-6〉5.5-6 〈6-6〉5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6
FR-540-15K M6 45 (4) 14-6 〈16-6〉8-6 〈10-6〉14 8 6 8 16 10
FR-540-18.5K M6 45 (4) 14-6 〈16-6〉8-6 〈10-6〉14 8 6 8 16 10
FR-540-22K M6 45 (4) 22-6 〈25-6〉14-6 〈16-6〉22 14 4 6 25 16
FR-540-30K M6 45 (4) 22-6 〈25-6〉22-6 〈25-6〉22 22 4 4 25 25
FR-540-37K M8 80 (7) 38-8 〈37-8〉22-8 〈25-8〉38 22 2 4 35 25
FR-540-45K M8 80 (7) 38-8 〈50-8〉38-8 〈35-8〉38 38 2 2 50 35
FR-540-55K M8 80 (7) 60-8 〈70-8〉60-8 〈50-8〉60 60 1/0 1/0 70 50
Note: 1. The cables used should be 75°C (167°F) copper cables.
2. Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torques.
Undertightening can cause a short or misoperation.
Overtightening can cause the screws and unit to be damaged, resulting in a short or
misoperation.
(4) Connection of the power supply and motor
Ground
Ground
Ground
terminal
Power
supply
UVW
UVW Motor
No-fuse
breaker
The power supply cables
must be connected to R, S, T
〈L1, L2, L3〉.
If they are connected to U, V,
W, the inverter will be damaged.
Phase sequence need not be
matched.
For use with a single-phase
power supply,the power supply
cables must be connected to
R and S 〈L1 an d L2〉.
Connect the motor to U, V, W.
In the above connection,
turning on the forward rotation
switch (signal) rotates the motor
in the counterclockwise (arrow)
direction when viewed from
the load shaft.
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉T
〈L3〉
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉T
〈L3〉
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
17
(5) Connecting the control circuit to a power supply separately from the main circuit
If the m agnetic contac tor (MC) in the inverter power s upply is opened when the protective cir cuit is oper ated,
the inverter control circuit power is lost and the alarm output signal cannot be kept on. To keep the alarm
signal on term inals R1 and S1 ar e available. In this c as e, c onnect the power supply term inals R1 and S1 〈L11
and L21〉 of the control circuit to the primary side of the MC.
• Model FR-A520-0.4K to 3.7K, FR-A540-0.4K to 3.7K
<Connection procedure>
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉T
〈L3〉
R1 〈L11〉S1 〈L21〉
4) Connect the separate power supply cables for control circuit to the
lower terminals (R1, S1 〈L11, L21〉). (Note 4)
Terminal block for main circuit
1) Loosen the upper screws
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Remove the jumpers.
• Model FR-A520-5.5K to 55K, FR-A540-5.5K to 55K
<Connection procedure>
M
C
1) Loosen the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Pull out and remove the jumper.
4) Connect the separate power supply
cables for control circuit to the
upper terminals (R1, S1 〈L11, L21〉). (Note 4)
Power supply terminal
block for control circuit
Main power supply
Power supply terminal
block for control circuit
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉T
〈L3〉
R1
〈L11〉S1
〈L21〉
Note: 1. When the main circuit power (R, S, T) 〈L1 L2, L3〉 is on, do not switch off the control power
(terminals R1, S1 〈L11, L21〉). Otherwise the inverter may be damaged.
2. When using a separate power supply, the jumpers across R-R1 and S-S1 〈L1-L11 and L2-L21〉
must be removed. Otherwise the inverter may be damaged.
3. For a diff erent power supply system which takes the power of the control circuit from other than
the primary side of the MC, the voltage should be equal to the main circuit voltage.
4. For the FR-A520-5.5K to 55K, FR-A540-5.5K to 55K, the power supply cables must not be
connected to the lower terminals. If connected, the inverter may be damaged.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
18
2.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit
(1) Wiring instructions
1) Terminals SD, SE and 5 are common to the I/O signals and isolated from each other. These common
terminals must not be connected to each other or earthed.
2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the
main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
3) The f requency input signals to the control circuit ar e micro cur rents. W hen c ontacts are required, use two
or more parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact to prevent a contact fault.
4) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables
running or the cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel or parameter unit contact fault.
(2) Terminal block layout
•Japanese and NA version
In the control circuit of the inverter, the terminals are arranged as shown below:
Terminal screw size: M3.5
A
RL
SE RUN SU IPF OL FU SD STF STR JOG CS
RM RH RT AU STOP MRS RES SD FM
B C PC AM 10E 10 2 5 4 1
•EC version
Terminal screw size: M3.5
A
SE RUN SU LPF OL STOP MRS RES PC STF
B C SD AM 10E 10 2 5 4 1 RL RM RH RT AU
STR JOG CS FM SDFU
<Wiring procedure>
1) For the wiring of the control circuit, strip the sheaths of the cables and use them as they are.
Strip the sheath to the following dimension. A too long stripping dimension m ay cause a short circuit with
the neighboring cable. A too short dimension may cause cable disconnection.
6mm ± 1mm
2) Loosen the terminal screw and insert the cable into the terminal.
3) Tighten the screw to the specified torque.
Undertightening can cause cable disconnection or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or
malfunction due to the screw or unit damaged.
Tightening torque: 5 to 6 kgf⋅cm
Note: Wire the stripped cable by twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose. (Do not plate the cable with
solder.)
Note: 1. Use a NFB (No fuse breakers) or fuse on the inverter input (primary) side.
2. Make sure that the control circuit terminal wiring does not touch power circuit terminals (or
screws) or conducting power circuit.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
19
(3) Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to sink logic for the Japanese and NA version, and to source Logic for the EC
version.
To change the control logic, the connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to
the other position.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the connector position.)
1) Loosen the two m ounting screws in both ends of the c ontrol circuit term inal block. ( The sc rews cannot be
removed.)
With both hands, pull down the terminal block from the back of the control circuit terminals.
2) Remove the connector from the rear surface of the control circuit terminal block and place in required
Logic position (either Sink or Source).
SOURCE
CON3
CON2
SINK
CON1
SINK
CON3
CON2
SOURCE
SINK
CON3
CON2
SOURCE
EC version NA and Japanese version
3) Using care not to bend the pins of the control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
Note: 1. Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly.
2. While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block.
3. The sink -source logic change-over connector m ust be fitted in only one of those positions. If it is
fitted in both positions at the same time, the inverter may be damaged.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
20
4) Sink logic ty pe
•In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows out of the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector
output signals.
R
R
STF
STR
SD
Current
RUN
SE
EX. A current flows out of
the corresponding signal RUN
•When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal PC as a common to prevent
mis operation caused by leakage curr ent. (Do not connect term inal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of
the external power supply.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10 DC24V SD
PC
RES
RL
RM
RH
STR
STF DC24V
(SD)
AY40 type
tra nsistor output
module
Inverter
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
21
5) Source logic type
•In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector
output signals.
PC
STF
STR R
R
Current
RUN
SE
EX. A current flows out of
the corresponding signal RUN
•When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal SD as a common to prevent
misoperation caused by leakage current.
AY-80 9
1
2
10
PC
STF
STR
SD
DC24V
(SD)
DC24V
Inverter
(4) How to use terminals "STOP", "CS" and "PC"
1) Using the "STOP" terminal
A connection example (for sink logic) for self-holding the start signal (forward
rotation, reverse rotation) is shown on the right.
2) Using the "CS" terminal
This terminal is used to perform automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
and commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation.
<Example: Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure in sink logic>
Connect terminals CS-SD and set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 57 "coasting time
for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure".
MRS
RES
SD
STF
STR
STOP
Reverse
rotation
Stop
Forward
rotation
CS SD
(Short)
3) Using the "PC" terminal
This terminal can be used as 24VDC power output using SD as a common terminal.
Specifications: 18V to 26VDC, 0.1A permissible current
Note that the wiring length should be within 30m.
Do not short terminals PC-SD.
When terminal PC is used as a 24V power supply, leakage current from transistor output cannot be
prevented.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
22
2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector
(1) When connecting the operation panel or parameter unit using a connection cable
<Recommended cable connector>
•Parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2) (option) or the following connector and cable.
•Connector: RJ45 connector
Example: 5-554720-3, Nippon AMP
•Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)
Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm×4P, MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD.
Note: The maximum wiring length is 20m (65.62 feet).
(2) For RS-485 communication
W ith the operation panel disconnected, the PU connector can be used for communication operation from a
personal computer etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a
user program allows the inverter to be run and monitored and the parameter values to be read and written.
<PU connector pin-outs>
Viewed from the inverter (receptacle side) front
1) SG
2) P5S
3) RDA
4) SDB
5) SDA
6) RD
B
7) SG
8) P5S
1)
8)
Note: 1. Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or
telephone modular connector. Otherwise, the product may be damaged due to electrical
specification differences.
2. Pins 2 and 8 (P5S) provide power to the oper ation unit or param eter unit. Do not use these pins
for RS-485 communication.
<System configuration example>
1) When a computer having a RS-485 interface is used with several inverters
PU connectorPU connector
Computer
Inverter
Station 1
PU connector
Inverter
Station 2 Inverter
Station n
RS-485
interface/terminal
C
omputer
10BASE-T
cable
Terminal resisto r jumper
Distribution terminal
Note: 1. Use the connector and cables which are available on the market.
x
Connector: RJ45 connector
Example: 5-554720-3, Nippon AMP Co., Ltd.
x
Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568B (such as 10BASE-T cable)
Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm×4P, Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
23
2) When a computer having a RS-232C interface is used with inverters
Computer
Inverter
Station 1
PU connector
Inverter
Station 2
PU connector
Inverter
Station n
PU connector
Terminal resistor jumper
Max. 15m
RS-232C connector
RS-232C cable
RS-485 terminal
*Converter
*Converter available on the market is required.
10BASE-T cable
Distribution terminal
Note: 1. Use the connector, cables and converter which are available on the market.
x
Connector: RJ45 connector
Example: Nippon AMP Co., Ltd.
x
Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568B (such as 10BASE-T cable)
Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm×4P, Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
x
RS-485/RS-232C converter
Example: FA-T-RS40, Industrial System Div., Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
or
: Cable with built-in interface DAFXI-CAB series, Connector conversion cable
DINV-485CAB, Dia Trend Co., Ltd.
<Wiring method>
1) Wiring of one computer and one inverter
Computer Side Terminals
Signal name Description
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
FG
Receive data
Receive data
Send data
Send data
Request to send
Request to send
Clear to send
Clear to send
Signal ground
Frame ground
PU connector
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
RDR
SG
*2
∗1 Terminal resistor
jumper
0.3mm or more
2
Cable connection and signal di rec tion
10BASE-T Cable
Inverter
2) Wiring of one computer and "n" inverters (several inverters)
*2
Computer
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
FG Station 1
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
Station 2
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
Station 3
SG
RDR
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
Terminal
resistor
jumper (*1)
Inverter Inverter Inverter
Note: 1. Connect the terminal resi stor jumper only to the inverter remotest from the computer.
(Terminal resistor: 100 Ω)
2. Make connections in accordance with the instruction manual of the computer used.
Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer as they differ between models.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
24
2.2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units
The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.
Incorrec t connection will cause inverter dam age or accident. Connect and oper ate the option unit carefully in
accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.
(1) Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (option)
The built-in brake resistor is connected across terminals P 〈+〉 and PR. Fit the external dedicated brake
resistor (option) instead when the built-in brake r esis tor does not have enough ther mal capability for high-duty
operation. Remove the jumper from across terminals PR-PX and connect the dedicated brake resistor
(option) across terminals P-PR 〈+ -PR〉.
(For the positions of terminals P and PR, refer to the terminal block arrangement (page14 and 15).)
Note: 1. The brake resistor connected should only be the dedicated brake resistor.
2. The jumper across terminals PR-PX must be disconnected before connecting the dedicated
brake resistor. A failure to do so may damage the inverter.
• Model...............FR-A520-0.4K to 3.7K, FR-A540-0.4K to 3.7K
1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper.
2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P-PR 〈+ -PR〉.
(The jumper should remain disconnected.)
Removal of jumper FR-A520-0.4K, 0.75K FR-A520-1.5K to 3.7K
FR-A540-0.4K to 3.7K
Terminal PX
Terminal PR
Jumpe
r
Terminal PR
Terminal P
Term inal P
R
Term inal P
• Model...............FR-A520-5.5K, 7.5K, FR-A540-5.5K, 7.5K
1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper.
2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P-PR 〈+ -PR〉.
(The jumper should remain disconnected.)
Removal of jum per FR-A520-5.5K, 7.5K
FR-A540-5.5K, 7.5K
Jumper
T
erminal PR
Terminal PX
Terminal PR
Terminal PR
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
25
(2) Connection of the FR-BU brake unit (option)
Connect the optional FR-BU brake unit as shown below to improve the braking capability during deceleration.
MC
R 〈L1〉
S 〈L2〉
T 〈L3〉
U
V
W
〈+〉 P
〈–〉 N
PR
PX
IM
PR
P/+
N/-
HA
HB
HC
Brake unit
FR-BU-(H)
Resistor unit
FR-BR-(H)
THS TH2
TH1
PPR
ON
MC
OFF MC
Remove jumper.
Inverter
Motor
T (Note 4)
Note: 1. Connect the inverter ter minals ( P, N) 〈+, −〉 and FR-BU brak e unit ter m inals so that their term inal
signals match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.) For model 7.5K or
less, the jumper across terminals PR-PX must be removed.
2. The wiring distanc e between the inverter, brak e unit and resistor unit should be within 5m (16.40
feet). If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10m (32.8 feet).
3. If the transistors in the brake unit should fail, the resistor will be extremely hot, causing a fire.
Therefore, install a magnetic c ontactor on the inver ter's power supply side to shut of f a c urr ent in
case of failure.
4. For the power supply of 400V class, install a voltage-reducing transformer.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
26
(3) Connection of the conventional BU brake unit (option)
Connect the BU brake unit correctly as shown on the right. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
MC
R 〈L1〉
S 〈L2〉
T 〈L3〉
U
V
W
IM
Inverter
HCHBHA TB
HC HB ON
MC
MC
OFF
P 〈+〉N 〈–〉
P
OCR
PR
OCR
N
NFB
PC
Brake unit
Remove jumpers.
Discharge resistor
Constant-voltage
power supply
BU brake unit
Comparator
Motor
T (Note 4)
+
-
Note: 1. For models 7.5K or less, remove the jumper across terminals PR-PX.
2. The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and discharge resistor should be within
2m (6.56 feet).
If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 5m (16.40 feet).
3. If the transistors in the brake unit should fail, the resistor will be extremely hot, causing a fire.
Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off current in
case of failure.
4. For the power supply of 400V class, install a voltage-reducing transformer.
(4) Connection of the FR-HC high power factor converter (option)
When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power harmonics, wire as shown
below. Wrong connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter.
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection".
X10 (Note 3 )
X11 (Note 3 )
N 〈–〉
P 〈+〉
R1 〈L11〉
S1 〈L21〉
RES
SD
T 〈L3〉
S 〈L2〉 (Note 1)
R 〈L1〉
NFB
R S T R4 S4 T4 N P Y1 or Y2 RDY RSO SE
Inverter
(FR-A500)
(Note 1)
High power factor converter
From FR-HCL02
Power
supply
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
27
Note: 1. Remove the jumpers across the R-R1 and S-S1 〈L1-R1 and L2-S1〉 terminals of the inverter, and
connect the control circuit power supply across the R1-S1 〈L11-L21〉 terminals. The power input
terminals R, S, T 〈L1, L2, L3〉 must be open.
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Reverse polarity of terminals N (−), P (+) will
damage the inverter.
2. The voltage phas es of term inals R, S, T 〈L1, L2, L3〉 and term inals R4, S4, T4 must be m atched
before connection.
3. Use Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used with the
X10 and X11 signals.
4. When the FR-HC is connected, use sink logic (factory setting). For source logic, the FR-HC
cannot be connected. (For the EC version, select the sink logic.)
(5) Connection of the FR-RC power return converter (option)
(For power coordination, always install the power factor improving reactor (FR-BAL).)
When connecting the FR- RC power return conver ter, connec t the inverter ter m inals (P, N) and F R-RC power
return converter term inals as shown below so that their signals match with each other . After m ak ing s ure that
the wiring is correct, set "0" in Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection".
NP
NFB FR-BAL R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P/+
N/−
FR-RC power return converter
Power supply
Inverter
R
〈L1〉S
〈L2〉T
〈L3〉
Note: 1. For models 11K or less, the jumper across terminals PR-PX must be removed.
2. How to connect the FR-BAL power factor improving AC reactor (option)
When using two or more inverters in the same system, small impedance between the inverters
will cause a regenerative current from the power return converter to leak into the other inverters,
resulting in overcurrent alarm of the other inverters. To prevent this, install a power factor
improving AC reactor on the power supply side for all the inverters.
(6) Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (option)
Connect the FR-BEL power factor improving DC
reactor between terminals P1-P 〈P1- +〉. In this
case, the jum per connected ac ross term inals P1-P
〈P1- +〉 must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor
will not function.
•<Connection method>
P1 P
FR-BEL
Remove
the jumper.
〈+〉
Note: 1. The wiring distance should be within 5m.
2. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables
(R, S, T) 〈L1, L2, L3〉.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
28
2.2.6 Design information
1) For commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation, provide electrical and mechanical interlocks
for MC1 and MC2 designed for commercial power supply-inverter switch-over.
When there is a commercial power supply-inverter switch-over circuit as shown below, the inverter will be
damaged by leakage current from the power supply due to arcs generated at the time of switch-over or
chattering caused by a sequence error.
2) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic
contactor in the inverter's primary circuit and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start
signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as
soon as the power is restored.
3) When the power supply used with the control circuit is different from the one used with the main circuit,
m ake up a circuit which will switch of f the m ain circ uit power supply term inals R, S, T 〈L1, L2, L3〉 when the
power supply terminals R1, S1 〈L11, L21〉 for the control circuit are switched off.
4) Since the input signals to the control circuit are on a low level, use two parallel micro signal contacts or a
twin contact for contact inputs to prevent a contact fault.
5) Do not apply a large voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit.
6) Do not apply a voltage directly to the alarm output signal terminals (A, B, C).
Always apply a voltage to these terminals via a relay coil, lamp, etc.
7) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
1) Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over
U
V
W
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
IM
MC2
MC1 Interloc
k
Leakage current
Inverter
Power
supply
4) Low-level signal contacts
Twin contact
L
ow-level signal contac ts
2.3 Other wiring
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
29
2.3 Other wir ing
2.3.1 Power harmonics
Power harmonics may be generated from the converter section of the inverter, affecting power supply
equipment, power capacitors, etc. Power harmonics are different in generation source, frequency and
transmission path from radio frequency (RF) noise and leakage currents. Take the following measures.
• The differences between harmonics and RF noise are indicated below:
Item Harmonic s RF Noise
Frequency Normall y 40 to 50th degrees, 3kHz or less High frequency (several 10kHz t o MHz order)
Environm ent To wire pat hs , power impedance Accross s paces, dis tance, layi ng paths
Quantitat i ve unders tanding Logical computati on i s possibl e Occurs randomly, quant i tative understandi ng i s diffi cult.
Generated am ount Approximatel y proportional to load capacity According to current fluctuation rate (larger with faster
switching)
Im munity of affect ed devi c e Specif i ed i n standards f or each device. Diff ers according to maker’s device specific at i ons.
Example of safeguard Instal l a reactor Increas e t he di stance.
• Safeguard
The harmonic current generated from the inverter to the
power supply differs according to various conditions such as
the wiring impedance, whether a power factor improving
reactor is used or not, and output frequency and output
current on the load side.
For the output frequency and output current, the adequate
method is to obtain them under rated load at the maximum
operating frequency.
NFB
IMInverter
Power factor
improving DC
reactor
Motor
Do not insert power factor
improving capacitor
Power factor
improving AC
reactor
Note: A power factor im proving capacitor or surge suppress or on the inverter ’s output m ay overheat or be
damaged due to the harmonic s of the inverter output. Als o, when an overcur rent f lows in the invert er,
the overcurr ent protection is ac tivated, Hence, when the m otor is dr iven by the inverter, do not install
a capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverter’s output. To im pr ove the power fac tor, insert a power
factor improving reactor in the inverter’s input or DC circuit.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
30
2.3.2 Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power transformer. The harmonic
suppression guidelines were established to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents.
1) "Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products"
This guideline was issued by the Ministry of International Trade and Industries in September, 1994 and
applies to 200V class inverter s of 3.7k W ( 5HP) and less . By installing the FR-BEL or F R-BAL power f actor
improving reactor, inverters comply with the "harmonic suppression techniques for transistorized inverters
(input current 20A or less)" established by the Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association. Therefore
install the optional reactor for the 200V class, 3.7kW (5HP) or less inverter.
2) "Harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers"
This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents outgoing from a high-voltage or
especially high-voltage consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any of
the maximum values are exceeded, this guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression
measures.
Table 1 Maximum Values of Outgoing Harmonic Currents per 1kW Contract Power
Received Power
Voltage 5t h 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over 23rd
6.6kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.76 0.70
22kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36
33kV 1.2 0.86 0.55 0.46 0.35 0.32 0.26 0.24
(1) Application of the harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers
New installati on/addition/renewal of equipment
Sum of equivalent capacities
Over reference capacity
Is outgoing harmonic cur-
rent equal to or lower than
maxi mu m va lue ?
Over maximum value
Not more than
maxi mu m va lue
Not more than
reference capacity
Calculation of equiva l ent capa ci ty sum
Calculation of outgoing harmomic current
Harmomic suppression technique is required.
Harmomic suppression technique is not required.
Table 2 Conversion Factors for FR-A500 Series
Class Circuit Type Conversion Factor
Without reac tor K31 = 3.4
With reac t or (AC side) K32 = 1.8
With reac t or (DC side) K33 = 1.8
33-phase bridge
(Capacitor-smoothed) With reactors (AC, DC sides) K34 = 1.4
5 Self-excit i ng 3-phase bridge When high power factor c onverter is used K5 = 0
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
31
Table 3 Equivalent Capacity Limits
Received Power Voltage Reference Capacity
6.6kV 50kVA
22/33kV 300kVA
66kV or more 2000kVA
Table 4 Harmonic Content (Values at the fundamental current of 100%)
Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
Not used 65 41 8.5 7. 7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
Used (AC si de) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1. 9 1.7 1.3
Used (DC side) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
Used (AC, DC sides) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1. 6 1. 4
1) Calculation of equivalent capacity (P0) of harmonic generating equipment
The “equivalent capacity” is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the capacity of consumer’s
harmonic generating equipment and is calculated with the following equation. If the sum of equivalent
capacities is higher than the limit in Table 3, harmonics must be calculated with the following procedure:
P0 = Σ (Ki × Pi) [kVA]
Ki: Conversion factor (refer to Table 2)
Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic generating equipment* [kVA]
I : Number indicating the conversion circuit type
*: Rated capacity: Determined by the capacity
of the applied motor and found in Table 5. It
should be noted that the rated capacity
used here is used to calculate generated
harmonic amount and is different from the
power supply capacity required for actual
inverter drive.
2) Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) ×
operation ratio × harmonic content
• Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor × operation time ratio during 30 minutes
• Harmonic content: Found in Table 4.
Table 5 Rated Capacities and Outgoing Harmonic Currents for Inverter Drive
Rated Current [ A ] Fundamental
Wave Current
Converted from
6.6kV
Rated
Capacity Fundamental Wave Current Converted from 6.6kV
(No reactor, 100% operation rati o)
Applied
Motor
(kW (HP)) 200V 400V (mA) (kVA) 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
0.4 (0.5) 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882
0.75 (1) 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1. 494
1.5 (2) 2.75 167 1. 95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12. 86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006
2.2 (3) 3.96 240 2. 81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18. 48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320
3.7 (5)
Not
applied
6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092
5.5 (7.5) 19.1 9.55 579 6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44. 58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42
7.5 (10) 25.6 12.8 776 9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59. 75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97
11 (15) 36.9 18.5 1121 13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86. 32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18
15 (20) 49.8 24.9 1509 17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116. 2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16
18.5 (25) 61.4 30.7 1860 21.8 1209 762.6 158. 1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48
22 (30) 73.1 36.6 2220 25.9 1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96
30 (40) 98.0 49.0 2970 34.7 1931 1218 252.5 228. 7 127.7 92.07 77.22 53.46
37 (50) 121 60.4 3660 42.8 2379 1501 311.1 281.8 157. 4 113. 5 95.16 65.88
45 (60) 147 73.5 4450 52.1 2893 1825 378.3 342.7 191. 4 138. 0 115.7 80.10
55 (75) 180 89.9 5450 63.7 3543 2235 463.3 419.7 234. 4 169. 0 141.7 98.10
3) Harmonic suppression technique requirement
If the outgoing harmonic current is higher than; maximum value per 1kW (contract power) × contract
power, a harmonic suppression technique is required.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
32
4) Harmonic suppression techniques
No. Item Description
1Reactor installati on
(ACL, DCL) Inst all a reactor (ACL) in the AC si de of the inverter or a react or (DCL) in its DC side or bot h to
suppress out goi ng harmonic currents.
2High power factor
converter
(FR-HC)
The converter circuit is switched on-off to convert an input current waveform into a sine wave,
suppressing harmonic currents substantially. The high power factor converter (FR-HC) is used
with the standard access ory.
3Instal l ation of power
fact or i mproving
capacitor
When used with a seri es reactor, the power factor improving capaci tor has an ef fect of absorbing
harmonic currents .
4Transformer mul t i -
phase operation Use two transf orm ers with a phase angle dif ferenc e of 30° as in Y-∆, ∆-∆ combinat ion to provide
an effect corresponding to 12 pulses, reducing low-degree harmonic currents .
5 AC filter A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce impedance at specific frequencies,
producing a great ef fect of absorbing harmoni c currents.
6 Active filter
This filter detects the current of a circuit generating a harmonic current and generates a
harmonic current equivalent to a difference between that current and a fundamental wave
current to suppress a harmonic current at a detect ion point, providing a great eff ect of absorbing
harmonic currents .
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
33
2.3.3 Inverter-generated noises and reduction techniques
Some noises enter the inverter causing it to misoperate and others are radiated by the inverter causing
misoperation of peripheral devices. Though the inverter is designed to be insusceptible to noise, it handles
low-level signals, so it requires the following basic measures to be taken. Also, since the inverter chops the
output at a high carrier frequency, it could generate noise. If these noises cause peripheral devices to
misoperate, measures should be taken to suppress the noise. The measures differ slightly depending on
noise propagation paths.
1) Basic measures
• Do not run the power cables (I/O c ables) and s ignal cables of the inverter in par allel with each other and
do not bundle them.
• Use twisted shielded cables for the detector connection and control signal cables and connect the
sheathes of the shielded cables to terminal SD.
• Ground the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
2) Measures against noises which enter and cause misoperation of the inverter
When devices which generate many noises (which use magnetic contactors, magnetic brakes, many
relays, for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be effected by noise, the following
measures must be taken:
• Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate noise to suppress noise.
• Fit data line filters to signal cables.
• Ground the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal.
3) Measures against noise which is radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of peripheral devices.
Inverter-generated noise is largely classified into those radiated by the cables connected to the inverter and
inverter main circuit (I/O), those electromagnetically and electrostatically inducted to the signal cables of
the peripheral devices close to the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power
supply cables.
Air-propagated
noise
Magneti c inductio n
noise
Static induction
noise
Cable-propagated
noise
Noise directly radi-
ated by inverter
Noise radiated by
power cables
Noise radiated by
motor cable s
Noise propag ated
through power
cables
Noise from ground
cable due to
leakage current
Path 4),5)
Path 6)
Path 1)
Path 2)
Path 3)
Path 7)
Path 8)
Inverter-generated
noise
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
34
IM
In-
verter Sens or power supply
Receiver
Instrument
Telephone
Motor Sensor
5)
7) 2)
1)
7)
3)
2)
8)
3)
4) 6)
Noise Pat h Measures
1) 2) 3)
When devices which handle low-level signals and are susceptible to misoperation due to noise (such as
instrum ents, recei vers and sensors ) are inst alled near the inverter and thei r signal cables are contained in the
sam e panel as the inverter or are run near the invert er, the devices may be effec ted by air-propagated noises
and the foll owing m easures m ust be tak en:
(1) Instal l easily affected devices as far away as poss i bl e from t he i nvert er.
(2) Run easily affected s i gnal c abl es as far away as possible from the inverter.
(3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not
bundle them.
(4) Inset l i ne noi se filt ers into I/ O and radi o noi s e filters i nto input si de t o suppress c abl e-radi ated noises.
(5) Use shiel ded cables for signal cables and power cables and run them in indi vi dual met al conduits to reduce
further effects.
4) 5) 6)
W hen the signal c ables are run in parall el with or bundled with t he power cables, m agneti c and s tat ic induct ion
noise may be propagated to the signal cables to effect the devices and the fol l owing measures must be taken:
(1) Instal l easily affected devices as far away as poss i bl e from t he i nvert er.
(2) Run easily affected s i gnal c abl es as far away as possible form the inverter.
(3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not
bundle them.
(4) Use shiel d cables for signal c ables and power cables and run them in indi vidual metal conduits to reduce
further effects.
7)
W hen the power supplies of the peripheral devices are c onnect ed to t he power supply of t he inverter withi n the
sam e line, inverter-generated noise may f low back through the power supply c ables t o mis operate the devic es
and the foll owing m easures m ust be tak en:
(1) Instal l the radio noise f i l ter (FR-BIF) to the power cables (input c abl es) of the inverter.
(2) Instal l the line noise filter (FR-B LF, FR-BSF01) to t he power cables (I/O c abl es ) of the inverter.
8) W hen a closed loop circui t is f orm ed by c onnect ing the peri pheral devic e wiring to t he inverter, leak age current
may flow through the ground cable of the inverter to effect the device. In such a case, disconnection of the
ground cable of t he devi ce may c ause the device to operate properly.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
35
• Data line filter
Noise entry can be prevented by providing a data line filter for the detector cable etc.
Example Data line filter: ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK make)
ESD-SR-25 (Tokin make)
Impedance specifications (ZCAT3035-1330)
Im pedanc e (Ω)
10 to 100MHz 100 to 500MHz
80 150
The above impedanc e values are ref erenc e val ues
and not guaranteed values .
34±1
TDK
39±1
Produ ct name Lot number
φ30±1
Cable f i xing band
mounting section
φ13±1
Outli ne Dimension Drawing ( ZCAT3035-1330)
[Unit : mm]
• Data examples By decreasing the carrier frequency, the noise terminal voltage*
can be reduced. Use Pr. 72 to s et the carrier frequenc y to a low
value (1kHz).
Though motor noise increases at a low carrier frequency,
selection of S of t -P WM in Pr. 240 will mak e it unof fending.
Differenc es between Noise Term i nal Voltages
at Diff erent Carrier Frequencies
0.1 0.3 0.5 1 3 5 10 30
20
60
80
100
120
0
FR-A520-3.7K
fc=0.7kHz fc=14.5kHz
fc=2.0kHz Soft-PWM(Factory setting)
FR-A220E-3.7k fc=(14.5kHz)
Conditions
Motor: 3.7kW (5HP)
Average terminal voltage 0dB=1µV
120dB=1V
Noise terminal voltage (dB)
Noise frequency (MHz)
By decreasing the carrier frequency, noise will be about as low
as that of our conventional FR-Z200 series. By using shielded cables as signal cables, induction noise can
be reduced greatly (to 1/10 - 1/100). Induction nois e can also be
reduced by moving the signal cables away from the inverter
output cables . (S eparation of 30cm (11.81 inc hes) reduc es noise
to 1/2-1/3.)
By fitting the FR-BSF01 or BLF on the inverter output side,
inducti on noi se to the si gnal cables can be reduced.
Noise Terminal Volt age of Inverter and Exam pl e
of It s Reduction by Noi se ilters
0.1 0.3 0.5 1 3 5 10 3
0
20
60
80
100
120
0
FR-A520-3.7k(fc=0.7kHz)
FR-Z220-3.7K
Nois e f req u e ncy ( MHz )
Noise terminal voltage (dB)
Conditions
Motor:3.7kW (5HP)
Average terminal voltage 0dB=1µV
120dB=1V
Noise Induced to Signal Cabl es by Inverter Output Cables
20
40
60
80
100
10
020 30 40 50
5cm
d(cm)
FR-BLF
FR-BSF01
(4T)
Line-to -line distance, d (cm)
Induction voltage (dB)
Parallel cable
Twisted pair cable
Coaxial cable
Conditions
Inverter: FR-A520-3.7K
Motor: FR-JR 4P 3.7k W (5HP)
Output frequency: 30Hz
Noise form: Normal mode
Inverter Motor
Terminal
Measuring instrument
*Noise terminal voltage: Represents the m agni t ude of noise propagated from the i nverter to the power supply.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
36
z
Example of measures against noises
FR-
BLF
FR-
BIF
FR-
BLF
Install filter (FR-BLF,FR-
BSF01) to inverter input side.
Control box Reduce carrier
frequency.
Install filter (FR-BLF,FR-BSF01)
to inverter output side.
Use 4-core cable for motor
power cable and use one
cable as ground cable.
Use twisted pair
shielded cable. Sensor
Do not ground shield but connect
it to signal common cable.
Do not ground control box directly.
Do not ground control cable.
Control power
supply
Separate inverter and power line
30cm (11.81 inches) or more
(at least 10cm (3.94 inches))
from sensor circuit.
Install filter FR-BIF to
inverter input side.
Inverter power
supply
Power
supply for
sensor
Inverter Motor
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
37
2.3.4 Leakage currents and countermeasures
Due to the static capacitance existing in the inverter I/O wiring and motor, leakage currents flow through
them. Since their values depend on the static capacitance, carrier frequency, etc., take the following
measures.
(1) To-ground leakage currents
Leakage curr ents may flow not only into the inverter 's own line but also into the other line through the ground
cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate earth leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays
unnecessarily.
• Countermeasures
⋅ Decrease the carrier frequency (Pr. 72) of the inverter.
Note that motor noise increases. Selection of Soft-PWM (Pr. 240) will make it unoffending.
⋅ By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonics and surges (e.g. Mitsubishi's Progressive
Super Series) in the inverter's own line and other line, operation can be performed with low noise (with
the carrier frequency kept high)
• To-ground leakage current
⋅ Note that a long wiring length will increase leakage currents. Decrease the carrier frequency of the
inverter to reduce leakage currents.
⋅ Higher motor capacity leads to larger leakage c ur rents . Lar ger leakage curr ents occ ur in 400V clas s than
in 200V class.
(2) Line-to-line leakage currents
Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacities between the inverter output cables may operate the
external thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50m (164.04 f eet) or m ore) f or the 400V
class small-capacity model (7.5kW (10HP) or less), the external thermal relay is likely to operate
unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated motor current increases.
• Line-to-Line Leakage Current Data Example (200V class)
Leakage Current (mA)
Motor Capacit y
(kW (HP)) Rated Motor
Current (A) W i ri ng l engt h 50m
(164.04 feet) Wiring l ength 100m
(328.08 feet)
0.4 (0.5) 1.8 310 500
0.75 (1) 3.2 340 530
1.5 (2) 5.8 370 560
2.2 (3) 8.1 400 590
3.7 (5) 12.8 440 630
5.5 (7.5) 19.4 490 680
7.5 (10) 25. 6 535 725
Motor: SF-J 4P
Carrier frequency : 14.5Hz
Cable used: 2mm2 4-core
cable
* Leakage current of the 400V class is about twice larger.
IM
NFB
Line-to -Line Leakage C urr ent Path
Power
s
upply Inverter
Thermal relay
Line static capacitances
Motor
• Countermeasures
⋅ Use the electronic overcurrent protection (Pr. 9) of the inverter.
⋅ Decrease the carrier frequency. Note that motor noise increases. Selection of Soft-PWM (Pr. 240) will
make it unoffending.
To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a
temperature sensor to directly detect motor temperature.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
38
2.3.5 Inverter-driven 400V class motor
In the PWM type inverter, a s ur ge voltage attributable to wiring cons tants is generated at the motor ter minals.
Especially for a 400V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation. When the 400V class
motor is driven by the inverter, consider the following measures:
• Measures
It is recommended to take either of the following measures:
(1) Rectify ing the motor insulation
For the 400V class motor, use an insulation-rectified motor. Specifically,
1) Specify the “400V class inverter-driven, insulation-rectified motor”.
2) For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use the
“inverter-driven, dedicated motor”.
(2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side
On the secondary side of the inverter, connect the optional surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H).
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
39
2.3.6 Peripheral devices
(1) Selection of peripheral devices
Check the capacity of the motor to be used with the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices
must be selected according to the capacity.
Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
1) 200V class
No-Fuse Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Break er
Inverter Type Motor Output
(kW (HP))
Power Supply
Capacity
(kVA) Standard Wit h power factor
improvi ng reactor
Magnetic
Contactor
FR-A520-0.4K 0.4 (0.5) 1.5 Type NF30, NV30 5A Type NF30, NV30 5A S-N10
FR-A520-0.75K 0.75 (1) 2.5 Type NF30, NV30 10A Type NF30, NV30 10A S-N10
FR-A520-1.5K 1.5 (2) 4.5 Type NF30, NV30 15A Type NF30, NV30 15A S-N10
FR-A520-2.2K 2.2 (3) 5.5 Type NF30, NV30 20A Type NF30, NV30 15A S-N11,N12
FR-A520-3.7K 3.7 (5) 9 Type NF30, NV30 30A Type NF30, NV 30 30A S-N20
FR-A520-5.5K 5.5 (7.5) 12 T ype NF50, NV50 50A Type NF50, NV50 40A S-N25
FR-A520-7.5K 7.5 (10) 17 Type NF100, NV100 60A Type NF50, NV50 50A S-N35
FR-A520-11K 11 (15) 20 Type NF100, NV100 75A Type NF100, NV 100 75A S -K 50
FR-A520-15K 15 (20) 28 Type NF225, NV225 125A Type NF100, NV100 100A S-K65
FR-A520-18.5K 18.5 (25) 34 Type NF225, NV225 150A Type NF225, NV225 125A S-K80
FR-A520-22K 22 (30) 41 Type NF225, NV225 175A Type NF225, NV225 150A S-K95
FR-A520-30K 30 (40) 52 Type NF225, NV225 225A Type NF225, NV225 175A S-K125
FR-A520-37K 37 (50) 66 Type NF400, NV400 250A Type NF225, NV225 225A S-K150
FR-A520-45K 45 (60) 80 Type NF400, NV400 300A Type NF400, NV400 300A S-K180
FR-A520-55K 55 (75) 100 Type NF400, NV400 400A Type NF400, NV400 350A S-K220
2) 400V class
No-Fuse Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Break er
Inverter Type Motor Output
(kW (HP))
Power Supply
Capacity
(kVA) Standard Wit h power factor
improvi ng reactor
Magnetic
Contactor
FR-A540-0.4K 0.4 (0.5) 1.5 Type NF30, NV30 5A Type NF30, NV30 5A S-N10
FR-A540-0.75K 0.75 (1) 2.5 Type NF30, NV30 5A Type NF30, NV 30 5A S-N10
FR-A540-1.5K 1.5 (2) 4.5 Type NF30, NV30 10A Type NF30, NV30 10A S-N10
FR-A540-2.2K 2.2 (3) 5.5 Type NF30, NV30 15A Type NF30, NV30 10A S-N11,S-N12
FR-A540-3.7K 3.7 (5) 9 Type NF30, NV30 20A Type NF30, NV30 15A S-N20
FR-A540-5.5K 5.5 (7.5) 12 T ype NF30, NV30 30A Type NF30, NV 30 20A S-N20
FR-A540-7.5K 7.5 (10) 17 Type NF30, NV30 30A Type NF30, NV 30 30A S-N20
FR-A540-11K 11 (15) 20 Type NF50, NV50 50A Type NF50, NV50 40A S-N20
FR-A540-15K 15 (20) 28 Type NF100, NV100 60A Type NF50, NV50 50A S -N25
FR-A540-18.5K 18.5 (25) 34 Type NF100, NV100 75A Type NF100, NV100 60A S-N35
FR-A540-22K 22 (30) 41 Type NF100, NV100 100A Type NF100, NV100 75A S-K50
FR-A540-30K 30 (40) 52 Type NF225, NV225 125A Type NF100, NV100 100A S-K65
FR-A540-37K 37 (50) 66 Type NF225, NV225 150A Type NF225, NV225 125A S-K80
FR-A540-45K 45 (60) 80 Type NF225, NV225 175A Type NF225, NV225 150A S-K80
FR-A540-55K 55 (75) 100 Type NF225, NV225 200A Type NF225, NV225 175A S-K125
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
40
(2) Selection the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit breaker
When using the earth leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as
follows, independent of the carrier frequency setting:
• Progressive Super Series (Type SP, CP)
Rated sensitivity current:
l∆n ≥ 10 × (lg1 + lgn + lg2 + lgm)
• Conventional NV series (Type CA, CS, SS)
Rated sensitivity current:
l∆n ≥ 10 × {lg1 + lgn + 3 × (lg2+lgm)}
lg1, lg2: leakage currents of cable path
during commercial power supply
operation
lgn* : leakage current of noise filter on
inverter input side
lgm : leakage current of motor during
commercial power supply operation 0
20
40
60
80
100
120
23.5
5.5 81422
30
386080
100
150 0.1 1.5 3.7
2.2 7.5 1522
11 37
30 55
45
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.0
2.0
5.5 18.5
Leakage current example
of 3-phase induction motor
during commercial power
supply operation
(200V 60Hz)
Leakage current (mA)
Leakage current (mA)
Cable size (mm )
2Motor capacity (kW)
Example of leakage current
per 1kW in cable path during
commercial power supply
operation when the CV
cable is routed in metal
conduit (200V 60Hz)
<Example>
NV
Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm
5.5mm2•~ 5m
(16.40 feet) 5.5mm2•~ 70m
(2 29.66 feet)
IM 3ƒÓ
200V 2.2kW (3HP)
Inverter
Noise
filter
Progress i ve Super
Series
(Type SP, CP)
Conventional NV
(Type CA, CS , SS)
5m (16.40 feet )
Leakage current I g1 33 ×1000m (3280. 80 f eet) = 0.17
Leakage current I gn 0 (without noise filt er)
70m (229.66 feet )
Leakage current I g2 33 ×1000m (3280. 80 f eet) = 2. 31
Motor leakage current Igm 0.18
Total leak age current 2.66 7.64
Note 1. The NV should be installed to the
primary (power supply) side of the
inverter.
2. Ground fault in the secondary side of the
inverter can be detected at the running
frequency of 120Hz or lower.
3. If the Y connection neutral point ground
fault in the inverter secondary side.
The protective ground resistance of the
load equipment should be 10Ω or less.
Reted sensitivity current
( ≥Ig × 10) 30 100
4. When the breaker is grounded on the secondary side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily
operated by harm onics if the effective value is less than the rating. In this case, note that the eddy
current and hysteresis loss increase and temperature rises.
* For the leakage current value of the noise filter installed on the inverter input side, contact the
corresponding filter manufacturer.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
41
2.3.7 Instructions for compliance with the UL and CSA standards
(Since we obtained the approval of the UL and CSA Standards from the UL, the products conforming to the
Standards carry the UL and cUL marks.)
(1) Installation
The above types have been approved as products for use in enclosure and approval tests were conducted
under the following conditions. In enc losure des ign, ref er to these conditions so that the am bient tem perature
of the inverter becomes 50°C or less.
Inverter Type Control B ox Size (Uni t : mm (inches )) Vent Hole Area Cooling Fan
FR-A520-0.75K W H D
210 × 360 × 175
(8.27 × 14.17 × 6.89)
W D
160 × 60
(6.29 × 2.36)
(top and bottom) Not required
FR-A520-11K W H D
320 × 400 × 240
(12.60 × 15.75 × 9.45)
W D
130 × 70
(5.12 × 2.76)
(bottom)
Instal l a cooling fan at top of the
enclosure to suck internal air to the
outside.
(Fan air flow: 1.72m3/min. or more)
FR-A520-22K
Control box having
the size of the
inverter size plus
100mm (3.94) in W,
100mm (3.94) in H
and 50mm in D W H D
350 × 600 × 240
(13.78 × 23.62 × 9.45)
W D
330 × 70
(12.99 × 2.76)
(bottom)
Instal l a cooling fan at top of the
enclosure to suck internal air to the
outside.
(Fan air flow: 3.44m3/min. or more)
FR-A520-55K W H D
580 × 815 × 300
(
22.83 × 32.09 × 11.81
)
W D
123 × 492 (bottom)
(4.84 × 19.37)
123 × 126
(
bottom × 2
)
(4.84 × 4.96)
123 × 300
(
bottom × 2
)
(4.84 × 1.18)
Instal l cooling fans at top of the enclosure
to suc k i nternal air to t he outside.
(Fan air flow: 2 × 3.24m3/min. or more)
FR-A540-5.5K W H D
310 × 460 × 220
(12.20 × 18.11 × 8.66)
W D
100 × 210 (top)
(3.94 × 8.27)
160 × 480 (bottom)
(2.36 × 1.89)
Not required.
FR-A540-22K W H D
350 × 600 × 240
(13.78 × 23.62 × 9.45)
W D
330 × 70 (bottom)
(12.99 × 2.76)
Instal l cooling fans at top of the enclosure
to suc k i nternal air to t he outside.
(Fan air flow: 2 × 1.72m3/min. or more)
FR-A540-55K
Inverter s i ze pl us
100mm (3.94) in W,
100mm (3.94) in H
and 50mm (1.97) in
D
W H D
550 × 665 × 300
(
21.65 × 26.18 × 11.81
)
W D
123 × 126
(4.84 × 4.96)
(lower section has 2
ventilat ion ports)
Instal l at the upper sec tion of the panel
so that the air in the panel i s blown out of
the panel.
(Fan capacity: 2 × 3.24m3/min. or more)
(2) Wiring of the power supply and motor
Use the UL-approved power supply and round crim ping term inals to wire the input (R , S, T) 〈L1, L2, L3〉 and output
(U, V, W) terminals of the inverter. Crimp the terminals with the crimping tool recommended by the terminal
manufacturer.
(3) Fuse
On the input side, use any of the UL Class K5 fuses having the ratings as listed below:
Applic abl e I nverter Type Rating (A ) Applic abl e I nverter Type Rating (A)
FR-A520-0.4K 7.5 to 10 FR-A540-0.4K 5
FR-A520-0.75K 15 to 20 FR-A540-0.75K 8
FR-A520-1.5K 25 to 30 FR-A540-1.5K 10
FR-A520-2.2K 30 to 40 FR-A540-2.2K 20
FR-A520-3.7K 45 to 60 FR-A540-3.7K 35
FR-A520-5.5K 75 to 90 FR-A540-5.5K 45
FR-A520-7.5K 90 to 125 FR-A540-7.5K 60
FR-A520-11K 115 to 175 FR-A540-11K 90
FR-A520-15K 190 to 225 FR-A540-15K 110
FR-A520-18.5K 225 to 300 FR-A540-18.5K 125
FR-A520-22K 265 to 350 FR-A540-22K 150
FR-A520-30K 340 to 450 FR-A540-30K 225
FR-A520-37K 375 to 500 FR-A540-37K 250
FR-A520-45K 450 to 600 FR-A540-45K 300
FR-A520-55K 600 FR-A540-55K 350
(4) Short-circuit rating
Having been put to the short-circuit test of the UL in the AC circuit whose peak current is limited to ∗ A max.,
this inverter conforms to this circuit.
Inverter Type *
1.5kW t o 37kW (2HP to 50HP ) 5,000
45kW, 55kW (60, 75HP) 10,000
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
42
2.3.8 Instructions for compliance with the European standards
(The products conforming to the Low Voltage Directive carry the CE mark.)
(1) EMC Directive
1) Our view of transistorized inverters for the EMC Directive
A transistorized inverter does not function independently. It is a component designed for installation in
a control box and for use with the other equipment to control the equipment/device. Therefore, we
understand that the EMC Directive does not apply directly to transistorized inverters. For this reason,
we do not place the CE mark on the transistorized inverters themselves. (The CE mark is placed on
inverters in accordance with the Low Voltage Directive.) The European power drive manufacturers'
organization (CEMEP) also holds this point of view.
2) Compliance
We understand that the transistorized inverters themselves are not covered directly by the EMC
Directive. However, the EMC Directive applies to machines/equipment into which transistorized
inverters have been incorporated, and these machines and equipment must carry the CE marks.
Hence, we prepared the technical information "EMC Installation Guidelines" (information number BCN-
A21041-202) so that machines and equipment incorporating transistorized inverters may conform to
the EMC Directive more easily.
3) Outline of installation method
Install an inverter using the following methods:
* Use the inverter with an European Standard-compliant noise filter.
* For wiring between the inverter and motor, use shielded cables or run them in a metal piping and
ground the cables on the inverter and motor sides with the shortest possible distance.
* Insert a line noise filter and ferrite core into the power and control lines as required.
Full information including the European Standard-compliant noise filter specifications are written in
the technical information "EMC Installation Guidelines" (information number BCN-A21041-202).
Please contact your sales representative.
(2) Low Voltage Directive
1) Our view of transistorized inverters for the Low Voltage Directive
Transistorized inverters are covered by the Low Voltage Directive.
2) Compliance
We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage Directive and place
the CE mark on the inverters.
3) Outline of instructions
* In the 400V class inverters, the rated input voltage range is three-phase, 380V to 415V, 50Hz/60Hz.
* Connect the equipment to the earth securely. Do not use an earth leakage circuit breaker as an
electric shock protector without connecting the equipment to the earth.
* Wire the earth terminal independently. (Do not connect two or more cables to one terminal.)
* On the input side, use the r ecomm ended no-fuse break er and m agnetic contactor which conform to
the EN or IEC Standard.
* Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage categor y II and contam ination level 2 or less set
forth in IEC664.
(a) T o meet the overvoltage categor y II, insert an EN or IEC st andard- compliant isolation transf or mer
or surge suppressor in the input of the inverter.
(b) T o meet the contamination level 2, ins tall the invert er in a c ontro l box pr otec ted against ingr es s of
water, oil, carbon, dust, etc. (IP54 or higher).
* In the input and output of the inverter , use c ables of the type and size set forth in EN60204 Appendix
C.
* The operating c apacity of the relay outputs (ter minal symbols A, B, C) should be 30VDC, 0.3A. (T he
relay outputs are basically isolated from the inverter's internal circuitry.)
Details are given in the technic al info rm ation "Low Voltage Directive Confor m ance Guide" (infor m ation
number BCN-A21041-203). Please contact your sales representative.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
43
2.3.9 Earthing (EC version)
(1) Earthing and Earth Leakage Current
(a) Purpose of Earthing
Electrical equipment usually has an Earthing Terminal, this must be connected to earth before using
equipment.
For protection, electric circuits are normally housed inside an insulated case. However it is impossible
to manufacture insulating materials that prevent all current from leaking across them, therefore it is the
function of the earth (safety earth) to prevent electric shocks when touching the case.
There is however, another important earthing function, which is to prevent equipment that uses very
weak signals (Audio equipment, sensors, transducers, etc.) or micro processors from being affected
by Radio Frequency Interference, (RFI) from external sources.
(b) Points to remember when Earthing
As detailed above there are two entirely different types of earthing and to attempt to use the same
earth for both will lead to problems. It is necessary to separate the “safety” earthing (a yellow/green
wire to prevent electric shocks) from the “FRI” earthing (a braided wire strap to counter radio noise).
The inverter output voltage does not take the form of a sine wave but of a modulated pulse wave form
causing “noisy” leakage current due to the capacitance of the insulation.
The same type of leakage current will occur in the motor due to the charging and discharging of the
insulation from the high frequency wave form. This trend becomes more pronounced with higher
carrier frequencies.
To solve this problem it is necessary to use separate “dirty” earthing for inverter and motor installations
an “clean” earting for equipment such as sensors, computers and audio equipment.
(2) Earthing methods
Two main ty pes of earth
1-To prevent electrical shocks
Yellow and green cable
2-To prevent RFI induced malfunction
Braided strap
It is im portant to m ake a clear dis tinction between these two, and to keep them separate by following the
measures below.
a) When possible earth the inverter independently of other equipment.
If independent earthing is not possible, use a common earthing point.
Avoid connecting earthing wires together particularly on high power equipment such as motors and
inverters.
Independent earthing should always be used between sensitive equipment and inverters.
Other
equipment
Inverter
(a) Independent grounding
Other
equipment
Inverter
(b) common grounding (c) Groun ding wire of
other e
q
uipment
Other
equipment
Inverter
b) Safety earths should be...
For 400V duty - Special class 3, 10Ω or less
For 200V duty - Class 3, 100Ω or less
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
44
c) The safety earth should be as thick as possible, minimum thickness as stated in below table.
d) The earthing point should be as close to the inverter as possible, and the wire as short as possible.
e) T he RF I earth s hould be a br aided st rap with a 10m m2 m inim um cross sectional area, and as s hort as
possible.
f) T he earths should be as far away from input and output cables (particularly to equipment sensitive to
RFI) as possible, and any distance where they are parallel should be kept to a minimum.
g) Design in RFI prevention before installation. (Unit: mm2)
Earth Wi re Size
Motor Size 400V Class
3.7kW or l ess 2
5.5kW, 7.5kW 3.5
11kW to 15kW 8
18.5kW t o 37kW 14
45kW, 55kW 22
3
CHAPTER 3
OPERATION
This chapter provides the basic "operation" for use of this
product.
Always read this chapter before using the equipment.
3.1 Pre-Operation Information........................................45
3.2 Operation.................................................................53
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION
CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS
CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 6 SPECIFICAT IONS
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS
APPENDICES
3.1 Pre-Operation Information
OPERATION
45
3 OPERATION
3.1 Pre-O per ation Inform ation
3.1.1 Devices and parts to be prepared for operation
The inverter can be operated in any of the "external operation mode", "PU operation mode", "combined
operation mode" and "communication operation mode". Prepare required instruments and parts according to
the operation mode.
(1) External operation mode (factory setting)
The inverter is operated under the control of external
operation signals (frequency setting potentiometer,
start switch, etc.) connected to the terminal block.
With input power on, switch on the start signal (STF,
STR) to start operation.
Preparation
· Start signal..................................Switch, relay, etc.
DU04
PU04
Potentiometer
Inverter
Start switch
· Frequency setting signal .............0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA DC signals from a potentiom eter or outside
the inverter
Note: 1. Both the start signal and frequency setting signal are required to run the inverter.
(2) PU operation mode
The inverter is operated from the keypad of the PU
(FR-DU04/FR-PU04).
This mode does not require the operation signals to
be connected and is useful for an immediate start of
operation.
Preparation
DU04
PU04
Inverter
· Operation unit..............................Operation panel (FR-DU04), parameter unit (FR-PU04)
· Connection cable ........................To be prepared for use of the operation unit away from the inverter.
FR-CB2 (option) or the following connector and cable available on the
market:
Connector : RJ45 connector
Cable : Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)
(3) External/PU combined operation mode
The inverter is operated with the external operation
and PU operation modes combined in any of the
following ways:
1) The start signal is set with the external signal and
the frequency setting signal set from the PU; or
2) The s tart signal is set with the r un com m and k ey of
the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) and the frequenc
y
setting signal set with the external f requenc y setting
potentiometer.
3) Set "3" in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection".
PU PU
Potentiometer
Inverter
St ar t sw itch
OPERATION
46
Preparation
· Start signal ..................................Switch, relay , etc. (for 1)
· Frequency setting signal .............0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA DC signals from a potentiom eter or outside
the inverter (for 2)
· Operation unit..............................Operation panel (FR-DU04), parameter unit (FR-PU04)
· Connection cable ........................To be prepared for use of the operation unit away from the inverter
FR-CB2 (option) or the following connector and cable available on the
market:
Connector : RJ45 connector
Cable : Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)
3) Combined operation mode
Change the setting of Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" as follows:
Description
Setting Running frequency setting Start signal
3PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04)
· Direct set ting and [UP/DOWN] key setti ng Terminal si gnal
· STF
· STR
4
Terminal signal
·0 to 5VDC ac ross 2-5
·0 to 10VDC ac ross 2-5
·4 to 20m ADC across 4-5
·Multi-speed selec tion (Pr. 4 t o Pr. 6, Pr. 24
to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to P r. 239)
·Jog frequenc y (Pr. 15)
Parameter unit
· [FWD] key
· [REV] key
(4) Communication operation mode
Comm unication operation can be perform ed by connecting a personal computer and the PU connector with
the RS-485 communication cable.
The inverter setup software is available as an FR-A500 inverter start-up support software package.
Preparation
· Connection cable ........................Connector : RJ45 connector
Cable : Cable conforming to EIA568
(e.g. 10BASE-T cable)
· Personal computer
<Inverter setup software operating environment>
OS ................................................Windows 3.1, Windows 95
RAM..............................................1MB or more
Floppy disk drive...........................One or more 3.5 inch flopp
y
disk drives
Mouse...........................................Mouse connectable to the
personal computer
OPERATION
47
3.1.2 Power on
Before switching power on, check the following:
• Installation check
Make sure that the inverter is installed correctly in a correct place. (Refer to page 7.)
· Wiring check
Make sure that the main and control circuits are wired correctly.
Make sure that the options and peripheral devices are selected and connected correctly.
(Refer to page 9.)
• Switch power on.
Power-on is complete when the POWER lam p is lit c orr ectly and the oper ation panel (F R- DU04) dis plays
correct data.
3.1.3 Parameter check
The inverter is designed to perform simple variable-speed operation with the factory settings of the
parameters. Set the necessary parameters according to the load and operation specifications. Use the
operation panel (FR-DU04) to set, change and confirm the parameter values. For full information on the
parameters, refer to "CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS" (page 57).
(1) Operation panel (FR-DU04)
With the operation panel (FR-DU04), you can set the running frequency, monitor the operation command
display, set parameters, display an error, and copy parameters.
1) Names and functions of the operation panel (FR-DU04)
Display
LED ×4 digits
[MODE] key
[SET] key
Unit indication
Hz (frequency)
A (current)
V (volt age)
Operation status indication
[Operation command] keys
[REV] (reverse rotation) key
[FWD] (forward rotation) key
[STOP/RESE T] key
FR-DU04 Hz
A
V
MON EXT PU
CONTROL PANEL
FWD
MODE
SET
REV FWD
STOP
RESET
REV
Key Description
[MODE] k ey You can sel ect the operat i on mode or setting mode.
[SET ] key You can determine the f requency and parameter setting.
[UP/DOWN] key
( key) · Us ed to increas e or decrease the running frequency cons ecutively. Hold down this key to change the
frequency.
· Press this key in the set ting mode to change the parameter set ting consec utively.
[REV] key Used to give a revers e rotation comm and.
[FWD] key Used to give a f orward rotati on command.
[STOP/RESET] key · Used to st op operat i on.
· Used to reset t he i nverter when its output i s stopped by t he prot ective function act i vated (major fault).
OPERATION
48
2) Monitor display changed by pressing the [MODE] key
MODE MODE MODE MODE
MODE
z
Help mode
z
Monitoring mode
z
Parameter setting mode
z
Operation mode
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
z
Frequency setting mode (Note)
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
Note: The frequency setting mode is display ed only in the PU operation mode.
(2) Key operation
1) Monitoring mode
· Operation command indications in the monitoring mode
EXT is lit to indicate external operation.
PU is lit to indicate PU operation.
Both EXT and PU are lit to indicate PU/external combined operation mode.
· The monitor display can also be changed during operation.
MODE
SET SET SET
SET
SET
SET
*1
SET
*1
SET
*1
*2
To 2) Frequency setting mode (Note 3)
z
Frequenc y mo nitor
z
Current monitor
z
Voltage monitor
z
Alarm monitor
Alarm present
Alarm absent
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
Note: 1. Hold down the [SET] key m arked *1 for m ore than 1.5 seconds to change the current m onitor to
the power-on monitor.
2. Hold down the [SET] k ey marked *2 for more than 1.5 sec onds to display four err ors inc luding the
most recent one.
3. Shifts to the parameter setting mode when in the external operation mode.
2) Frequency setting mode
· Used to set the running frequency in the PU operation mode.
MODE
SET
MODE
To 3) Parameter setting mode
z
Set frequency write
z
Set frequency change
Press to change the set frequency.
To frequency monitor
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
OPERATION
49
3) Parameter setting mode
· A param eter value may either be set by updating its parameter num ber or setting the value digit-by-digit
using the [UP/DOWN] key.
· To write the setting, change it and press the [SET] key 1.5 seconds.
Set "0" or "4" (factory setting) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" or select the PU operation mode.
MODE SET
SET SET
SET SET
MODE
SET
0 ∼ 90 ∼ 90 ∼ 9
SET
To 4) Operation mode
z
Parameter number change
z
Setting change Pres s for
1.5 sec.
z
Setting write Flicker
Press
to change the setting.
Simulta neou s input
Most significant digit flickers Middle digit flickers Least significant digit flickers
z
hanging the param et er nu mb er
to change the parameter number .
Press
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
4) Operation mode
MODE MODEMODE
To 5) Help mode
z
External operation
z
PU operation
z
PU jog operation
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
5) Help mode
MODE
To 1) Monitoring mode
z
Alarm history
z
Alarm history
clear
z
Parame ter cl ear
z
All clear
z
User clear
z
Software version
read
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
OPERATION
50
· Alarm history
Four past alarms can be displayed w ith the [UP/DOWN] key.
("." is appended to the most recent alarm.)
E.HIS SET Shows an alarm. (When no alarm exists, E._ _0 is displayed.)
Alarm display SET Frequency at alarm occurrence is displayed.
· Alarm history clear
Clears all alarm history.
SET SET
SET
Flicker
Cancel
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
· Parameter clear
Initialises the parameter values to the factory settings. The calibration values are not initialized.
(Parameter values are not cleared by setting "1" in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection).)
SET SET
SET
Flicker
Cancel
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
· All clear
Initialises the parameter values and calibration values to the factory settings.
SET SET
SET
Flicker
Cancel
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
· User clear
Initialises the user-set parameters.
The other parameters are initialized to the factory settings.
SET SET
SET
Flicker
Cancel
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
OPERATION
51
6) Copy mode
By using the operation panel (FR-DU04), the parameter values can be copied to another inverter (only the
FR-A500 series).
1) Operation procedure
After reading the parameter values from the copy source inverter, connect the operation panel to the
copy destination inverter, and write the parameter values.
After writing the parameters to the inverter of copy destination, always reset the inverter, e.g. switch
power off once, before starting operation.
SET SET SET
SET
Connect to copy destination inverter.
z
Parameter setting mode
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
z
Para meter read
z
Parameter write
z
Para meter verify
Press for
1.5 sec. Press for
1.5 sec. Press for
1.5 sec.
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
After writing the parameters,
always reset the inverter before
operation.
Note: 1. W hile the copy function is being ac tivated, the monitor display flick ers. T he display r eturns to the
lit-up state on completion of the copy function.
2. If a read error occurs during parameter read, "read error (E.rE1)" is displayed.
3. If a write error occurs during parameter write, "write error (E.rE2)" is displayed.
4. If a data discrepancy occurs during parameter verify, the corresponding parameter number and
"verify error (E.rE3)" are displayed alternately. If the direct frequency setting or jog frequency
setting is discrepant, "verify error (E.rE3)" flickers. To ignore this display and continue verify,
press the [SET] key.
5. When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-A500 series, "model error (E.rE4)" is displayed.
Reference: It is recommended to read the parameter values after completion of parameter setting.
By writing the param eter values f rom the operation panel fitted to a new inverter after inverter
replacement, parameter setup can be completed.
OPERATION
52
(3) Parameter setting check
We recommend the following parameters to be set by the user.
Set them according to the operation specifications, load, etc. (Refer to page 57.)
Parameter
Number Name Application
1 Maximum frequency
2 Minimum f requency Used to s et the maxim um and mi ni mum output frequenci es.
7 Acceleration time
8 Decelerat i on time
44 Second acceleration/ deceleration
time
45 Second deceleration time
110 Third accel erat i on/decelerati on
time
111 Third decel erat i on time
Used to s et the acceleration and decelerat i on t i mes.
9 Elec tronic thermal O/L relay Used to set the current of the electronic overcurrent protection to protect
the m ot or from overheat .
14 Load pattern select i on Used to select the optimum output characteristics which match the
applicat i on and l oad characteris tics.
71 Appl i ed motor Used to set the thermal characteristics of the electronic overcurrent
protecti on according to the mot or us ed.
73 0-5V/ 0-10V selection Used to select the specifications of the frequency setting signal entered
across t erminal 2-5 t o perform operat i on with t he vol tage input si gnal .
900 FM term i nal calibration
901 AM terminal cal i bration Used to c al i brate the meters connec ted across t erminals FM-SD and AM-5.
902 Frequency s et ting voltage bias
903 Frequency s et ting voltage gain
904 Frequency s et ting current bi as
905 Frequency s et ting current gai n
Used to set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency relative to the
frequency setting si gnal (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC) as desired.
3.2 Operation
OPERATION
53
3.2 Operat ion
3.2.1 Pre-operation checks
Before starting operation, check the following:
•Safety
Perform test operation after making sure that safety is ensured if the machine should become out of
control.
•Machine
Make sure that the machine is free of damage.
•Parameters
Set the parameter values to match the operating machine system environment.
•Test operation
Perform test operation and make sure that the machine operates safely under light load at a low frequency.
After that, start operation.
OPERATION
54
3.2.2 External operation mode (Operation using external input signals)
(1) Operation at 60Hz
Step Description Image
1
Power-on → Operation mode check
Switch power on and make sure that the operation command
indication "EXT" is lit.
(If it is not lit, switch to the external operation mode.)
ON
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
2
Start
Turn on the start switch (STF or STR).
The operation status indication "FWD" or "REV" flickers.
Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and reverse
rotation switches are turned on.
If both switches are turned on during operation, the motor
decelerates to a stop.
Reverse
rotation
Forward
rotation
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
3
Acceleration → Constant speed
Slowly turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) full
clockwise.
The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to 60.00Hz. FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
4
Deceleration
Slowly turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) full
counterclockwise.
The frequency shown on the display decreases gradually to 0.00Hz.
The motor stops running. REV FWD
5
Stop
Turn off the start switch (STF or STR).
OFF
Stop
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
(2) External jog operation
Keep the start switch (STF or STR) on to perform operation, and switch it off to stop.
1) Set Pr. 15 "jog frequency" and Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration".
2) Select the external operation mode.
3) Switch on the jog signal. Keep the start switch (STF or STR) on to perform operation.
OPERATION
55
3.2.3 PU operation mode
(Operation using the operation panel (FR-DU04))
(1) Operation at 60Hz
While the motor is running, repeat the following steps 2 and 3 to vary the speed:
Step Description Image
1
Power-on → Operation mode check
Switch power on and make sure that the operation command
indication "PU" is lit.
(If it is not lit, switch to the PU operation mode.)
ON
REV FWD
2
Running frequency setting
Set the running frequency to 60Hz.
First, press the [MODE] key to select the frequency setting mode.
Then, press the [UP/DOWN] key to change the setting, and press
the [SET] key to write the frequency.
(or)
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
3
Start
Press the [FWD] or [REV] key.
The motor starts running. The monitoring mode is automatically
selected and the output frequency is displayed.
REVFWD (or)
REV FWD
4
Stop
Press the [STOP] key.
The motor is decelerated to a stop. FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
(2) PU jog operation
Hold down the [FWD] or [REV] key to perform operation, and release it to stop.
1) Set Pr. 15 "jog frequency" and Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration".
2) Select the PU jog operation mode.
3) Hold down the [FWD] or [REV] key to perform operation.
(If the motor remains stopped, check Pr. 13 "starting frequency". The motor will not start if its setting is
lower than the starting frequency.)
OPERATION
56
3.2.4 Combined operation mode
(Operation using the external input signals and PU)
When entering the start signal from outside the inverter and setting the running frequency from the PU
(Pr. 79 = 3)
The external frequency setting signals and the PU's FWD, REV and STOP keys are not accepted.
Step Description Image
1
Power-on
Switch power on. ON
2
Operation mode selection
Set "3" in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection".
The combined operation m ode is selected and the operation status
indication "EXT" and "PU" are lit.
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
3
Start
Turn on the start switch (STF or STR).
Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and reverse
rotation switches are turned on. If both switches are
turned on during operation, the motor decelerates (when
Pr. 250 = "9999") to a stop.
ON
Reverse
rotation
Forward
rotation
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
4
Running frequency setting
Using the parameter unit, set the running frequency to 60Hz.
The operation command indication "REV" or "FWD" is lit.
· Select the frequency setting mode and make step setting.
Note: Step setting is the way of changing the frequency
consecutively by pressing the [UP/DOWN] key.
Hold down the [UP/DOWN] key to change the frequency.
<Step setting>
5
Stop
Turn off the start switch (STF or STR).
The motor stops running. FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
4
CHAPTER 4
PARAMETERS
This chapter explains the "parameters" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
4.1 Parameter List .........................................................57
4.2 Parameter Function Details......................................63
Note: By making parameter settings, you can change the functions of contact input
terminals RL, RM, RH, RT, AU, JOG, CS and open collector output terminals
RUN, SU, IPF, OL, FU. Therefore, signal names corresponding to the functions
are used in the description of this chapter (except in the wiring examples). Note
that they are not terminal names.
Note: The settings in brackets refer to the “EC” version default settings.
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION
CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS
CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 6 SPECIFICAT IONS
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS
APPENDICES
4.1 Parameter List
PARAMETERS
57
4 PARAMETER
4.1 Parameter List
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Setting Range Minimum
Setting
Increments
Factory Setting
〈EC Version〉
Refer
To
Page:
0 Torque boost (Note 1) 0 to 30% 0. 1% 6%/4%/3%/2%
(Note 9) 63
1 Maximum frequenc y 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 120Hz 64
2 Minimum f requenc y 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 64
3 Base frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉65
4 Multi-speed s et t ing (high speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 66
5 Multi-speed s et t ing (middle speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 30Hz 66
6 Multi-speed s et t ing (low speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 10Hz 66
7 Acceleration time 0 to 3600 s/
0 to 360 s 0. 1 s /
0.01 s 5 s/ 15 s
(Note 6) 67
8 Deceleration time 0 to 3600 s/
0 to 360 s 0. 1 s /
0.01 s 5 s/ 15 s
(Note 6) 67
Basic functions
9 Electronic t herm al O/ L relay 0 to 500A 0.01A Rated output
current 68
10 DC injection brake operat ion f requenc y 0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 3Hz 69
11 DC injection brake operat ion t im e 0 to 10 s , 8888 0.1 s 0.5 s 69
12 DC injection brake voltage 0 to 30% 0.1% 4%/2% (Note 6) 69
13 Starting frequenc y 0 to 60Hz 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 70
14 Load pattern selec t ion (Note 1) 0 to 5 1 0 70
15 Jog frequency 0 to 400Hz 0. 01Hz 5Hz 71
16 Jog accelerat ion/ dec elerat ion t im e 0 to 3600 s/
0 to 360 s 0. 1 s /
0.01 s 0.5 s 71
17 MRS input select ion 0,2 1 0 72
18 High-speed maximum frequenc y 120 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 120Hz 72
19 Base frequency voltage (Note 1) 0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999 0.1V 9999 〈8888〉72
20 Acceleration/ dec elerat ion ref erenc e
frequency 1 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉72
21 Acceleration/ dec elerat ion t ime
increments 0,1 1 0 72
22 Stall prevention operation level 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 150% 73
23 Stall prevention operation lev el at double
speed 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 73
24 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 4) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 74
25 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 5) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 74
26 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 6) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 74
27 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 7) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 74
28 Multi-speed input c om pens at ion 0, 1 1 0 74
29 Acceleration/ dec elerat ion pat t ern 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 75
30 Regenerative f unc t ion s elec t ion 0, 1, 2 1 0 76
31 Frequency jump 1A 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 77
32 Frequency jump 1B 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 77
33 Frequency jump 2A 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 77
34 Frequency jump 2B 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 77
35 Frequency jump 3A 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 77
36 Frequency jump 3B 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 77
Standard operation func t ions
37 Speed display 0,1 to 9998 1 0 78
41 Up-to-frequency sensit ivity 0 to 100% 0.1% 10% 79
42 Output frequenc y detec t ion 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 6Hz 79
Output
terminal
functions
43 Output frequency detection for reverse
rotation 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 79
44 Second accelerat ion/ dec elerat ion t im e 0 to 3600 s /
0 to 360 s 0.1 s/0. 01 s 5 s 80
45 Second deceleration t im e 0 to 3600 s/0 t o 360 s ,
9999 0.1 s/0. 01 s 9999 80
46 Second torque boost (Note 1) 0 to 30%, 9999 0.1% 9999 80
47 Second V/F (base frequenc y) (Note 1) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 80
48 Second stall prevention operation c urrent 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 80
49 Second stall prevention operation
frequency 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01 0 80
Second funct ions
50 Second output f requenc y detec t ion 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 30Hz 81
Param eter List
PARAMETERS
58
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Setting Range Minimum
Setting
Increments
Factory Setting
〈EC Version〉
Refer
To
Page:
52 DU/PU main display data selection 0 to 20, 22, 23, 24, 25,
100 1082
53 PU level display data selec t ion 0 t o 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18 1 1 82
54 FM terminal function selection 1 t o 3, 5 t o 14,
17, 18, 21 1182
55 Frequency m onit oring ref erenc e 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉84
Display functions
56 Current monitoring referenc e 0 to 500A 0.01A Rated output current 84
57 Rest art coasting t im e 0, 0.1 to 5 s , 9999 0.1 s 9999 85
Automatic
restart
functions
58 Restart cushion time 0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1.0 s 85
Additional
function
59 Remote setting function selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 87
60 I nt elligent mode selection 0 to 8 1 0 88
61 Referenc e I for intelligent m ode 0 to 500A, 9999 0. 01A 9999 90
62 Ref. I for intelligent m ode ac c el. 0 to 200%, 9999 0. 1% 9999 90
63 Ref. I for intelligent m ode dec el. 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 90
64 St art ing frequency for elev at or m ode 0 to 10Hz, 9999 0. 01Hz 9999 90
65 Retry selection 0 to 5 1 0 91
66 Stall prev ent ion operat ion level reduction
starting f requenc y 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉92
67 Number of retries at alarm oc c urrenc e 0 to 10, 101 t o 110 1 0 91
68 Retry waiting time 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 1 s 91
69 Retry c ount dis play erasure 0 091
70 Spec ial regenerat ive brake duty 0 to 15%/0 to 30%/0%
(Note 10) 0.1% 0% 92
71 Applied m ot or 0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20, 23,
24 1093
72 PWM f requenc y s elec t ion 0 to 15 1 2 94
73 0-5V/ 0-10V s elec tion 0 to 5, 10 t o 15 1 1 95
74 Filter time constant 0 to 8 1 1 96
75 Reset select ion/ dis connected PU
detection/ PU st op s election 0 to 3, 14 to 17 1 14 96
76 Alarm c ode out put selection 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 98
77 Param et er write disable select ion 0, 1, 2 1 0 99
78 Reverse rotati on prevention selec t ion 0, 1, 1 0 100
Operation select ion f unc t ions
79 Operat ion m ode s election 0 to 8 1 0 101
80 M ot or c apacity 0.4 to 55kW, 9999 0.01kW 9999 104
81 Number of motor poles 2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16, 9999 1 9999 104
82 M ot or exc it ing c urrent (Note 4) 0 to , 9999 1 9999 105
83 Rated m otor volt age 0 to 1000V 0.1V 200/400V (Not e 2) 105
84 Rated m otor frequency 50 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉105
89 Speed c ont rol gain 0 to 200.0% 0.1% 100% 111
90 M ot or c onstant (R1) (Note 4) 0 to, 9999 9999 105
91 M ot or c onstant (R2) (Note 4) 0 to, 9999 9999 105
92 M ot or c onstant (L1) (Note 4) 0 to, 9999 9999 105
93 M ot or c onstant (L2) (Note 4) 0 to, 9999 9999 105
94 M ot or c onstant (X) 0 to, 9999 9999 105
95 Online aut o t uning s election 0, 1 1 0 111
Advanc ed m agnet ic f lux vectorc ont rol
96 Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 101 1 0 112
100 V/F1 (first frequency) (Note 1) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 113
101 V/F1 (first frequency v olt age) (Not e 1) 0 to 1000V 0.1V 0 113
102 V/F2 (second frequency) (Note 1) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 113
103 V/F2 (second frequency voltage) (Note 1) 0 to 1000V 0.1V 0 113
104 V/F3 (third frequency) (Note 1) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 113
105 V/F3 (third frequency voltage) (Note 1) 0 t o 1000V 0.1V 0 113
5-point flexible V/F
characteristics
106 V/F4 (fourth frequency) (Note 1) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 113
Param eter List
PARAMETERS
59
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Setting Range Minimum
Setting
Increments
Factory Setting
〈EC Version〉
Refer
To
Page:
107 V/F4 (fourth frequenc y voltage)
(Note 1) 0 to 1000V 0.1V 0 113
108 V/F5 (f if t h f requenc y) (Note 1) 0 t o 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 113
5-point flexible V/F
characteristics
109 V/F5 (fifth f requenc y voltage)
(Note 1) 0 to 1000V 0.1V 0 113
110 Third acc elerat ion/ dec elerat ion t i m e 0 to 3600 s/0 t o 360 s ,
9999 0.1 s/0. 01 s 9999 114
111 Third decelerat ion t im e 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s,
9999 0.1 s/0. 01 s 9999 114
112 Third torque boos t (Note 1) 0 to 30.0%, 9999 0.1% 9999 114
113 Third V/F (base f requenc y) (Note 1) 0 t o 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 114
114 Third st all prevention operation c urrent 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 114
115 Third stall prev ent ion operat ion
frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0 114
Third functions
116 Third output f requenc y detec tion 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 114
117 Station number 0 to 31 1 0 114
118 Comm unic at ion s peed 48, 96, 192 1 192 114
119 Stop bit length/data lengt h 0, 1 (data length 8)
10, 11 (data length 7) 1 1 114
120 Parity c hec k pres enc e/ abs ence 0, 1, 2 1 2 114
121 Number of c om m unic at ion retries 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 114
122 Comm unic at ion c hec k time interval 0, 0.1 t o 999. 8 s , 9999 0.1 s 0 〈9999〉114
123 Waiting time setting 0 to 150ms, 9999 1ms 9999 114
Communication f unc t i ons
124 CR, LF presence/ abs enc e selection 0,1,2 1 1 114
128 PID ac t ion s elec t ion 10, 11, 20, 21 10 124
129 PID proport ional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 124
130 PID int egral t im e 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1 s 124
131 Upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 124
132 Lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 124
133 PID ac t ion s et point f or PU operat ion 0 t o 100% 0.01% 0% 124
PID control
134 PID dif f erent ial t im e 0.01 to 10.00 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 124
135 Commercial power supply-inverter
switch-over sequence out put terminal
selection 0, 1 1 0 131
136 MC s witch-over int erloc k time 0 to 100.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s 131
137 Start waiting tim e 0 to 100.0 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 131
138 Commercial power supply-inverter
switch-over selection at alarm
occurrence 0, 1 1 0 131
Commercial power supply-
inverter s witch-over
139 Automatic inverter-com m erc ial power
supply switch-over frequenc y 0 to 60.00Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 131
140 Backlash ac c elerat ion s topping
frequency (Note 7) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 1.00Hz 134
141 Backlash ac c elerat ion s topping time
(Note 7) 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0. 5 s 134
142 Backlash dec elerat ion s t opping
frequency (Note 7) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 1.00Hz 134
Backlash
143 Backlash dec elerat ion s t opping t i m e
(Note 7) 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0. 5 s 134
Display
144 Speed setting switch-over 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102,
104, 106, 108, 110 1 4 134
148 Stall prevention level at 0V input 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 134
Additional
functions
149 Stall prevention level at 10V input 0 to 200% 0.1% 200% 134
Param eter List
PARAMETERS
60
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Sett ing Range Minimum
Setting
Increments
Factory Setting
〈EC Version〉
Refer
To
Page:
150 Output current detec t ion level 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 135
151 Output current detec t ion period 0 to 10 s 0. 1 s 0 135
152 Zero current det ec t ion level 0 to 200.0% 0.1% 5.0% 136
Current
detection
153 Zero current det ec t ion period 0 to 1 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 136
154 Voltage reduction selection during stall
prevent ion operat ion 0, 1 1 1 136
155 RT activated condit ion 0, 10 1 0 137
156 Stall prevention operat ion s elec t ion 0 to 31, 100 1 0 137
157 OL si gnal waiting time 0 to 25 s, 9999 0.1 s 0 139
Sub functions
158 AM terminal function selection 1 to 3, 5 to 14,
17, 18, 21 1 1 139
Additional
function
160 User group read s elec t ion 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 140
162 Automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure selection 0, 1 1 0 140
163 First cushion time for restart 0 to 20 s 0.1 s 0 s 140
164 First c us hion voltage for res t art 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 140
Automatic restart
after inst ant aneous
power failure
165 Rest art s t all prevention operation level 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 140
170 Watt - hour m et er c lear 0 0 141
Initial
monitor
171 Actual operation hour meter c lear 0 0 141
173 User group 1 registration 0 to 999 10
141
174 User group 1 deletion 0 to 999, 9999 10
141
175 User group 2 registration 0 to 999 10
141
User functions
176 User group 2 deletion 0 to 999, 9999 10
141
180 RL terminal funct ion s elec tion 0 to 99, 9999 10
141
181 RM terminal func t ion s election 0 to 99, 9999 11
141
182 RH terminal function s election 0 to 99, 9999 12
141
183 RT terminal function s election 0 to 99, 9999 13
141
184 AU terminal funct ion s elec tion 0 to 99, 9999 14
141
185 JOG terminal f unc t ion s elec tion 0 to 99, 9999 15
141
186 CS terminal funct ion s election 0 to 99, 9999 16
141
190 RUN t erm inal f unction selection 0 to 199, 9999 1 0 144
191 SU terminal funct ion s elec tion 0 to 199, 9999 1 1 144
192 IPF terminal func t ion selection 0 to 199, 9999 1 2 144
193 OL terminal func t ion s elec t i on 0 to 199, 9999 1 3 144
194 FU terminal function s election 0 to 199, 9999 1 4 144
Terminal assignment f unc tions
195 ABC terminal funct ion s elec tion 0 t o 199, 9999 1 99 144
Additi-
onal
function
199 User's initial value setting 0 to 999, 9999 1 0 146
Param eter List
PARAMETERS
61
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Sett ing Range Minimum
Setting
Increments
Factory Setting
〈EC Version〉
Refer
To
Page:
200 Programmed operation m inut e/ s ec ond
selection 0, 2: Minute, sec ond
1, 3: Hour, minut e 1 0 147
201 Program set 1
1 to 10
0-2: Rotation direct ion
0-400, 9999: Frequency
0-99.59: Time
1
0.1Hz
Minute or
second
0
9999
0147
211 Program set 2
11 to 20
0-2: Rotation direct ion
0-400, 9999: Frequency
0-99.59: Time
1
0.1Hz
Minute or
second
0
9999
0147
221 Program set 3
21 to 30
0-2: Rotation direct ion
0-400, 9999: Frequency
0-99.59: Time
1
0.1Hz
Minute or
second
0
9999
0147
Programmed operation
231 Timer setting 0 to 99.59 0 147
232 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 8) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 151
233 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 9) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 151
234 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 10) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0. 01Hz 9999 151
235 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 11) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0. 01Hz 9999 151
236 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 12) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0. 01Hz 9999 151
237 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 13) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0. 01Hz 9999 151
238 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 14) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0. 01Hz 9999 151
Multi-speed operat ion
239 Multi-speed s et t ing (s peed 15) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0. 01Hz 9999 151
240 Soft-PWM setting 0, 1 1 1 151
Sub functions
244 Cooling fan operation select ion 0, 1 1 0 151
Stop selection
function
250 Stop select ion 0 to 100 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 152
251 Output phase f ailure prot ec t ion s election 0,1 1 1 153
252 Override bias 0 to 200% 0.1% 50% 153
Additional
function
253 Override gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 153
261 Power failure st op s elec tion 0, 1 1 0 154
262 Subtracted f requenc y at dec eleration
start 0 to 20Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 154
263 Subtraction s t art ing f requency 0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉154
264 Power-failure decelerat ion t ime 1 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s 0.1 s/0. 01 s 5 s 154
265 Power-failure decelerat ion t ime 2 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s,
9999 0.1 s/0. 01 s 9999 154
Power failure st op f unc tion
266 Power-failure decelerat ion t ime switch-
over f requenc y 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉154
Selection
function
270 Stop-on-contact/load torque high-speed
frequency control s elec t i on 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 156
271 High-speed setting m axim um c urrent 0 to 200% 0. 1% 50% 157
272 Mid-speed set t ing m inimum current 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 157
273 Current averaging range 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 157
High-speed
frequency
control
274 Current averaging f ilt er c ons t ant 1 to 4000 1 16 157
275 Stop-on-contac t excit i ng c urrent low-
speed multiplying fac t or 0 to 1000%, 9999 1% 9999 (Note 5) 161
Stop on
contact
276 Stop-on-contac t PWM c arrier f requenc y 0 to 15, 9999 1 9999 (Note 5) 161
Param eter List
PARAMETERS
62
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Setting Range Minimum
Setting
Increments
Factory Setting
〈EC Version〉
Refer
To
Page:
278 Brake opening frequency (Note 3) 0 to 30Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 164
279 Brake opening current (Note 3) 0 to 200% 0. 1% 130% 164
280 Brake opening current det ec t ion t ime
(Note 3) 0 to 2 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 164
281 Brake operation tim e at s t art (Not e 3) 0 t o 5 s 0.1 s 0. 3 s 164
282 Brake operation frequenc y (Note 3) 0 to 30Hz 0. 01Hz 6Hz 164
283 Brake operation tim e at s t op (Not e 3) 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0. 3 s 164
284 Deceleration detect ion f unction select ion
(Note 3) 0, 1 1 0 164
285 Overs peed det ec t ion f requenc y 0 to 30Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 164
286 Droop gain 0 to 100% 0. 1% 0% 168
Brake sequence f unc t ions
287 Droop filler constant 0.00 to 1.00 s 0. 01s 0.3s 168
900 FM terminal calibration 169
901 AM terminal calibrat ion 169
902 Frequency setting voltage bias 0 to 10V 0 to 60Hz 0. 01Hz 0V 0Hz 171
903 Frequency setting voltage gain 0 t o 10V 1 to
400Hz 0.01Hz 5V 60Hz
〈50Hz〉171
904 Frequency setting current bias 0 to 20mA 0 to 60Hz 0.01Hz 4mA 0Hz 171
Calibration functions
905 Frequency setting current gain 0 to 20mA 1 to
400Hz 0.01Hz 20mA 60Hz
〈50Hz〉171
Additional
function
990 Buzzer control 0, 1 1 1 173
Note: 1. Indicates the parameter settings which are ignored when the advanced magnetic flux vector
control mode is selected.
2. The factory setting of the FR-A540 (400V class) is 400V.
3. Can be set when Pr. 80, Pr. 81 ≠ 9999, Pr. 60 = 7 or 8.
4. Can be accessed when Pr. 80, Pr. 81 ≠ 9999, Pr. 77 = 801.
5. Can be accessed when Pr. 270 = 1 or 3, Pr. 80, Pr. 81 ≠ 9999.
6. The setting depends on the inverter capacity.
7. Can be accessed when Pr. 29 = 3.
8. The half-tone screened parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation if 0
(factory setting) has been set in Pr. 77. (Note that the Pr. 72 and Pr. 240 settings cannot be
changed during external operation.)
9. The setting depends on the inverter capacity: (0.4K)/(1.5K to 3.7K)/(5.5K, 7.5K)/(11K).
10. The setting depends on the inverter capacity: (0.4K to 1.5K)/(2.2K to 7.5K)/(11K or more).
Param eter List
4.2 Parameter Function Details
PARAMETERS
63
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection)
Related parameters
4.2 Parameter Function Details
z
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112)
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr. 46 "second torque boost"
Pr. 112 "third torque boost"
You can compensate for a voltage drop in the low frequency
range to improve motor torque reduction in the low speed range.
z
Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque.
z
You can select any of the three different starting torque boosts by terminal switching.
Parameter
Number Factory
Setting Setting Range Remarks
0.4K, 0.75K 6%
1.5K to 3.7K 4%
5.5K, 7.5K 3%
0
11K or more 2%
0 to 30%
46 9999 0 to 30%, 9999 9999: Function i nval i d
112 9999 0 to 30%, 9999 9999: Functi on i nval i d
Pr.0
Pr.46
Pr.112
0
100%
Base frequenc
y
Output voltage
Setting range
Output f requency (Hz)
<Setting>
x
Assuming that the base frequency voltage is 100%, set the 0Hz voltage in %.
x
A large setting will cause the motor to overheat. The guideline for maximum value is about 10%.
x
Pr. 46 is valid when the RT signal is on. Pr. 112 is valid when the X9 signal is on. Use any of Pr. 180 to
Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X9 signal.
Note: 1. When using a constant-torque motor, change the setting of this parameter as follows:
0.4K, 0.75K...6%, 1.5K to 3.7k, 4%, 5.5K or more...2%
2. This parameter setting is ignored when Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 have been set to select the advanced
magnetic flux vector control mode.
3. When the Pr. 0 setting is either of the following values for 5.5K and 7.5K, it is automatically
changed when the Pr.71 setting is changed:
(1) When Pr. 0 setting is 3% (factory setting)
The Pr. 0 setting is changed to 2% automatically when the Pr. 71 setting is changed from
[general-purpose motor selection value (0, 2 to 8, 20, 23, 24)] to [constant-torque motor
selection value (1, 13 to 18)].
(2) When Pr. 0 setting is 2%
The Pr. 0 setting is changed to 3% (factory setting) automatically when the Pr. 71 setting is
changed from [constant-torque motor selection value (1, 13 to 18)] to [general-purpose motor
selection value (0, 2 to 8, 20, 23, 24)].
4. Increase the s etting when the inverter -to-motor dis tance is long or m otor torque in the low-s peed
range is insufficient, for example. A too large setting may result in an overcurrent trip.
5. When the RT (X9) signal is on, the other second (third) functions such as second (third)
acceleration/deceleration time are also selected.
6. W hen term inal assignm ent is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 dur ing use of the sec ond or third
functions, the other functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making setting.
PARAMETERS
64
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"
Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain"
Related parameters
z
Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
Pr. 18 "high-speed maximum frequency"
Used to clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency. Used for high-speed operation at or over
120Hz.
z
Can be used to set the upper and lower limits of motor speed.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Set ting Range
1 120Hz 0 to 120Hz
2 0Hz 0 to 120Hz
18 120Hz 120 to 400Hz Pr.1
Pr.18
Pr.2
5,10V
0
Frequency setting
Output frequency
20mA, etc.
<Setting>
· Use Pr. 1 to set the upper limit of the output frequency. If the frequency of the frequency command entered
is higher than the setting, the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency.
To perform operation over 120Hz, set the upper limit of the output frequency in Pr. 18.
(When the Pr. 18 value is set, Pr. 1 automatically changes to the frequency in Pr. 18.)
· Use Pr. 2 to set the lower limit of the output frequency.
Note: When the frequenc y setting analog signal is used to run the m otor beyond 60Hz, change the Pr . 903
and Pr. 905 values. If Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 is only changed, the motor cannot run beyond 60Hz.
CAUTION
W hen the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 value, note that the motor will run at the set
frequency by merely sw it ching t he start signal on, without ent ering t he command frequency.
PARAMETERS
65
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal
function selection)
Related parameters
z
Base frequency, base fr equency vol tage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47, Pr. 113)
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 47 "second V/F (base frequency)
Pr. 113 "third V/F (base frequency)
Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating.
z
When running a standard motor , generally set the frequency rating to 60Hz. W hen running the m otor using
the comm ercial power supply-inverter switch-over, s et the base frequency to the same value as the power
supply frequency.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remarks
3 60Hz 〈50Hz〉0 to 400Hz
19 9999 〈8888〉0 to 1000V,
8888•9999
8888: 95% of power
supply volt age
9999: Same as power
supply volt age
47 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: Function invalid
113 9999 0 t o 400Hz, 9999 9999: Function invalid
Pr.19
Pr.3
Pr.47
Pr.113
Output frequency
Output voltage
<Setting>
· Use Pr. 3, Pr. 47 and Pr. 113 to set the base frequency (rated motor frequency). Three different base
frequencies can be set and the required frequency can be selected from among them.
· Pr. 47 is valid when the RT signal is on, and Pr. 113 is valid when the X9 s ignal is on. Us e any of Pr. 180 to
Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X9 signal.
· Use Pr. 19 to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage).
Note: 1. Set the base frequency to 60Hz when using a constant-torque motor.
2. When the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode has been selected using Pr. 80 and
Pr. 81, Pr. 3, Pr. 47, Pr. 113 and Pr. 19 are made invalid and Pr. 84 and Pr. 83 are made valid.
3. W hen "2" (5-point flexible V/F characteristic s) is set in Pr. 71, the Pr. 47 and Pr. 113 s ettings are
made invalid.
4. When the RT (X9) signal is on, the other second (third) functions such as second (third)
acceleration/deceleration time are also selected.
5. W hen term inal assignm ent is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 dur ing use of the sec ond or third
functions, the other functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making setting.
PARAMETERS
66
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
Pr. 15 "jog frequency"
Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation"
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration
pattern"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal
function selection)
Related parameters
z
Multi - speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 t o Pr. 239)
Pr. 4 "3-speed setting (high speed)"
Pr. 5 "3-speed setting (middle speed)"
Pr. 6 "3-speed setting (low speed)"
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 "multi-speed setting
(speeds 4 to 7)"
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 "multi-speed setting
(speeds 8 to 15)"
Used to preset the running speeds in parameters and switch between them using terminals.
z
Any speed can be selected by switching on-off the contact signal (RH, RM, RL or REX signal).
z
By using these functions with jog frequency (Pr. 15), maximum frequency (Pr. 1) and minim um frequency
(Pr. 2), up to 18 speeds can be set.
z
Valid in the external operation mode or PU/external combined operation mode (Pr. 79 = 3 or 4).
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remarks
4 60Hz 0 t o 400Hz
5 30Hz 0 t o 400Hz
6 10Hz 0 t o 400Hz
24 to 27 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: Not selected
232 to 239 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: Not selected
ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON
ONONON
ON
RH
RM
RL
REX
Speed 7
Output frequency
Speed 1
(high speed)Speed 2
(middle speed)
Speed 3
(low speed)
Speed 4
Time
Speed 5
Speed 6
ONON ON ON ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
RH
RM
RL
REX
Speed 15
Output frequency
Time
Speed 9
Speed 8
Speed 10
Speed 11
Speed 12
Speed 13
Speed 14
<Setting>
· Set the running frequencies in the corresponding parameters.
· Each speed (frequency) can be set as desired between 0 and 400Hz during inverter operation.
After the required multi-speed setting parameter has been read, the setting can be changed by pressing
the [UP/DOWN] k ey. (In this case, when you release the [UP/DOWN] k ey, press the [SET ] k ey to store the
set frequency. When using the FR-PU04 (option), press the [WRITE] key.)
· Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the REX signal.
Note: 1. The multi-speed settings override the main speeds (across terminals 2-5, 4-5).
2. The multi-speeds can also be set in the PU or external operation mode.
3. For 3-speed setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the
frequency setting of the lower signal.
4. Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them.
5. The parameter values can be changed during operation.
6. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be
affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.
PARAMETERS
67
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration
pattern"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal
function selection)
Related parameters
z
Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111)
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency"
Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration ti me incr ements"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
Pr. 110 "third acceleration/deceleration time"
Pr. 111 "third deceleration time"
Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed
increase/decrease.
Param eter Number Factory
Setting Setting Range Remarks
7.5K or les s 5 s
711K or more 15 s 0 to 3600 s/ 0 to 360 s
7.5K or les s 5 s
811K or more 15 s 0 to 3600 s/ 0 to 360 s
20 60Hz 〈50Hz〉1 to 400Hz
21 0 0, 1 0: 0 to 3600 s, 1: 0 to 360 s
7.5K or les s
44 11K or more 5 s 0 t o 3600 s /0 to 360 s
7.5K or les s
45 11K or more 9999 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 9999: A ccelerati on t i me =
decelerati on t i me
7.5K or les s
110 11K or more 9999 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 9999: Function invali d
7.5K or les s
111 11K or more 9999 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 9999: A ccelerati on t i me =
decelerati on t i me
Pr.20
Pr.7
Pr.44
Pr.110
Pr.8
Pr.45
Pr.111
Deceleration
time
Output frequency
Runnin g freque ncy
Time
Acceleration
time
<Setting>
· Use Pr. 21 to set the acceleration/deceleration time and minimum setting increments:
Set value "0" (factory setting)........ 0 to 3600 seconds (minimum setting increments: 0.1 second)
Set value "1".................................. 0 to 360 seconds (minimum setting increments: 0.01 second)
· Use Pr. 7, Pr. 44 and Pr. 110 to set the acceleration time required to reach the frequency set in Pr. 20 from
0Hz.
· Use Pr. 8, Pr. 45 and Pr. 111 to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from the frequency set in
Pr. 20.
· Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on, and Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 are valid when the X9 signal
is on. When both RT and X9 are on, Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 are valid.
· Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X9 signal.
· Set "9999" in Pr. 45 and Pr. 111 to make the deceleration time equal to the acceleration time (Pr. 44, Pr. 110).
· When "9999" is set in Pr. 110, the function is made invalid.
PARAMETERS
68
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Related parameter
Note: 1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A (refer to page 75), the set time is a period
required to reach the base frequency set in Pr. 3.
· Acceleration/deceleration time calculation expression when the set frequency is the base
frequency or higher
t = 4
9 × T
(Pr.3)2 × f2 + 5
9 T
T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting (seconds)
f: Set frequency (Hz )
· Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time at the base frequency of 60Hz (0Hz to set
frequency)
Frequency set ting (Hz)
Acceleration/
decelerati ont i me (sec onds) 60 120 200 400
5 5 12 27 102
15 15 35 82 305
2. If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the settings of calibration functions Pr. 903 and Pr. 905
(frequency setting signal gains) remain unchanged. To adjust the gains, adjust calibration
functions Pr. 903 and Pr. 905.
3. When the setting of Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110 or Pr. 111 is "0", the
acceleration/deceleration time is 0.04 seconds. At this time, set 120Hz or less in Pr. 20.
4. When the RT (X9) signal is on, the other second (third) functions such as second (third) torque
boost are also selected.
5. If the shortest acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration
time cannot be made shorter than the shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the
mechanical system's GD2 and motor torque.
z
Electronic ov ercurrent protection (Pr. 9)
Pr. 9 "electronic overcurrent protection"
Set the current of the electronic overcurrent protection to protect the motor from overheat. This feature
provides the optimum protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling capability , at low speed.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setti ng Range
9 Rat ed output current * 0 to 500A
*0.4K and 0.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
<Setting>
· Set the rated current [A] of the motor.
(Normally set the rated current value at 50Hz.)
· Setting of "0" makes the electronic overcurrent protection (motor protective function) invalid. (The inverter's
output transistor protective function is valid.)
· When Mitsubishi's constant-torque motor is used, set "1" or any of "13" to "18" in Pr. 71 to select the 100%
continuous torque characteristic in the low speed range. Then, set the rated motor current in Pr. 9.
Note: 1. When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be protected by the
electronic overcurrent protection. Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
2. When a diff erenc e between the inverter and motor c apac ities is lar ge and the s etting is s mall, the
protective character istics of the electronic overc urrent pr otection will be deteriorated. In this case,
use an external thermal relay.
3. A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic overcurrent protection. Use an external
thermal relay.
PARAMETERS
69
Pr. 13 "starting frequency"
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Related parameters
z
DC dynamic brake (Pr. 10, Pr. 11, Pr. 12)
Pr. 10 "DC dynamic brake operation frequency"
Pr. 11 "DC dynamic brake operation time"
Pr. 12 "DC dynamic brake voltage"
By setting the stopping DC dynamic brake voltage (torque), operation time and operation starting frequency,
the stopping accuracy of positioning operation, etc. or the timing of operating the DC dynamic brake to stop
the motor is adjusted according to the load.
Parameter
Number Factory
Setting Setting Range Rem arks
10 3Hz 0 to 120Hz, 9999 9999: Operated at
or below Pr. 13
value.
11 0.5 s 0 to 10 s, 8888 8888: Operated
when X13 signal
switches on.
7.5K or les s 4%
12 11K or more 2% 0 to 30%
Pr.10
Pr.12
Pr.11 Operation time
Outp u t f requency
Operation frequency
Time
DC dynamic
brake voltage Operation voltage Time
<Setting>
· Use Pr. 10 to set the frequency at which the DC dynamic brake application is started.
By setting "9999" in Pr. 10, the motor is decelerated to the frequency set in Pr. 13 and braked.
· Use Pr. 11 to s et the per iod during when the brake is operated. By setting “8888” in Pr. 11, the DC dynamic
brake is operated while the X13 signal is on.
· Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X13 signal.
· Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage of the power supply voltage.
· When using the inverter dedicated motor (constant-torque motor), change the Pr. 12 setting as follows:
3.7K or less...4%, 5.5K or more...2%
Note: 1. When the Pr. 12 setting is either of the following values for 5.5K and 7.5K, it is automatically
changed when the Pr. 71 setting is changed:
(1) When Pr. 12 setting is 4% (factory setting)
The Pr. 12 setting is changed to 2% automatically when the Pr. 71 setting is changed from
[general-purpose motor selection value (0, 2 to 8, 20, 23, 24)] to [constant-torque motor
selection value (1, 13 to 18)].
(2) When Pr. 12 setting is 2%
The Pr. 12 setting is changed to 4% (factory setting) automatically when the Pr. 71 setting is
changed from [constant-torque motor selection value (1, 13 to 18)] to [general-purpose motor
selection value (0, 2 to 8, 20, 23, 24)].
2. When Pr. 11 = "0 or 8888" or Pr. 12 = 0, DC dynamic brake operation cannot be performed.
CAUTION
In the orient at ion (using opt ion) mode, do not set "8888" in Pr. 11.
The motor may not be stopped in the correct position.
Install a mechanical brake. No holding torque is provided.
PARAMETERS
70
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection)
Related parameters
z
Starting frequency (Pr. 13)
Pr. 13 "starting frequency"
You can set the starting frequency between 0 and 60Hz.
z
Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is switched on.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Set ting Range
13 0.5Hz 0.01 to 60Hz
<Setting>
60
Pr.13
ON
0
Forward
rotation
Outp u t f reque nc y
(Hz)
Setting range
Frequency setting signal (V) Time
Note: The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 13 "starting
frequency".
For example, when 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the m otor will start r unning when the fr equenc y setting signal
reaches 5Hz.
z
Load pattern selecti on (Pr. 14)
Pr. 14 "load pattern selection"
You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) for the application and load
characteristics.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting S et ting Range
14 0 0 to 5
100%
Pr.14=0
Output frequency (Hz)
For constant-torque loads
(e.g. conveyor, cart)
Output voltage
Base frequency Output frequency (Hz)
For variable-torque loads
(Fan, pump)
100%
Output voltage
Base frequenc
y
Pr.14=1
Output frequency (Hz)
For lift
B
oost for forward rotation ...P r. 0 setting
B
oost for revers e rotation ...0 %
100%
Pr.0
Output voltage
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
Base frequency
Pr.14=2
100%
Pr.0
Pr.14=3
Output frequency (Hz)
For lift
Boost for forward rotation...0%
Boost for reverse rotation...Pr. 0 setting
Output voltage
Reverse
rotation
Forward
rotation
Base frequency
PARAMETERS
71
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency"
Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration time
increments"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection)
Related parameters
Setti ng Output Characteristi cs Applic at i on
0 For constant-torque load Conveyor, cart , etc.
1 For variable-torque l oad Fan, pump
2 Boost for reverse rotation 0% Boost for forward rotation...Pr. 0 setting
3For const ant -
torque lif t Boost for forward rotation 0% Boost for reverse rotation...Pr. 0 setting For lift load
ON...For constant-torque load (same as in setting = 0)
4 RT signal OFF...For constant-torque lift, boost for reverse rotation 0% (same as in
setti ng = 2)
ON...For constant-torque load (same as in setting = 0)
5 RT signal OFF...For constant-torque lift, boost for forward rotation 0% (same as in
setti ng = 3)
Load pattern sel ection
switching f unction usi ng
RT signal
Note: 1. This parameter setting is ignored when Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 have been set to select the advanced
magnetic flux vector control mode.
2. W hen the RT signal is on, the other second functions such as second acceleration/deceleration
time and second torque boost are also selected.
3. W hen the setting is 4 or 5, X17 signal may be used instead of the RT signal. Use any of Pr. 180
to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X17 signal.
z
Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)
Pr. 15 "jog frequency"
Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time"
In the external operation mode, jog operation can be started and stopped with the start signal (STF, STR)
after selection of the jog mode (JOG signal ON). In the PU operation mode, jog operation can also be
performed using the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04).
z
Set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Sett ing Range Remarks
15 5Hz 0 to 400Hz
0 to 3600 s When Pr. 21 = 0
16 0. 5 s 0 to 360 s When Pr. 21 = 1
Pr.20
Pr.15
Pr.16
ON
ON
ON
JOG
Revers e ro tation S TR
Output frequency (Hz)
Jog frequency
setting range Reverse
rotation
Time
Forward
rotation
Forward rota ti on STF
Note: 1. In S-shaped acc eleration/deceler ation pattern A, the set tim e is a period of time required to r each
Pr. 3 "base frequency".
2. The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for jog operation.
PARAMETERS
72
z
MRS input selecti on (Pr. 17)
Pr. 17 "MRS input selection"
Used to select the logic of the MRS signal.
When the MRS signal switches on, the inverter shuts off the output.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Set ting Range
17 0 0, 2
<Setting>
Pr. 17 Set ting S pecifications of MRS S i gnal
0Normall y open input
2Normall y c l osed input (N/C c ontact input specifi cations)
<Wiring example>
· For sink logic
MRS
SD
MRS
SD
Setting 0 (factory setting) Setting 2
Output stop Output stop
Inverter Inverter
Pr.
18
Î
Refer to Pr. 1, Pr. 2.
Pr. 19
Î
Refer to Pr. 3.
Pr. 20, Pr. 21
Î
Refer to Pr.15, Pr. 1
6.
PARAMETERS
73
Pr. 48 "second stall prevention
operation current"
Pr. 49 "second stall prevention operation
frequency"
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Pr. 114 "third stall prevention operation
current"
Pr. 115 "third stall prevention operation
frequency"
Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation
selection"
Related parameters
z
Stall prevent ion (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154)
Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level"
Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level
at double speed"
Pr. 66 "stall prevention operation level
reduction starting frequency"
Pr. 148 "stall prevention operation level
at 0V input"
Pr. 149 "stall prevention operation level
at 10V input"
Pr. 154 "voltage reduction selection during stall
prevention operation"
z
You can set the stall prevention operation levels.
z
For high-s peed operation at or over 60Hz, acceleration m ay not be m ade because the motor current does
not increase. To improve the operation characteristics of the motor in such a case, the stall prevention level
in the high-frequency range can be reduced. This is ef fective for operation of a centrifugal separator up to
the high-speed range. Normally, set 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23.
z
For operation in the high-frequency range, the current in the locked motor state is smaller than the rated
output current of the inverter and the inverter does not result in an alarm (protective function is not
activated) if the motor is at a stop. T o impr ove this and activate the alarm , the stall pr evention level can be
reduced.
z
In order to provide torque during stall prevention, Pr. 154 is factory-set not to reduce the output voltage.
The setting of reducing the output voltage further decreases the probability of overcurrent trip occurrence.
z
The stall prevention operation level can be varied by entering the analog signal into terminal 1.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setti ng Range Remarks
22 150% 0 to 200%, 9999 9999: Analog variable
23 9999 0 to 200%, 9999 9999: Constant ac cording to Pr. 22
66 60Hz 〈50Hz〉0 to 400Hz
148 150% 0 to 200% (Bias)
149 200% 0 to 200% (Gain)
154 1 0, 1 0: Output vol t age reduced
1: Output vol tage not reduced
Pr.22
Pr.23
Pr.66 400Hz Output frequency (Hz)
Stall prevention operation level (%)
Pr. 23 = 9999
Reduction ratio
compensation factor (%)
150
90
60
45
30
22.5
600 100 200 300 400
Outp u t f requency (Hz )
Setting example (Pr.22=150%, Pr.23=100%, Pr.66=60Hz)
Stall prevention operation level (%)
(170%)
(130%)
0% 0V
Pr.148 Pr.149
10(5)V
Input voltage (V)
(across frequency setting terminals 1-5)
Stall prevention operation level (%)
PARAMETERS
74
Pr. 59 "remote setting function"
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Related parameters
<Setting>
· In Pr. 22, set the stall prevention operation level. Norm ally set it to 150% (fac tory setting). Set "0" in Pr. 22
to disable the stall prevention operation.
· To reduce the stall prevention operation level in the high-frequency range, set the reduction starting
frequency in Pr. 66 and the reduction ratio compensation factor in Pr. 23.
Calculation expression for stall prevention operation level
Stall prevention operation level (%) = A + B × [ Pr.22-A
Pr.22-B ] × [Pr.23-100
100 ]
where, A = Pr.66 (Hz) × Pr.22 (%)
output frequency (Hz) , B = Pr.66 (Hz) × Pr.22(%)
400Hz
· By setting "9999" (factory setting) in Pr. 23, the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr. 22
setting up to 400Hz.
· Set "9999" in Pr. 22 to vary the stall prevention operation level using the analog signal (0-5V/0-10V) entered
to the frequency setting auxiliary input terminal [1]. (Use Pr. 73 to select between 10V and 5V.)
· Use Pr. 148 and Pr. 149 to adjust the gain and bias of the analog signal.
· Set "0" in Pr. 154 to reduce the output voltage during stall prevention operation.
Note: 1. When Pr. 22 = "9999", terminal 1 is exclusively used for setting the stall prevention operation
level. The auxiliary input and override functions are not activated.
CAUTION
Do not set a t oo small v alue as t he st all prevention operation current. O t herwise, torque
generated will r educe.
Test operation must be performed. Stall prev ention operation during acceleration may
increase the acceleration time.
Stall prevent ion operat ion during const ant speed may change t he speed suddenly.
Stall prevent ion operat ion during decelerat ion may increase t he decelerat ion time, increasing
the deceleration distance.
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27
Î
Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
z
Multi-speed input compensation (Pr. 28)
Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation"
By entering a compensation signal into the frequency setting auxiliary input terminal 1 (Note 2), the speeds
(frequencies) of multi-speed settings or the speed setting made by remote setting function can be
compensated for.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remark s
28 0 0, 1 0: Not compensat ed,
1: Com pens ated
Note: 1. Use Pr. 73 to select the compensation input voltage between 0 to ±5V and 0 to ±10V.
2. When any of "4, 5, 14 and 15" is set in Pr. 73, the c om pensation signal is enter ed into term inal 2.
(Override functions)
PARAMETERS
75
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/
deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
Pr. 110 "third acceleration/
deceleration time"
Pr. 111 "third deceleration time"
Related parameters
z
Accelerati on/ deceleration pat tern (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143)
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern"
Pr. 140 "backlash acceleration stopping frequency"
Pr. 141 "backlash acceleration stopping time"
Pr. 142 "backlash deceleration stopping frequency"
Pr. 143 "backlash deceleration stopping time"
Set the acceleration/deceleration pattern.
Also, you can suspend acceleration/deceleration at set frequencies and for the time period set in the
parameters.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remarks
29 0 0, 1, 2, 3 3: Bac klash compensat i on
140 1.00Hz 0 to 400Hz Valid when Pr. 29 = 3.
141 0.5 s 0 to 360 s Val i d when Pr. 29 = 3.
142 1.00Hz 0 to 400Hz Valid when Pr. 29 = 3.
143 0 s 0 to 360 s V al i d when Pr. 29 = 3.
t
Time
[Linear accele ration/decelera tion]
Output frequency (Hz)
Set value 0
fb
t
[S-shaped acc eler ation/deceleration A]
Time
Output frequency (Hz)
Set value 1
f1
t
f2
[S-shaped acceler ati on/deceleratio n B]
Output frequency (Hz)
Time
Set value 2
t
∆f2 Pr.142
∆t2 Pr.143∆t1 Pr.141
∆f1 Pr.140
Output frequency (Hz)
Set value 3
[Backlash compensation function]
Time
<Setting>
Pr. 29
Setting Function Description
0Linear
acceleration/
deceleration Linear acceleration/deceleration is made up/down to the preset frequency (factory set ting).
1
S-shaped
acceleration/
decelerati on A
(Note 1)
For mac hi ne t ool spindles
This setting is used when it is necessary to make acceleration/deceleration in a short time up to the
60Hz or higher speed range. I n thi s ac cel eration/ decel eration pat tern, fb (bas e f requency) is always the
inflection point of an S shape, and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time according to the
reduction i n motor torque i n the 60Hz or higher constant-output operation range.
2S-shaped
acceleration/
decelerati on B
Prevention of cargo collaps e on conveyor, etc.
This setting provides S-shaped acceleration/deceleration from f2 (current frequency) to f1 (target
frequency), eas ing an acceleration/ deceleration shock . This pattern has an effect on the prevent ion of
cargo coll apse, etc.
3Backlash
compensation
(Note 2, 3)
Backl ash com pensation for reduction gear, et c.
This function stops the speed change temporarily during acceleration/deceleration, reducing a shock
generated when a reduction gear backlash is eliminated suddenly. Use Pr. 140 to Pr. 143 to set the
stopping t i mes and s topping frequenci es i n accordance with t he above di agrams.
Note: 1. For the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time required to reach the "base frequency" in
Pr. 3, not the "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" in Pr. 20. For details, refer to Pr. 7 and
Pr. 8.
2. Pr. 140 to Pr. 143 is accessible when "3" is set in Pr. 29.
3. The acceleration/deceleration time is increased by the stopping time.
PARAMETERS
76
Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection"
Pr. 181 "RM terminal function selection"
Pr. 182 "RH terminal function selection"
Pr. 183 "RT terminal function selection"
Pr. 184 "AU terminal function selection"
Pr. 185 "JOG terminal function selection"
Pr. 186 "CS terminal function selection"
Related parameters
z
Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)
Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection"
Pr. 70 "special regenerative brake duty"
z
W hen making frequent starts/stops with a 7.5K or less inverter, use the optional "high-duty brake resistor"
(FR-ABR) to increase the regenerative brake duty.
z
Use the optional "high power factor c onverter (FR-HC)" to r educe harmonic s, improve the power f actor, or
continue the regenerative mode.
Parameter
Number Factory
Setting Setting Range Rem arks
30 0 0 to 2
0 to 15% 0.4K t o 1.5K
0 to 30% 2.2K t o 7.5K70 0% 0% 11K or m ore
<Setting>
(1) When using the built-in brake resistor, brake unit, power return converter
· Set "0" in Pr. 30.
The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid.
At this time, the regenerative brake duty is as follows:
*FR-A520-0.4K to 3.7K ...............3%
*FR-A520-5.5K to 7.5K ...............2%
*FR-A540-0.4K to 7.5K ...............2%
(2) When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
· Set "1" in Pr. 30.
· Set "10%" in Pr. 70.
(3) When using the high power factor converter (FR-HC)
1) Set "2" in Pr. 30.
2) Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the following signals to the contact input terminals.
· X10: FR-HC connection (inverter operation enable signal) (Note 3)
To make protective coordination with the high pow er factor converter (FR-HC), use the inverter
operation enable signal to shut off the inverter output. Enter the RDY signal of the high power factor
converter.
· X11: FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection signal)
When the computer link inboard option (FR-A5NR) is used and the setting is made to hold the pre-
instantaneous power failure mode, use this signal to hold that mode. Enter the instantaneous power
failure detection signal of the high power factor converter.
3) The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid.
Set "10" and "11" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to allocate the terminals used to input the X10 and X11
signals.
PARAMETERS
77
Note: 1. The Pr. 70 setting is invalid for the inverter of 11K or more.
2. Pr. 70 "regenerative brake duty" indicates the %ED of the built-in brake transistor operation. Its
setting should not be higher than the setting of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the brake
resistor can overheat.
3. The X10 signal may be replaced by the MRS signal.
4. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be
affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.
WARNING
The Pr. 70 setting must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the
brake resistor can overheat.
z
Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)
Pr. 31 "frequency jump 1A"
Pr. 32 "frequency jump 1B"
Pr. 33 "frequency jump 2A"
Pr. 34 "frequency jump 2B"
Pr. 35 "frequency jump 3A"
Pr. 36 "frequency jump 3B"
z
W hen it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system , these
parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped. Up to three areas may be set, with the jump
frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area.
z
The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation is performed at this frequency.
Parameter
Number Factory
Setting Setting Range Remarks
31 9999 0 t o 400Hz, 9999 9999: Function invali d
32 9999 0 t o 400Hz, 9999 9999: Function invali d
33 9999 0 t o 400Hz, 9999 9999: Function invali d
34 9999 0 t o 400Hz, 9999 9999: Function invali d
35 9999 0 t o 400Hz, 9999 9999: Function invali d
36 9999 0 t o 400Hz, 9999 9999: Function invali d Pr.31
Pr.32
Pr.33
Pr.34
Pr.35
Pr.36 Frequency jump
Running frequency
<Setting>
· To fix the frequency at 30Hz between Pr. 33 and Pr. 34 (30Hz and 35Hz), set
35Hz in Pr. 34 and 30Hz in Pr. 33.
Pr.34:35Hz
Pr.33:30Hz
· To jump to 35Hz between 30 and 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr. 33 and 30Hz in Pr. 34. Pr.33:35Hz
Pr.34:30Hz
Note: 1. During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency wi thin the set area is valid.
PARAMETERS
78
Pr. 52 "PU main display data selection"
Pr. 53 "PU level display data selection"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"
Related parameters
z
Speed display (Pr. 37, Pr. 144)
Pr. 37 "speed display"
Pr. 144 "speed setting switch-over"
The units of the running speed monitor display of the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04), the running speed setting in
the PU operation mode, and the parameter setting used for frequency setting can be changed from the
frequency to the motor speed or machine speed.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng S etting Range Remarks
37 0 0, 1 t o 9998 0: Frequency sett i ng added
144 4 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102,
104, 106, 108, 110
<Setting>
· To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 60Hz operation.
· To display the motor speed, set the number of motor poles (2, 4, 6, 8, 10) or the number of motor poles
plus 100 (102, 104, 106, 108, 110) in Pr. 144.
· When values have been set in both Pr. 37 and Pr. 144, priority is as follows:
Pr. 144 = 102 to 110 > Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998 > Pr. 144 = 2 to 10
Hence, the half-tone screened settings in the following list become valid.
· W hen the running speed monitoring has been selected, the parameter setting unit and the running speed
setting unit in the PU operation mode depend on the combination of the Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 settings as
indicated below:
Running Speed
Monitor Disp l ay Parameter Setting Unit
Running Speed Set ting Unit P r. 37 Setting Pr. 144 S etting
Speed of 4-pole motor (r/min) 0 0
0 2 to 10Hz 1 to 9998 102 to 110Motor speed (r/min) r/min 0 102 to 110
Hz 1 to 9998 0
Machine speed r/min 1 to 9998 2 to 10
Note: 1. In the V/F control mode, the motor speed is converted from the output frequency and does not
match the actual speed. When the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode has been
selected in Pr. 80 and 81, this display shows the calculated speed (estimated value found by
motor slippage calculation).
2. During PLG feedbac k control, the data dis played is the sam e as in advanced magnetic flux vec tor
control. Note that the speed displayed is the actual speed from the PLG.
3. W hen the running speed display has been selected with "0" set in Pr. 37 and "0" in Pr. 144, the
monitor display shows the speed reference for a 4-pole motor (1800r/min is displayed at 60Hz).
4. To change the PU main monitor (PU m ain display) or PU level meter (PU level display), refer to
Pr. 52 and Pr. 53.
5. As the operation panel display is 4 digits, "----" is displayed when the monitored value exceeds
"9999".
CAUTION
Make sure that the running speed and number of poles set are correct.
Otherwise, t he motor might run at ext r emely high speed, damaging the machine.
PARAMETERS
79
Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function
selection"
Pr. 191 "SU terminal function selection"
Pr. 192 "IPF terminal function selection"
Pr. 193 "OL terminal function selection"
Pr. 194 "FU terminal function selection"
Pr. 195 "ABC terminal function
selection"
Related parameters
z
Up-to-frequency sensiti vi ty (Pr. 41)
Pr. 41 "up-to-frequency sensitivity"
The ON range of the up-to-frequency signal (SU) output when the output frequency reaches the running
frequency can be adjusted between 0 and ±100% of the running frequency.
This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency has been reached or us ed as the operation
start signal etc. for related equipment.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Set ting Range
41 10% 0 to 100%
Output frequency
ON
Running f r equencyAdjustable range Pr.41
Output signal
SU
Time
OFFOFF
z
Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116)
Pr. 42 "output frequency detection"
Pr. 43 "output frequency detection for reverse rotation"
Pr. 50 "second output frequency detection"
Pr. 116 "third output frequency detection"
The output frequency signal (FU, FU2, FU3) is output when the output frequency reaches or exceeds
the setting. This funct ion can be used for electr omagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc.
z
You can also set the detection of the frequency used exclusively for reverse rotation. This function is
effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation (rise) and
reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation, etc.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Sett i ng Range Rem a rks
42 6Hz 0 to 400Hz
43 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: Same as Pr. 42
setting
50 30Hz 0 to 400Hz
116 9999 0 t o 400Hz, 9999 9999: Functi on i nval i d
PARAMETERS
80
Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level"
Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level
at double speed"
Pr. 66 "stall prevention operation level
reduction starting frequency"
Pr. 154 "voltage reduction selection
during stall prevention operation"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection)
Related parameters
<Setting>
Refer to the figure below and set the corresponding parameters:
· W hen Pr . 43 ≠ 9999, the Pr. 42 setting applies to f orward rotation and the Pr. 43 setting applies to r everse
rotation.
Pr.50
Pr.42
Pr.116
Pr.50
Pr.43
Pr.11
6
Output signal
FU,FU2,FU3
Output frequency
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
Time
OFF OFF OFFON ON
Output Signal
Parameter Number Output Signal
42
43 FU1
50 FU2
116 FU3
Use Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 to assign the terminals used to output the FU2 and FU3 signals.
Note: 1. When the inboard option unit is used to exercise PLG feedback control, use the RUN (running)
signal. (If the FU1, FU2 or FU3 signal is used, the brake may not be opened.)
2. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be
affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.
Pr. 44, Pr. 45
Î
Refer to Pr. 7.
Pr. 46
Î
Refer to Pr. 0.
Pr. 47
Î
Refer to Pr. 3.
z
Second/third stall prevention (Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 114, Pr. 115)
Pr. 48 "second stall pr eventi on operation cur rent"
Pr. 49 "second stall pr eventi on operation
frequency"
Pr. 114 "third stall prevention operation
current"
Pr. 115 "third stall prevention operation
frequency"
z
The stall prevention operation level can be changed within the range from 0Hz to the frequency set in
Pr. 49 or Pr. 115.
z
The stall prevention operation level can be changed by switching the external input signal on-off.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Set ting Range
48 150% 0 to 200%
49 0 0 to 400Hz, 9999
114 150% 0 to 200%
115 0 0 to 400Hz
Running frequenc
y
Stall prevention
operation current
Acceleration
Dec e lerat ion/constant speed
Pr.49
Pr.115
Pr.114
Pr.48
PARAMETERS
81
<Setting>
· Set the stall prevention operation level in Pr. 48 and Pr. 114.
· Refer to the following list to set values in Pr. 49 and Pr. 115.
· Pr. 114 and Pr. 115 are made valid by switching on the X9 signal. Set "9" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to
allocate the terminal used to input the X9 signal.
Pr. 49 Set ting Pr. 115 Setti ng Operation
0Second (thi rd) stall prevent i on function is not act i vat ed.
0.01Hz to 400Hz Sec ond (t hi rd) stall prevent i on f unction is activated according to t he
frequency as shown above.
9999 Cannot be set. Sec ond stall prevent i on function is activated according to the RT signal.
RT signal ON..........Stall level Pr. 48
RT signal OFF ........ Stall level Pr. 22
Note: 1. When Pr. 49 = "9999", setting "0" in Pr. 48 disables the stall prevention function when the RT
signal switches on. When Pr . 49 ≠ "9999" and Pr. 48 = "0", the stall prevention operation level is
0% when the frequency is equal to or less than the value set in Pr. 49.
2. W hen the stall prevention operation level signal input f unction is selected (Pr . 22 = 9999), setting
"9999" in Pr. 49 changes the stall prevention oper ation level from the value of the s tall prevention
operation level signal (terminal 1 input) to the value set in Pr. 48 when the RT signal switches on.
3. When both the RT and X9 signals are on, the third stall prevention function is selected.
4. When the RT (X9) signal is on, the second (third) functions such as second (third)
acceleration/deceleration time are also selected.
5. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be
affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.
CAUTION
Do not set a too small value to the second (third) stall prevention operation current.
Otherwise, t or que gener at ed w ill decr ease.
Pr. 50
Î
Refer to Pr. 42.
PARAMETERS
82
Pr. 37 "speed display"
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference"
Pr. 170 "watt-hour meter clear"
Pr. 171 "actual operation hour meter
clear"
Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration"
Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration"
Related parameters
z
Monitor display/ F M , AM terminal function selection (Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158)
Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display screen data selection"
Pr. 53 "PU level display data selection"
Pr. 54 "FM terminal function selection"
Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection"
z
You can select the signals shown on the operation panel (FR-DU04)/parameter unit (FR-PU04) main
display screen and on the parameter unit (FR-PU04) level meter and signals output to the FM and AM
terminals.
z
There are two different signal outputs: FM pulse train output terminal and AM analog output terminal.
Select the signals using Pr. 54 and Pr. 158.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
52 0 0 t o 20, 22 to 25, 100
53 1 0 t o 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18
54 1 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21
158 1 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21
<Setting>
Set Pr. 52 to Pr. 54 and Pr. 158 in accordance with the following table:
Parameter Setting
Pr.52 Pr.53 Pr.54 Pr.158
Signal Type Display
Unit DU
LED
PU
main
monitor PU level
meter FM
terminal AM
terminal
Full-Scal e Value of
FM, AM, Level Meter
No display × × 0××
Output frequency Hz 0/100 0/100 1 1 1 P r. 55
Output current A 0/100 0/100 2 2 2 Pr. 56
Output volt age V 0/100 0/100 3 3 3 400V or 800V
Alarm di splay 0/100 0/100 ×××
Frequency set ting Hz 5 * 5 5 5 Pr. 55
Running speed r/min 6 * 6 6 6 Pr. 55 value converted into Pr. 37
value
Motor torque % 7 * 7 7 7 Rated torque of appl i ed motor × 2
Converter output vol tage V 8 * 8 8 8 400V or 800V
Regenerative brake dut y % 9 * 9 9 9 Pr. 70
Electronic overc urrent
protecti on l oad factor % 10 * 10 10 10 Protecti on operation level
Output current peak
value A 11 * 11 11 11 P r. 56
Converter output voltage
peak value V 12 * 12 12 12 400V or 800V
Input power kW 13 * 13 13 13 Rated power of inverter rat i ng × 2
Output power kW 14 * 14 14 14 Rated power of inverter rati ng × 2
Input terminal s tatus × *×××
Output terminal s tatus × *×××
Load met er ** % 17 17 17 17 17 Pr. 56
Motor exciting current A 18 18 18 18 18 Pr. 56
Posit i on pul se 19 19 ×××
Cumula t ive operation
time hr 20 20 ×××
Reference voltage
output × × × 21 21 1440Hz is output to FM terminal.
Full-scale voltage is output to AM
terminal.
Orientati on s tatus 22 22 ×××
Actual operation time hr 23 23 ×××
Motor load factor % 24 24 ××× Rat ed i nverter current × 2
Cumulative power kW 25 25 ×××
PARAMETERS
83
W hen 100 is set in Pr. 52, the monitored values during stop and during operation differ as indicated below:
(The LED on the left of Hz flickers during a stop and is lit during running.)
Pr. 52
0 100
During operation/ duri ng
stop During stop During operation
Output frequency Output frequency Set f requency Out put frequency
Output current Output current
Output volt age Output volt age
Alarm di splay Alarm di splay
Note: 1. During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence is displayed.
2. During MRS, the values are the same as during a stop. During of fline auto tuning, the tuning status
monitor has priority.
Note: 1. The monitoring of items marked × cannot be selected.
2. By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of "output frequency to alarm display" can be selected in
sequence by the SHIFT key.
3. *"Frequency setting to output terminal status" on the PU main monitor are selected by "other
monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
4. **The load meter is displayed in %, with the current set in Pr. 56 regarded as 100%.
5. The motor torque display is valid only in the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode.
6. The actual operation time displayed by setting "23" in Pr. 52 is calculated using the inverter
operation time. (Inverter stop time is not included.) Set "0" in Pr. 171 to clear it.
7. When Pr. 53 = "0", the level meter display of the parameter unit can be erased.
8. By setting "1, 2, 5, 6, 11, 17 or 18" in Pr. 53, the full-scale value can be set in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56.
9. The cumulative operation time and actual operation time are calculated from 0 to 65535 hours,
then cleared, and recalculated from 0.
When the operation panel (FR-DU04) is used, the display shows "----" after 9999 or more hours
have elapsed.
Whether 9999 or more hours have elapsed or not can be confirmed on the parameter unit
(FR-PU04).
10. The actual operation time is not calculated unless the inverter has operated for longer than one
hour continuously.
11. When the operation panel (FR-DU04) is used, the display unit is Hz, V or A only.
12. T he orientation status func tions when the FR-A5AP option is used. If the option is not us ed, "22"
may be set in Pr. 52 and the value displayed remains "0" and the function is invalid.
PARAMETERS
84
Pr. 37 "speed display"
Pr. 53 "PU level display data selection"
Pr. 54 "FM terminal function selection"
Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection"
Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration"
Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration"
Related parameters
z
Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56)
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference"
Set the frequenc y or curr ent which is refer enced for dis play when the frequency or c urrent is selected for the
FM and AM terminals and PU level meter display.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Sett i ng Range
55 60Hz 〈50Hz〉0 to 400Hz
56 Rated output
current 0 to 500A
Pr.56Pr.55
1440 pulses/second. (terminal FM)
10VDC (terminal AM)
Full scale (PU level monitor)
Output or display
Output or display
Output frequency
Frequenc y setting
Running speed
Output current
Output current peak value
Load meter
1440 pulses/second. (terminal FM)
10VDC (terminal AM)
Full scale (PU level monitor)
<Setting>
Referring to the above figures and following table, set Pr. 55 and Pr. 56:
Monitoring Referenc e
Setting Parameter Monitored Dat a S el ection PU Level Display
Selection
Pr. 53 Setting
FM Terminal Func t i on
Selection
Pr. 54 Setting
AM Terminal Function
Selection
Pr. 158 Set ting
Output f requency (Hz)) 1 1 1
Frequency set ting (Hz) 5 5 5
Frequency m oni t ori ng
reference Pr. 55 Running s peed (Pr. 37) 6 6 6
Output current (A) 2 2 2
Output current peak value
(A) 11 11 11
Load met er (% ) 17 17 17
Current m oni t ori ng
reference Pr. 56
Motor exciting current (A) 18 18 18
Setti ng using Pr. 55, Pr. 56
Set to make the PU
level meter indication
to be in full-scale.
Set to make the
termi nal FM puls e t rai n
output to be 1440
pulses/second.
Set to make the
term i nal A M output
voltage to be 10V .
Note: 1. The m aximum pulse train output of term inal FM is 2400 pulses/second. If Pr. 55 is not adjusted,
the output of terminal FM will be filled to capacity. Therefore, adjust Pr. 55.
2. The maximum output voltage of terminal AM is 10VDC.
PARAMETERS
85
z
Automatic restart af t er instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165)
Pr. 57 "coasting time for automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure/commercial power supply-inverter switch-over"
Pr. 58 "cushion time for automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure/commercial power supply-inverter switch-over"
Pr.162 "Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection"
Pr.163 "First cushion time for restart"
Pr.164 "First cushion voltage for restart"
Pr.165 "Restart stall prevention operation level"
z
You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor (with the motor coasting) when the commercial
power supply is switched to the inverter operation or when the power is restored after an instantaneous
power failure. (When automatic restart operation is set to be enabled, UVT and IPF among the alarm
output signals will not be output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.)
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remark s
57 9999 0, 0.1 t o 5 s, 9999 9999: No restart
58 1. 0 s 0 t o 60 s
162 0 0, 1 0: Frequency searc h, 1: No frequency
search
163 0 s 0 to 20 s
164 0% 0 to 100%
165 150% 0 t o 200%
(Pr.163) Pr.58
Pr.164 STF
IM
NFB
CS
SD
CS
SD
S1 〈L21〉
R1 〈L11〉
T 〈L3〉
S 〈L2〉
R 〈L1〉
MC1
MC2
×
MC3
W
V
U
Connect CS-SD for use of only
automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure.
Voltage
Time
Voltage rise time
MC switching sequen ce
PARAMETERS
86
<Setting>
Refer to the above figures and following table, and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number Setting Description
0Frequency searc h made
Frequency searc h i s made after detect i on of an i nstantaneous power failure.
162 1No frequency s earch
Independently of the motor coasting speed, the output voltage is gradually increased
with the frequency kept as pres et .
0.4K to 1.5K 0.5 s coasting t i me
2.2K to 7.5K 1.0 s coasting t i me
011K or more 3.0 s coasting t i me General l y us e t hi s sett i ng.
0.1 to 5 s Waiting t im e f or inverter-t riggered res tart aft er power is rest ored from an inst antaneous
power failure. (Set this time between 0.1 s and 5 s according to the inertia moment
(GD2) and torque of the l oad.)
57
9999 No restart
58 0 to 60 s
163 0 to 20 s
164 0 to 100%
165 0 to 200%
Normally the motor may be run with the factory settings. These values are adjustable
to the load (i nert i a mom ent, torque).
Note: 1. W hen restart operation is selected, UVT and IPF among the alarm output signals are not output
at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.
2. If the inverter capacity is more than one rank higher than the motor capacity, an overcurrent
(OCT) alarm may take place, disabling the motor from starting.
3. When Pr. 57 ≠ 9999, the inverter will not run if the CS signal remain off.
4. When Pr. 162 = "0", connection of two or more motors to one inverter will make the inverter
function improperly. (The inverter will not start properly.)
5. W hen Pr . 162 = "0", the DC dynam ic brak e is operated instantly on detection of restar ting speed.
Therefore, if the inertia moment (GD2) of the load is small, the speed may reduce.
6. When Pr. 162 = "1", the output frequency before an instantaneous power failure is stored and
output at the time of r estart. If the power of the inver ter contr ol circuit is lost, the f requency before
an instantaneous power failure cannot be stored and the inverter will start at 0Hz.
7. The SU and FU signals are not output during restar t but are output af ter the res tart cushion time
has elapsed.
CAUTION
Provide mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2.
The invert er will be damaged if power is entered int o t he inverter out put section.
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected, the motor and
machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an
instantaneous power failure. Stay away from the motor and machine.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, apply the
supplied CAUTION seals in easily visible places.
PARAMETERS
87
•••••••
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 18 "high-speed maximum frequency"
Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration
time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
Related parameters
z
Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)
Pr. 59 "remote setting function selection"
If the operator panel is located away from the c ontrol box, you can use c ontact signals to per form continuous
variable-speed operation, without using analog signals.
z
By m erely setting this param eter, you can use the acceleration, deceleration and setting clear functions of
the motorized speed setter (FR-FK).
z
When the remote function is used, the output frequency of the inverter can be compensated for as follows:
External operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus external running frequency other
than multi-speeds
(Set "1" in Pr. 28 to select the compensation input (terminal 1).)
PU operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus PU running frequency
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setti ng Range
59 0 0, 1, 2
Output frequency
Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM)
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF)
Time
ON ON
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameter:
Operation
Pr. 59 Setting Remote setting function Frequency s et ting storage
function
0No
1Yes Yes
2Yes No
· Use Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether the frequency setting
storage function in the remote setting mode is used or not. When "remote setting function - yes" is
selected, the functions of terminals RH, RM and RL are changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM)
and clear (RL).
Note: 1. The frequency can be varied by RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) between 0 and the
maximum frequency (Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 setting).
2. W hen the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on, the set frequency varies according to
the slope set in Pr. 44 or Pr . 45. The output frequenc y acceleration/deceler ation times are as set
in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8, respectively. Therefore, the longer preset times are used to vary the actual
output frequency.
3. The frequency setting storage function stores in memory the remotely-set frequency (frequency
set by RH/RM operation) when the acceleration and dec eleration signals rem ain of f f or m ore than
1 minute or as soon as the start signal (STF or STR) switches off. W hen power is switched off,
then on, operation is resumed with that value.
PARAMETERS
88
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 13 "starting frequency"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 80, Pr. 81
(advanced magnetic flux vector control)
Pr. 278 to Pr. 285
(brake sequence functions)
Related parameters
CAUTION
When selecting this function, re-set t he maximum frequency according to the machine.
z
Intelligent mode selection (Pr. 60)
Pr. 60 "intelligent mode selection"
The inverter automatically sets appropriate parameters for operation.
z
If you do not set the acceleration and deceleration times and V/F pattern, you can run the inverter as if
appropriate values had been set in the corresponding parameters. This operation mode is useful to start
operation immediately without making fine parameter settings.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
60 0 0 to 8
<Setting>
Pr. 60
Setting Operation Mode Descri pt i on Automatically Set
Parameters
0Ordinary operation
mode
1, 2 Shortest
acceleration/
decelerati on mode
Set to accelerate/decelerate t he motor in t he shortest time. The
inverter makes ac c el eration/decel eration in the shortest t i me using i t s full
capabilities. During deceleration, an ins ufficient brake capability m ay c ause
the regenerative overvol tage alarm (E.OV3).
"1": S t al l prevention operation level 150%
"2": S t al l prevention operation level 180%
Pr. 7, Pr. 8
3
Optimum
acceleration/
decelerati on mode
(Note 2, 4)
Optim um operation can be carried out by fully utilizing the inverter
capabilities in the continuous rat i ng range.
Self-learni ng automat i cally sets the correspondi ng parameters so that the
average current during accelerati on/ deceleration is equal to the rat ed current.
Appropriate for applic at ions where the load will not vary by a large am mount.
Pr. 0, Pr. 7, Pr. 8
4Energy-saving
mode (Not e 3, 5)
Tunes the invert er output voltage onl i ne to mini mize the inverter
output volt age duri ng constant -speed operation.
Appropriate f or energy-saving applications such as fan and pump. Output voltage
5, 6 Elevator mode
(Note 3)
Automatical l y c ontrols the i nvert er output voltage t o del i ver t he
maxim um torque in bot h the driving and regenerative modes. Appropri ate
for a counterbal anced elevator.
"5": S t al l prevention operation level 150%
"6": S t al l prevention operation level 180%
Pr. 0, Pr. 13, Pr. 19
7
Mechanical
brake opening
com pl et i on signal
input
8
Brake sequence
mode Mechanical
brake opening
completion
signal not i nput
This function caus es the inverter to output the
mec hani cal brake operati on t i ming si gnal for elevating
application.
For functi on details and related paramet er setting, refer
to Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 (brake sequence functions).
PARAMETERS
89
Note: 1. When more accurate control is required for your application, set the other parameters as
appropriate.
2. Because of the learning system, this control is not valid at the first time in the optimum
acceleration/deceleration mode. Also, this mode is only valid for frequency setting of 30.01Hz or
more.
3. W hen the advanced magnetic flux vector control has been selected using Pr. 80 and Pr. 81, the
settings of the energy-saving mode and elevator mode are ignored. (Advanced magnetic flux
vector control has higher priority.)
4. If an overvoltage (OV3) trip has occurred during operation in the optimum
acceler ation/deceleration m ode (setting "3"), r e-set Pr. 8 "deceler ation time" to a lar ger value and
restart operation in this mode.
5. When the "energy-saving mode" (setting "4") is used to decelerate the motor to a stop, the
deceleration time may be longer than the preset value. Also, overvoltage is likely to occur in this
mode as compared to the constant-torque load characteristics, set the deceleration time to a
longer value.
PARAMETERS
90
Pr. 60 "intelligent mode selection"
Related parameter
z
Accelerati on/ deceleration reference current/l ift mode starting frequency (Pr. 61 to Pr. 64)
Pr. 61 "reference current"
Pr. 62 "reference current for acceleration"
Pr. 63 "reference current for deceleration"
Pr. 64 "starting frequency for elevator mode"
z
Set these parameters to improve performance in the intelligent mode.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setti ng Range Remark s
61 9999 0 to 500A, 9999 9999: Referenced from rated inverter
current.
62 9999 0 to 200%, 9999
63 9999 0 to 200%, 9999
64 9999 0 to 200%, 9999
<Setting>
(1) Pr. 61 "reference current setting"
Setti ng Reference Current
9999 (factory setting) Referenced from rated inverter current
0 to 500A Referenced from sett i ng (rated mot or current)
(2) Pr. 62 "reference current for acceleration"
(The reference value differs between the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode and optimum
acceleration/deceleration mode.)
The reference current setting can be changed.
Sett i ng Reference Current Remark s
150% (180%) is the lim i t value. Shortes t accelerati on/decelerati on mode
9999 (fact ory setti ng) 100% is the optimum value. Opt i mum ac celeration/ deceleration mode
The setti ng of 0 to 200% is the limit value. Shortes t acceleration/deceleration mode
0 to 200% The setting of 0 to 200% is the optim um
value. Optimum accelerati on/ deceleration mode
(3) Pr. 63 "reference current for deceleration"
(The reference value differs between the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode and optimum
acceleration/deceleration mode.)
The reference current setting can be changed.
Sett i ng Reference Current Remark s
150% (180%) is the lim i t value. Shortes t accelerati on/decelerati on mode
9999 (fact ory setti ng) 100% is the optimum value. Opt i mum ac celeration/ deceleration mode
The setti ng of 0 to 200% is the limit value. Shortes t acceleration/deceleration mode
0 to 200% The setting of 0 to 200% is the optim um
value. Optimum accelerati on/ deceleration mode
(4) Pr. 64 "starting frequency for elevator mode"
Setti ng Reference Current
9999 (fact ory setti ng) 2Hz is the starting frequency.
0 to 10Hz The setting of 0 to 10Hz is the s tarting frequency.
Note: Pr. 61 to Pr. 64 are only valid when any of "1 to 6" is selected for Pr. 60.
PARAMETERS
91
z
Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)
Pr. 65 "retry selection"
Pr. 67 "number of retries at alarm occurrence"
Pr. 68 "retry waiting time"
Pr. 69 "retry count display erasure"
When an alarm occurs, the retry function causes the inverter to automatically reset itself to make a restart
and continue operation. You can select whether retry is m ade or not, alarm s reset f or retry, number of retries
made, and waiting time.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
65 0 0 to 5
67 0 0 to 10, 101 to 110
68 1 s 0 to 10 s
69 0 0
<Setting>
Use Pr. 65 to select alarms to be reset for retry.
Errors Reset for Retry Setting
Display 012345
E.OC1
zz zzz
E.OC2
zz zz
E.OC3
zz zzz
E.OV1
zzzz
E.OV2
zzzz
E.OV3
zzzz
E.THM
z
E.THT
z
E.IPF
zz
E.UVT
zz
E.FIN
E. BE
zz
E. GF
zz
E. LF
E.OHT
z
E.OLT
zz
E.OPT
zz
E.OP1
zz
E.OP2
zz
E.OP3
zz
E. PE
zz
E.PUE
E.RET
E.CPU
E.E6
E.E7
E.MB1
zz
E.MB2
zz
E.MB3
zz
E.MB4
zz
E.MB5
zz
E.MB6
zz
E.MB7
zz
E.P24
E.CTE
Note:
z
indicates the errors selected for retry.
PARAMETERS
92
· Use Pr. 67 to set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.
Pr. 67 Set ting Number of Ret ri es Alarm Signal Out put
0 Retry is not made.
1 to 10 1 to 10 times Not output.
101 to 110 1 to 10 times Output.
· Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a restart in the range 0 to 10
seconds.
· Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retry. The
setting of "0" erases the cumulative number of times.
Note: 1. The cumulative number in Pr. 69 is incremented by "1" when retry operation is regarded as
successful, i.e. when normal operation is continued without any alarm occurring during a period
more than four times longer than the time set in Pr. 68.
2. If alarms occur consecutively within a period four times longer than the above waiting time, the
operation panel (FR-DU04) may show data different from the most recent data or the param eter
unit (FR-PU04) may show data different from the first retry data. The data stored as the error
reset for retry is only that of the alarm which occurred the first time.
3. W hen an inverter alarm is reset at the restart time, the stored data of the electronic overcurrent
protection, regenerative brake duty, etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-on reset.)
CAUTION
When you have selected t he retry function, stay away from the motor and machine unless
required. They will start suddenly (after the r e set t ime has elapsed) aft er occur r ence of an
alarm.
When you have selected t he retry function, apply the supplied CAUTION seals in easily
visible places.
Pr. 66
Î
Refer to Pr. 22
.
Pr. 70
Î
Refer to Pr. 30
.
PARAMETERS
93
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr. 12 "DC dynamic brake voltage"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 60 "intelligent mode"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"
Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status"
Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 "
V/F frequency/voltage"
Related parameters
z
Applied motor (Pr. 71)
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Set the motor used.
Parameter
Number Factory
Setting Setting Range
71 0 0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20, 23, 24
<Setting>
· Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.
Motor
Pr. 71
Setting Thermal Characteri stics of Elec tronic Overcurrent Protecti on Standard Constant
Torque
0 Therm al characteristics matc hi ng a standard motor
{
1 Therm al characteristics matc hi ng the Mitsubis hi constant-torque mot or
{
2Thermal characteristics matc hi ng a standard motor
5-point fl exible V/F charact eri s tics
{
20 Thermal characteristics for advanced magnetic flux vector control of the Mitsubishi
standard motor SF -JR4P (1.5K W (2HP) or les s)
{
3 Standard motor
{
13 Const ant-torque m ot or
{
23 Mitsubishi general-purpose motor SF-JR4P
(1.5KW (2HP) or less)
Select " offline aut o tuning sett i ng" .
{
4 Standard motor
{
14 Aut o tuning data can be read or s et anew.
{
24 Mitsubishi general-purpose motor SF-JR4P
(1.5KW (2HP) or less)
Constant-torque mot or
{
5 Standard motor
{
15 Const ant-torque m ot or Star connection
{
6 Standard motor
{
16 Const ant-torque m ot or Delta connection
Motor const ants can
be entered direct l y.
{
7 Standard motor
{
17 Const ant-torque m ot or Star connection
{
8 Standard motor
{
18 Const ant-torque m ot or Delta connection
Direct motor
const ant entry and
offli ne aut o tuning
{
·For the 5.5K and 7.5K, the Pr. 0 and Pr. 12 settings are automatically changed depending on the Pr. 71
setting.
Pr. 71 0, 2, 3 to 8, 20, 23, 24 1, 13 to 18
Pr. 0 3% 2%
Pr. 12 4% 2%
Note: 1. W hen "9999" is set in Pr. 19, "2" cannot be set in Pr. 71. T o set "2" in Pr. 71, set the appropriate
value (other than "9999") in Pr. 19.
2. W hen "2" is set in Pr. 71, Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 are displayed on the parameter unit (FR-PU04). In
other settings, if any of Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 s ettings is changed, the new setting is not displayed in
the "Default parameter list" and "Set parameter list".
3. Refer to Pr. 96 for offline auto tuning.
4. Set any of "3, 7, 8, 13, 17 and 18" to perform offline auto tuning.
CAUTION
Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used.
Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.
PARAMETERS
94
z
PWM carrier fr equency (Pr. 72, Pr. 240)
Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection"
Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM setting"
You can change the motor tone.
z
By parameter setting, you can select Soft-PWM control which changes the motor tone.
z
Soft-PWM control changes motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending complex tone.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setti ng Range Rem arks
72 2 0 to 15 0: 0.7kHz, 15: 14.5kHz
240 1 0, 1 1: Soft-PWM valid
<Setting>
· Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Descrip t ion
72 0 to 15 PWM carrier frequency can be changed.
The setti ng di splayed is i n [ kHz]. Note that 0 indic ates 0.7kHz and 15 i ndi cates 14. 5kHz.
0Soft-PWM invalid
240 1When any of "0 t o 5" i s set in P r. 72, Soft -PWM is m ade val i d.
Note: 1. A reduced PW M carr ier frequenc y will decreas e inverter-gener ated noise and leak age curr ent but
increase motor noise.
PARAMETERS
95
Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level"
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage bias"
Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain"
Related parameters
z
Voltage input (Pr. 73)
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
You can select the analog input terminal specifications, the override function and the function to switch
between forward and reverse rotation depending on the input signal polarity.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
73 1 0 to 5, 10 t o 15
<Setting>
Pr. 73
Setting Terminal AU
Signal Term i nal 2
Input Vol tage Terminal 1
Input Vol tage Terminal 4 Input, 4
to 20mA Override Function Polarity
Reversible
0∗0 to 10V 0 to ±10V
1∗0 to 5V 0 to ±10V
2∗0 to 10V 0 to ±5V
3∗0 to 5V 0 to ±5V
×
4 0 to 10V ∗0 to ±10V
5 0 to 5V ∗0 to ±5V
{
No
(Note 3)
10 ∗0 to 10V 0 to ±10V
11 ∗0 to 5V 0 to ±10V
12 ∗0 to 10V 0 to ±5V
13 ∗0 to 5V 0 to ±5V
×
14 0 to 10V ∗0 to ±10V
15
OFF
(No)
0 to 5V ∗0 to ±5V
Invalid
{
Valid
0 0 to ±10V
1 0 to ±10V
2 0 to ±5V
3
Invalid
0 to ±5V
×
4 0 to 10V
5 0 to 5V Invalid
{
No
(Note 3)
10 0 to ±10V
11 0 to ±10V
12 0 to ±5V
13
Invalid
0 to ±5V
×
14 0 to 10V
15
ON
(Yes)
0 to 5V Invalid
Yes
∗
{
Valid
Note: 1. The value of terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the main speed setting
signal of terminal 2 or 4.
2. W hen override has been selected, term inal 1 or 4 is for the main speed setting and terminal 2 is
for the override signal (50 to 150% at 0-5V or 0-10V).
3. Indicates that a negative-polarity frequency command signal is not accepted.
4. To change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum frequency command
voltage (current), use the frequency setting voltage (current) gain, Pr. 903 (Pr. 905). At this tim e,
the comm and voltage (c urrent) need not be input. Also, the acceler ation/deceleration time, which
is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, is not affected by the
change in Pr. 73 setting.
5. When the Pr. 22 setting is "9999", the value of term inal 1 is f or the stall pr evention operation level
setting.
6. ∗ indicates the main speed setting.
PARAMETERS
96
z
Input filter time constant (Pr. 74)
Pr. 74 "filter time constant"
You can set the input section's internal filter constant of an external voltage or current frequency setting
signal.
z
Effective for eliminating noise in the frequency setting circuit.
z
Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise. A larger setting
results in lower res pons e. (The tim e c ons tant c an be set between approx imately 1ms to 1s . with the s etting
of 0 to 8. A larger setting results in a larger filter time constant.)
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
74 1 0 to 8
z
Reset selection/PU disconnection detect ion/PU stop selecti on (Pr. 75)
Pr. 75 "reset selection/PU disconnection detection/PU stop selection"
You can select the reset input acceptance, PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) connector disconnection detection
function and PU stop function.
• Reset selection : You can select the reset function input timing.
• PU disconnection detection : When it is detected that the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) connector is
disconnected fr om the inverter for m ore than 1 second, the inverter outputs
an alarm code (E.PUE) and comes to an alarm stop.
• PU stop selection : When an alarm oc curs in any operation m ode, you can stop the m otor fr om
the PU by pressing the [STOP] key.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
75 14 0 to 3, 14 to 17
STF ON
(STR) OFF
Stop example for external operation
Speed
O
peration panel [SET] key
[STOP] key
Time
<Setting>
Pr. 75
Setting Reset Selec tion PU Disconnection Detectio n PU Stop Selec tion
0Reset input normally enabled.
1Reset input enabl ed onl y when the
protecti ve function i s activat ed.
If the PU is dis c onnected, operat i on
will be continued.
2Reset input normally enabled.
3Reset input enabl ed onl y when the
protecti ve function i s activat ed.
When the PU is disconnected, the
inverter output i s shut of f .
Pressi ng the [STOP] key decelerat es
the m otor to a st op only in the PU
operation mode.
14 Reset input normally enabled.
15 Reset input enabl ed onl y when the
protecti ve function i s activat ed.
If the PU is dis c onnected, operat i on
will be continued.
16 Reset input normally enabled.
17 Reset input enabl ed onl y when the
protecti ve function i s activat ed.
When the PU is disconnected, the
inverter output i s shut of f .
Pressi ng the [STOP] key decelerat es
the m ot or to a stop in any of the PU,
external and communication operation
modes.
PARAMETERS
97
How to make a restart after a stop made by the [STOP] key from the PU during external
operation
(1) Operation panel (FR-DU04)
1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal.
2) Press the [MODE] key three times* to call the indication. (Note 8)
(*: For monitor screen)
3) Press the [SET] key .
4) Turn on the STF or STR signal.
(2) Parameter unit (FR-PU04)
1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal.
2) Press the [EXT] key.
3) Switch on the STF or STR signal.
Note: 1. By entering the res et signal (RES) during operation, the inverter shuts off output while it is r eset,
the data of the electronic overcurrent protection and regenerative brake duty are reset, and the
motor coasts.
2. The PU disconnection detection f unction judges that the PU connec tor is disc onnected when it is
removed from the inverter for more than 1 second. If the PU had been disconnected before
power-on, it is not judged as an alarm.
3. To resume operation, reset the inverter after confirming that the PU is connected securely.
4. When PU disconnection detection is set and the PU is then disconnected during PU jog
operation, the motor decelerates to a stop. The motor will not stop if a PU disconnection alarm
occurs.
5. The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is executed, this setting will not
return to the initial value.
6. W hen the motor is stopped by the PU stop function, PS is displayed but an alarm is not output.
When the PU connector is us ed f or RS- 485 c omm unic ation oper ation, the res et s elec tion and PU
stop selection functions are valid but the PU disconnection detection function is invalid.
7. The res et k ey of the PU is only valid when the protective f unction is ac tivated, independent of the
Pr. 75 setting.
8. W hen Pr . 79 = "3", press the [MOD E] key three times, then pr ess the [UP/DOWN] k ey to display
.
CAUTION
Do not reset t he inverter with the start signal on.
Otherw ise, t he motor will start instantly after r esetting, which may lead t o hazardous conditions.
PARAMETERS
98
z
Alarm code out put selection (Pr. 76)
Pr. 76 "alarm code output selection"
When an alarm occurs, its code can be output as a 4-bit digital signal from the open collector output
terminals. When programmed operation has been selected, this parameter also serves to output a group
operation signal.
The alarm code can read by a programmable controller etc to show its remedy on a display. Also you can
look at the progress of programmed operation.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting S et ting Range
76 0 0 to 3
<Setting>
· Alarm code output
Output Terminals
Pr. 76 Setting SU IPF OL FU
0 Al arm code is not output . (Depends on Pr. 190 to Pr. 195).
1 Alarm code bit 3 A l arm code bit 2 Alarm code bit 1 Alarm code bit 0
2When an alarm occurs, an al arm code s i gnal i s output. (Output signal i s the same as in 1.)
When operation is normal, an operation status signal i s output. (Output signal i s the sam e as in 0.)
3
(during programmed
operation) Output at time-out During group 3 operation During group 2 operati on During group 1 operation
Note: 1. For alarm code definitions, refer to page 178.
2. The Pr. 76 s etting overrides the Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 settings . T herefor e, if you assign other s ignals
to output terminals SU, IPF, OL and FU using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, these terminals provide the
output signals as listed above when any of "1 to 3" is set in Pr. 76. This should be noted when
using the functions which use the output signals to exercise control.
Example: When using the brake sequence functions (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285), assign the brake
opening request signal (BOF) to the RUN terminal by setting "20" in Pr. 190.
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 190 to Pr. 195
(multi-function outputs)
Pr. 200 to Pr. 231
"programmed operation"
Related parameters
PARAMETERS
99
z
Parameter write inhibit selection (Pr. 77)
Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection"
You can select between write-enable and disable f or parameters . This func tion is used to prevent param eter
values from being rewritten by accident.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting S et ting Range
77 0 0, 1, 2
<Setting>
Pr. 77 Set ting Function
0Write enabled duri ng a stop only.
Param eter values may only be written duri ng a stop in the PU operation mode.
1Write disabled.
Values of Pr.75, Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 "operati on mode selec tion" m ay be written.
2Write enabled even duri ng operat i on.
Note: 1. The values of the parameters half-tone screened in the parameter list can be set at any time.
(Pr. 72 and Pr. 240 values cannot be set during external operation.)
2. If Pr. 77 = "2", the values of the following parameters cannot be written during operation. Stop
operation when changing their parameter settings.
Parameter
Number Name Parameter
Number Name
23 Stall prevention operation level at
double speed 100 V/F1 (first frequency)
48 Second stall prevention operation
current 101 V/F1 (first frequency volt age)
49 Second stall prevention operation
frequency 102 V/F2 (sec ond frequency)
60 Int el l i gent mode s el ection 103 V/F2 (second frequenc y vol tage)
61 Referenc e current 104 V/F3 (third frequency)
66 Stall prevention operation reduc tion
starti ng frequency 105 V/F3 (third frequenc y vol t age)
71 Appli ed motor 106 V/F4 (fourth frequenc y)
79 Operati on mode selec tion 107 V/F4 (fourth frequenc y vol t age)
80 Motor capacity 108 V/ F5 (fifth f requency)
81 Number of motor poles 109 V/F5 (fift h frequency voltage)
83 Rated motor volt age 135 Commercial power supply-invert er
switch-over s equenc e output
terminal selection
84 Rated motor frequency 136 MC switc h-over i nterlock time
95 Advanc ed mode selection 137 Start waiting time
96 Aut o tuning sett i ng/stat us 138 Commerc i a l power supply-i n vert er
switch-over select i on at alarm
occurrence
139 Automatic inverter-comm ercial
power supply switch-over frequency
3. By setting "1" in Pr. 77, the following clear operations can be inhibited:
· Parameter clear
· All clear
· User clear
PARAMETERS
100
z
Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)
Pr. 78 "reverse rotation prevention selection"
This function can prevent any reverse rotation fault resulting from the misoperation of the start signal.
z
Used for a machine which runs only in one direction, e.g. fan, pump.
(The setting of this function is valid for the PU, external and communication operations.)
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Set ting Range
78 0 0, 1, 2
<Setting>
Pr. 78 Set ting Function
0Both forward and reverse rot at i ons allowed
1Reverse rotat i on di sallowed
2Forward rotation disal l owed
PARAMETERS
101
Pr. 15 "jog frequency"
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to 27, Pr.232 to
Pr.239
"multi-speed operation"
Pr. 76 "alarm code output selection"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection)
Pr. 200 to Pr. 231
"programmed operation"
Pr. 15 "jog frequency"
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to 27, Pr.232 to
Pr.239
"multi-speed operation"
Pr. 76 "alarm code output selection"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection)
Pr. 200 to Pr. 231
"programmed operation"
Related parameters
z
Operati on mode selection (Pr. 79)
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Used to select the operation mode of the inverter.
You can choose any of the operation modes : operation using external signals (external operation), operation
from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) (PU operation), combination of PU operation and external operation
(external/PU combined operation), and computer link operation (when the FR-A5NR option is used).
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Sett i ng Range
79 0 0 to 8
<Setting>
Pr. 79 Set ting Function
0PU or external operation c an be s el ected.
1PU operation mode
2External operation mode
3
External/PU c ombined operati on mode 1
Running frequency..........Set from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) (direct setting, [UP/DOWN] key) or external
signal input (multi-speed set ting only)
Start signal......................External signal input (terminal STF, STR)
4External/PU c ombined operati on mode 2
Running frequency..........External signal input (terminal 2, 4, 1, jog, m ulti-speed s elect ion)
Start signal......................Input from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) ([FWD] key, [REV] key)
5
Programmed operation mode
You can set 10 different operation starting times, rotation directions and running frequencies for each of three
groups.
Operation start. ............STF, timer reset...........STR
Group selection............RH, RM, RL
6Switch-over mode
Switch-over between PU operation, external operation and computer link operation (when the communication
option such as the FR-A5NR i s used) m odes can be done while running.
7External operation mode (PU operation i nterlock)
X12 signal ON.................May be switched to PU operation mode (output st op during external operation)
X12 signal OFF...............Switching to PU operation mode inhibited
8Switching t o other than external operation mode (disall owed during operati on)
X16 signal ON ................Switched to external operation mode
X16 signal OFF...............Switched to PU operation mode
Note: 1. Either "3" or "4" m ay be set to select the PU/ex ternal c om bined operation. T hese s ettings diff er in
starting method.
(1) Programmed operation
With this function, you can set 10 different operation starting times, rotation directions and running
frequencies individually for each of selected three groups to perform automatic operation under the
control of the internal elapsed time counting timer. For full information of this function, refer to the
explanations of Pr. 200 to Pr. 231.
PARAMETERS
102
(2) Switch-over mode
You can select between PU operation, external operation and computer link operation (when FR-A5NR option
is used).
Operation Mode Switchi ng Switc hi ng Operat i on/Operating St atus
External operation t o P U
operation
1) Select the PU operation mode.
z
Rotation di rec tion is t he same as t hat of external operation.
z
Set f requency is as set by t he potenti omet er (frequency s etti ng potentiom eter). (Note t hat
the sett i ng will disappear when power is switched off or t he inverter is reset.)
External operation t o computer
link operat i on
1) Mode change com mand to c omputer li nk mode is transm i t ted from t he comput er.
z
Rotation di rec tion is t he same as t hat of external operation.
z
Set f requency is as set by t he potenti omet er (frequency s etti ng potentiom eter). (Note t hat
the sett i ng will disappear when power is switched off or t he inverter is reset.)
PU operation t o external
operation
1) Press the external operation key of the paramet er uni t .
z
Rotation di rec tion is det ermined by the external operat i on i nput signal.
z
Set f requency is determined by the external frequency set ting signal .
PU operation t o computer l i nk
operation 1) Mode change comm and to com put er l i nk mode is transmitted from the comput er.
z
Rotation di rec tion and set frequency are the same as t hose of PU operati on.
Comput er l i nk operation to
external operation
1) The switch-over c ommand to the external mode i s sent f rom the computer.
z
Rotation di rec tion is det ermined by the external operat i on i nput signal.
z
Set f requency is determined by the external frequency set ting signal .
Computer link operation to PU
operation 1) Select the P U operat i on mode with the operati on panel or parameter unit .
z
Rotation di rec tion and set frequency are the same as t hose of computer link operation.
(3) PU operation interlock
When the PU operation interlock signal is s witched of f , the operation mode is f orc ibly changed to the exter nal
operation mode. This function prevents the inverter from being inoperative by the external command if the
mode is accidentally left unswitched from the PU operation mode.
1) Preparation
· Set "7" in Pr. 79 (PU operation interlock).
· Using any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (multi-function input terminal assignment), allocate the terminal used to
input X12 (PU external interlock signal).
· When the X12 signal is not assigned, the func tion of the MRS signal c hanges f rom MRS (output s top) to
PU external interlock.
2) Function
X12 (MRS)
Signal Function/Operation
ON
Output stopped during external operation.
Operation mode can be switched to PU operation mode.
Parameter values can be rewritten in PU operation
mode.
PU operation all owed.
OFF Forcibly switched to external operati on mode.
External operation all owed.
Switching t o PU operation m ode i nhi bi ted.
PARAMETERS
103
<Function/operation changed by switching on-off the X12 (MRS) signal>
Operating Condit i on
Operation
mode Status X12 (MRS)
Signal
Operation
Mode
(Note 4) Operating St at us Parameter Writ e
Switching
to PU
Operation
Mode
During stop ON → OFF
(Note 3) During stop A l l owed → disallowed Disallowed
PU During
operation ON → OFF
(Note 3)
External If external operati on
frequency s etting and s t art
signal are ent ered,
operation is perf ormed in
that status.
Allowed → disallowed Disallowed
OFF → ON Disallowed → disallowed Allowed
During stop ON → OFF During stop Disallowed → disallowed Disallowed
OFF → ON Disallowed → disallowed Disallowed → disallowed Disallowed
External During
operation ON → OFF
External During operation →
output stop Disallowed → disallowed Disallowed
Note: 1. When the Pr. 79 setting is 7 and the PU oper ation inter lock signal is O FF , network oper ation s uch
as computer link cannot be used.
2. If the X12 ( MRS) signal is on, the operation m ode cannot be switched to the PU operation m ode
when the start signal (STF, STR) is on.
3. The operation mode switches to the external operation mode independently of whether the start
signal (STF, STR) is on or off. Therefore, the motor is run in the external operation mode when
the X12 (MRS) signal is switched off with either of STF and STR on.
4. When an alarm occurs, the inverter can be reset by pressing the [RESET] key of the operation
panel.
5. When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal, switching the MRS signal on and
rewriting the Pr. 79 value to other than 7 in the PU operation mode causes the MRS signal to
provide the ordinary MRS function (output stop). Also, as soon as 7 is set in Pr. 79, the MRS
signal acts as a PU interlock signal.
6. When the MRS signal is used as the PU external inter lock signal, the signal logic confor m s to the
Pr. 17 setting. When Pr. 17 = 2, read ON for OFF and OFF for ON in the above explanation.
(4) Operation mode external signal switching function
1) Preparation
Set "8" (switching to other than external operation mode) in Pr. 79. Using any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input
terminal function selection), allocate the terminal used to input the X16 (PU-external operation switching)
signal.
2) Function
When the X16 signal is switched on in the PU operation mode, the operation mode is forcibly changed to
the external operation mode. When the X16 signal is switched off in the external operation mode, the
operation mode is changed to the PU operation mode. When the X16 signal is switched off during network
operation such as computer link, the operation mode is changed to the PU operation mode as soon as the
switch-over command to the external operation mode is sent from the computer. Note that this switch-over
may only be made while the inverter is at a stop and cannot be made during operation.
X16 Signal Operation Mode
ON External operation mode (cannot be changed to the PU operat i on mode)
OFF PU operation mode (cannot be changed to the external operati on mode)
Note: W hen ter minal as signment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions m ay be affec ted.
Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.
PARAMETERS
104
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"
Pr. 89 "speed control gain"
Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (motor constants)
Pr. 95 "online auto tuning selection"
Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection)
Related parameters
z
Motor capacity/ number of motor poles/speed control gain (Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89)
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"
Pr. 89 "speed control gain"
You can set the advanced magnetic flux vector control.
z
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Provides large starting torque and sufficient low-speed torque.
Effective for great load fluctuation.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng S etting Range Remark s
80 9999 0.4K t o 55kW, 9999 9999: V /F control
81 9999 2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16, 9999 9999: V/F control
89 100% 0 to 200.0%
If any of the following conditions is not satisfied, faults such as torque shortage and speed fluctuation may
occur. I n this case, select V/F control.
<Operating conditions>
·The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
·The motor type is the Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR 0.4kW (0.5HP) or more) or Mitsubishi constant-
torque motor (SF-JRCA 200V class 4-pole motor of 0.4kW to 45kW(0.5HP to 60HP). When any other
motor is used, offline auto tuning must be performed.)
·The number of motor poles is any of 2, 4, and 6. (4 poles only for the constant-torque motor)
·Single-motor operation (one motor for one inverter) is performed.
·The wiring length between the inverter and motor is within 30m (98.42 feet). (If the length is over 30m
(98.42 feet), perform offline auto tuning with the cables wired.)
<Setting>
(1) Advanced magnetic flux vector control
· By setting the capacity, num ber of poles and type of the m otor used in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81, the advanced
magnetic flux vector control can be selected.
Parameter
Number Setting Description
9999 V/F c ontrol
80 0.4 to 55 Set t he motor c apacity applied. Advanced magnetic flux vector control
9999 V/F c ontrol
2, 4, 6 S et the num ber of motor poles. Advanced magnetic flux vector control
81 12,14,16
V/F control is s el ected when the X18 (magnetic flux-
V/F switch-over) signal s witches on.
(This sel ection is not made during operati on.)
Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal
used for X18 signal input.
12: For 2-pole motor
14: For 4-pole motor
16: For 6-pole motor
·When using Mitsubishi's constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA), set "1" in Pr. 71. (When using the SF-JRC,
perform the offline auto tuning .)
·When using Mitsubishi's standard motor (SF-JR, 4P, 1.5kW or less), set "20" in Pr. 71.
PARAMETERS
105
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 9 "electronic overcurrent protection"
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"
Pr. 95 "online auto tuning selection"
Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation
selection"
Related parameters
Note: 1. Speed fluctuation is slightly greater than in the V/F control. (Advanced m agnetic flux vector
control m ay not be suitable for m achines which attach importance to little speed fluctuation
at low speed, e.g. grinders, lapping machines.)
2. When the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) is used between the inverter and
motor, output torque may reduce.
3. W hen the term inal functions ar e changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions m ay
be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.
· For adjustment of motor speed fluctuation due to load variation
Pr. 89 can be used to adjust motor speed fluctuation when the load varies. (When you have changed the
conventional model FR-A200E series for the FR-A500 series, advanced magnetic flux vector control is
effective when motor speed does not match.)
Speed
Load torque
z
Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96)
Pr. 82 "motor exciting current"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"
Pr. 90 "motor constant (R1)"
Pr. 91 "motor constant (R2)"
Pr. 92 "motor constant (L1)"
Pr. 93 "motor constant (L2)"
Pr. 94 "motor constant (X)"
Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status"
When you use the advanced magnetic f lux vec tor contr ol, you can perform the of f line auto tuning oper ation to
calculate motor constants automatically.
z
Off line auto tuning is m ade valid only when other values than "9999" are s et in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 to selec t
the advanced magnetic flux vector control.
z
The offline tuning data (motor constants) can be copied to another inverter with the PU (FR-DU04/
FR-PU04).
z
If the motor used is not Mitsubishi's standard motor or Mitsubishi's constant-torque motor (e.g. motor of
another company make) or the wiring distance is long, the motor can be run with the optimum operating
characteristics by using the offline auto tuning function.
z
Offline auto tuning
Automatically measures the motor constants used for advanced magnetic flux vector control.
· Off line auto tuning can be performed with the load connec ted. (As the load is smaller, tuning ac c urac y is
higher. Tuning accuracy does not change if inertia is large.)
· For the offline auto tuning, you can select either the motor non-rotation mode or rotation mode.
Note that when making selection for the online auto tuning, the motor-only rotation mode should be
selected.
· You can read, write and copy the motor constants tuned by the offline auto tuning.
· The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04).
PARAMETERS
106
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remarks
82 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
83 200V 0 to 1000V Rated motor volt age
84 60Hz 50 to 120Hz Rated motor frequenc y
90 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
91 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
92 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
93 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
94 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
96 0 0, 1, 101 0: No tuning
<Operating conditions>
· The motor is connected.
· The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (0.4kW or more)
· The maximum frequency is 120Hz.
· Special motors such as high-slip motor and high-speed motor cannot be tuned.
· When "101" (offline auto tuning with motor running) is set in Pr. 96, note the following:
1) Torque may not be enough during tuning.
2) The motor may be run at nearly its rated frequency (Pr. 84 setting) without problem.
3) The brake is open.
4) No external force is applied to rotate the motor.
· If "1" (tuning without motor running) is set in Pr. 96, the motor may run slightly. Therefore, fix the motor
securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the
motor runs.
This instruction must be followed especially for vertical lift applications.
Note that if the motor runs slightly , tuning performance is unaffected.
Note: Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed when the reactor or surge
voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) is connected between the inverter and motor.
Remove it before starting tuning.
<Setting>
(1) Parameter setting
· Using Pr. 80 and Pr. 81, select the advanced magnetic flux vector control.
· Refer to the parameter details list and set the following parameters:
1) Set "1" or "101" in Pr. 96.
· For setting of "1" ................................................................................Tuning without motor running.
· For setting of "101" ............................................................................Tuning with motor running.
2) Set the rated motor current (A) in Pr. 9.
3) Set the rated motor voltage (V) in Pr. 83.
4) Set the rated motor frequency (Hz) in Pr. 84.
5) Select the motor using Pr. 71.
· Standard motor..................................................................................Pr. 71 = "3"
· Constant-torque motor.......................................................................Pr. 71 = "13"
· Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4 poles (1.5kW (2HP) or less)......Pr. 71 = "23"
Note: Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 are only displayed when the advanced magnetic flux vector control is
selected (Pr. 80, Pr. 81).
In these parameters, set the values given on the motor plate. When the standard motor has
more than one rated value, set 200V/60Hz or 400V/60Hz.
PARAMETERS
107
Parameter details
Parameter
Number Setting Description
9 0 to 500A Set the rat ed motor c urrent (A).
0Electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics suitable for general-purpose
motor
1Electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics suitable for Mitsubishi's
const ant -torque mot or
2Electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics suitable for general-purpose
motor
5-point fl exible V/F charact eri s tics
20 Mitsubishi's SF-JR4P general-purpose motor (1.5kW (2HP) or less), Electronic
overcurrent protection thermal characteristics for advanced magnetic flux vector
control
3 Standard motor
13 Constant -torque mot or
23 Mitsubis hi ' s SF-JR4P standard m otor
(1.5kW (2HP) or less )
Select " offline aut o tuning sett i ng"
4 Standard motor
14 Constant -torque mot or
24 Mitsubis hi ' s SF-JR4P standard m otor
(1.5kW (2HP) or less )
Auto tuni ng read or change sett i ng
enabled
5 Standard motor
15 Constant -torque mot or Star c onnection
6 Standard motor
16 Constant -torque mot or Delta c onnection
Direct i nput of
mot or c onstants
enabled
7 Standard motor
17 Constant -torque mot or Star c onnection
8 Standard motor
71 (Note 1)
18 Constant -torque mot or Delta c onnection
Direct i nput of
mot or c onstants
and offli ne aut o
tuning
83 0 to 1000V Set t he rated motor vol tage (V).
84 50 to 120Hz Set the rat ed motor f requency (Hz).
90 0 to , 9999
91 0 to , 9999
92 0 to , 9999
93 0 to , 9999
9999
94 0 to 100%
Tuning data
(Values measured by offline auto t uni ng are s et autom at i cally.)
0 Offl i ne auto tuning is not performed.
1 Offl i ne auto tuning is performed without motor running.96 (Note 2) 101 Offli ne aut o tuning is perf ormed with m ot or runni ng.
Note: 1. The electronic overcurrent protection characteristics are also selected simultaneously.
2. Select "101" to increase tuning accuracy.
(2) Tuning execution
· For PU operation, press the [FWD] or [REV] key.
· For external operation, switch on the run command.
Note: 1. When "101" is set in Pr. 96, guard against hazards because the motor rotates.
2. To force tuning to end
· Switch on the MRS or RES signal or press the [STOP] key to end.
· Switch off the tuning start command or make a forced stop.
3. During offline auto tuning, the following I/O signals are only valid:
· Input signals
STOP, OH, MRS, RT, CS, RES, STF, STR
· Output signals
RUN, OL, IPF, FM, AM, A, B, C
4. Special caution should be exercised when a sequence has been designed to open the
mechanical brake with the RUN signal.
PARAMETERS
108
(3) Monitoring the offline tuning status
When the parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used, the Pr. 96 value is displayed during tuning on the main
monitor as shown below. When the operation panel (FR -DU04) is used, only the s ame numeric al value as
on the PU is displayed:
· Parameter unit (FR-PU04 ) main monitor
(For inverter trip)
1. Setti n g 2. Tuning in
progress 3. Completion 4. E rror-activated end
STOP PU
1FWD PU
2
STF
TUNE
STOP PU
3
STF
TUNE
COMPLETION
Display
STOP PU
101 FWD PU
102
STF
TUNE
STOP PU
103
STF
TUNE
COMPLETION
STOP PU
9
STF
TUNE
ERROR
· Operation panel (FR-DU04) display
(For inverter trip)
1. Setti n g 2. Tuning in
progress 3. Completion 4. E rror-activated end
12 3
Displayed
value 101 102 103 9
· Reference: Offline auto tuning time (factory setting)
Offline Auto Tuning Setting Time
1: No-rotati on mode A pproximately 25 seconds
2: Rotati on mode
Approximat el y 40 seconds
(Offli ne auto tuning t ime vari es with accel eration and decel eration tim e setti ngs as
indicat ed bel ow:
Offli ne aut o tuning time = accel erat i on time + deceleration t i me + approximately 30
seconds)
(4) Ending the offline auto tuning
1) Confirm the Pr. 96 value.
· Normal end: "3" or "103" is displayed.
· Error-activated end: "9", "91", "92" or "93" is displayed.
· Forced end ... "8" is displayed.
2) When tuning ended normally.
For PU operation, press the [STOP] key. For external operation, switch off the start signal (STF or STR).
This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the ordinary indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be done.)
3) When tuning was ended due to an error.
Offline auto tuning did not end normally. (Motor constants have not been set.) Reset the inverter and start
tuning all over again.
4) Error display definitions.
Error Display Error Cause Remedy
9 Inverter tri p Re-set.
91 Current limit (s t al l prevention) funct i on was
activated. Increas e acceleration/decelerati on time.
Set "1" i n P r. 156.
92 Inverter output voltage reached 75% of rated
value. Check for fluc tuation of power supply voltage.
93 Cal culation error Check the motor wiring and re-set.
No connection with motor will result in 93 error.
PARAMETERS
109
5) When tuning was forced to end
A forced end occurs when tuning is forced to end by pressing the [STOP] key or turning off the start signal
(STF or STR) during tuning.
In this case, offline auto tuning was not brought to a normal end. (The motor constants are not yet set.)
Reset the inverter and restart tuning.
Note: 1. The m otor c onstants m easured onc e in the off line auto tuning are stor ed as par am eters and their
data is held until the offline auto tuning is performed again.
2. An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is
restored, the inverter goes into the ordinary operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) is on,
the motor runs in forward (reverse) rotation.
3. When "8888" is set in Pr. 11, the tuning is forced to end and the DC dynamic brake is started
upon input of the MRS signal.
4. Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode.
Note that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored.
5. The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
CAUTION
Note that t he motor may st art running suddenly.
W hen the offline auto tuning is used in vertical lift application, e.g. a lifter, it may drop due to
insufficient torque.
<Setting the motor constants as desired>
The m otor c onstants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) m ay be set as desired in either of two ways; the data m easured
in the offline auto tuning is read and utilized or changed, or the motor constants are set without the
offline
auto tuning data being used.
To utilize or change the offline auto tuning data
<Operating procedure>
1. Set "801" in Pr. 77. Only when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than "9999", the parameter
values of the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can be displayed. Though the parameter values of
other than the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can also be displayed, they are parameters for
manufacturer setting and should be handled carefully without misuse.
2. Set any of the following values in Pr. 71:
· Standard motor...................................................................................... Pr. 71 = "4"
· Constant-torque motor........................................................................... Pr. 71 = "14"
· Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4 poles (1.5kW (2HP) or less).......... Pr. 71 = "24"
3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values. (Note 1)
Parameter
Number Name Setting Range Setting
Increments Factory
Setting
82 Motor exciting current 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999
90 Motor constant R1 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999
91 Motor constant R2 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999
92 Motor const ant L1 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999
93 Motor const ant L2 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999
94 Motor const ant X 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999
4. Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value.
PARAMETERS
110
Note: 1. Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 values may only be read when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than
"9999" (advanced magnetic flux vector control selected).
2. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 to use the standard motor constants (including those for the
constant-torque motor).
3. Set "3" (standard motor), "13" (constant-torque motor) or "23" (Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR
4P (1.5kW (2HP) or less)) in Pr. 71 to use the constants measured in the offline auto tuning. Set
"4, 14 or 24" in Pr. 71 and change the motor constants to change the values measured in the
offline auto tuning.
4. As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data
(****), refer to the following setting example when making setting:
Setting example: To slightly increase Pr. 90 value
When Pr. 90 is displayed "2516", set 2642, i.e. 2516×1.05=2641.8, in Pr. 90.
(The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Hence, simple addition of a
given value to the displayed value has no significance.)
To set the motor constants without using the offline auto tuning data
The Pr. 92 and Pr. 93 motor constants may either be entered in [Ω] or in [mH]. Before starting
operation, confirm which motor constant unit is used.
z
To enter the Pr. 92 and Pr. 93 motor constants in [Ω]
<Operating procedure>
1. Set "801" in Pr. 77. Only when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than "9999", the par ameter
values of the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can be displayed. Though the param eter values
of other than the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can also be displayed, they are parameters
for manufacturer setting and should be handled carefully without misuse.
2. Set any of the following values in Pr. 71:
Star Connection Motor Delta Connect i on Mot or
Standard motor 5 6
Setting Constant-torque motor 15 16
3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values:
Parameter
Number Name S etting Range Setting
Increments Factory
Setting
90 Motor constant R1 0 to 10Ω, 9999 0.001Ω9999
91 Motor constant R2 0 to 10Ω, 9999 0.001Ω9999
92 Motor const ant X1 0 to 10Ω, 9999 0.001Ω9999
93 Motor const ant X2 0 to 10Ω, 9999 0.001Ω9999
94 Motor const ant X 0 to 500Ω, 9999 0.01Ω9999
4. Refer to the following table and set Pr. 84:
Parameter
Number Name S etting Range Setting
Increments Factory
Setting
84 Rated motor frequency 50 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉
5. Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value.
Note: 1. Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 values may only be read when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other
than "9999" (advanced magnetic flux vector control selected).
2. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 to use the s tandar d motor c ons tants (inc luding those for the
constant-torque motor).
3. If "star connection" is mistaken for "delta connection" or vice versa during setting of Pr.
71, advanced magnetic flux vector control cannot be exercised normally.
PARAMETERS
111
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"
Pr. 89 "speed control gain"
Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (motor constants)
Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status"
Related parameters
z
To enter the Pr. 92 and Pr. 93 motor constants in [mH]
<Operating procedure>
1. Set "801" in Pr. 77. Only when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than "9999", the parameter
values of the motor cons tants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can be dis played. Though the param eter (Pr. 82 to
Pr. 99) values of other than the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can also be displayed, they are
parameters for manufacturer setting and should be handled carefully without misuse.
2. Set any of the following values in Pr. 71:
· Standard motor...................................................................................... Pr. 71 = "0"
· Constant-torque motor........................................................................... Pr. 71 = "1"
· Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4 poles (1.5kW (2HP) or less).......... Pr. 71 = "20"
3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values:
Parameter
Number Name Sett i ng Range Setting
Increments Factory
Setting
90 Motor constant R1 0 to 50Ω, 9999 0.001Ω9999
91 Motor constant R2 0 to 50Ω, 9999 0.001Ω9999
92 Motor constant L1 0 to 1000mH, 9999 0.1mH 9999
93 Motor constant L2 0 to 1000mH, 9999 0.1mH 9999
94 Motor constant X 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999
4. Refer to the following table and set Pr. 84:
Parameter
Number Name Sett i ng Range Setting
Increments Factory
Setting
84 Rated mot or frequency 50 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉
5. Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value.
Note: 1. Pr.90 to Pr. 94 values may only be read when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than
"9999" (advanced magnetic flux vector control selected).
2. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 to use the standard motor constants (including those for the
constant-torque motor).
Pr. 89
Î
Refer to Pr. 80.
z
Online auto tuning selection (Pr. 95)
Pr. 95 "online auto tuning selection"
By online auto tuning, the motor conditions are tuned rapidly at the start. This enables precise operation
unaffected by motor temperatures and steady high-torque operation down to super-low speed. After setting
the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 values, select online auto tuning with Pr. 95.
z
Online auto tuning
Use this function when steady high-torque operation is required for low-speed operation under advanced
magnetic flux vector control.
· Before starting the online auto tuning, perform the offline auto tuning. Data must be calculated.
PARAMETERS
112
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng S etting Range Remarks
95 0 0, 1 1: Online aut o t uni ng
<Operating conditions>
· Data required for online auto tuning is calculated in offline auto tuning. Before starting the operation of
this function, always execute the of fline auto tuning once more. The offline auto tuning is also required
for use of the Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR) or constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA).
· Offline auto tuning should be carried out with "101" (motor running) set in Pr. 96 and with the motor
disconnected from the load. (The motor may be connected with inertia load.)
<Operating procedure>
1) Read the Pr. 96 value and make sure that its setting is "3 or 103" (offline auto tuning complete).
2) Set "1" in Pr. 95 to select the online auto tuning.
3) Before starting operation, make sure that the following parameter values have been set:
Parameter
Number Description
9(Used as either the rated motor current or el ec tronic overcurrent protecti on parameter)
71 Applied motor
80 Motor capacity (down to one rank lower, between 0.4kW and 55k W)
81 Number of motor poles
4) Give the run command in the PU or external operation mode.
Note: 1. If any of the inverter starting conditions are not satisfied, e.g. when MRS is input, if the set
frequency is lower than the starting frequency (Pr. 13) value, or during an inverter error, the
online auto tuning is not activated.
2. For a restart during deceleration or DC dynamic brake operation, the online auto tuning is not
activated.
3. The online auto tuning is invalid for programmed operation or jog operation.
4. W hen automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, it overrides the online
auto tuning.
5. For use in vertical lift application, examine the use of a brake sequence for brake opening
timing at the start. Though the tuning ends in about a maximum of 500ms after a start,
enough torque is not provided dur ing that period. Theref ore, note that the load may drop with
gravity.
6. Zero current detection and output current detection are also valid during the online auto
tuning.
7. The RUN s ignal is not output during the online auto tuning. The RUN s ignal switches on at a
start.
8. W hen pr ogram med oper ation is selected ( Pr. 79 = 5), the online auto tuning is invalid and is
not executed.
9. If the period between inverter stop and restart is within 4 seconds, the online auto tuning is
executed but operation will not reflect the tuning results.
Pr. 96
Î
Refer to Pr. 82.
PARAMETERS
113
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 47 "second V/F (base frequency)"
Pr. 60 "intelligent mode selection"
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 113 "third V/F (base frequency)"
Related parameters
z
V/F control frequency (voltage) (Pr. 100 to Pr. 109)
Pr. 100 "V/F1 (first frequency)"
Pr. 101 "V/F1 (first frequency voltage)"
Pr. 102 "V/F2 (second frequency)"
Pr. 103 "V/F2 (second frequency voltage)"
Pr. 104 "V/F3 (third frequency)"
Pr. 105 "V/F3 (third frequency voltage)"
Pr. 106 "V/F4 (fourth frequency)"
Pr. 107 "V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage)"
Pr. 108 "V/F5 (fifth frequency)"
Pr. 109 "V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage)"
You can make a dedicated V/F pattern by using V/F (frequency Voltage/Frequency) control to set V/F
characteristics from the start to the basic frequency and basic voltage as desired.
z
Desired V/F characteristics can be set by presetting V/F1 (first frequency voltage/first frequency), V/F2,
V/F3, V/F4 and V/F5 in the corresponding parameters.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remarks
100 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999
101 0 0 to 1000V
102 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999
103 0 0 to 1000V
104 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999
105 0 0 to 1000V
106 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999
107 0 0 to 1000V
108 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999
109 0 0 to 1000V
Set "2" i n P r. 71 and a value
other than 9999 in P r. 19.
These func t i ons are not
activated when any of "1 to
8" is set in Pr. 60.
0
V/F5
V/F4
V/F3
V/F2
V/F1
Voltage
Base frequency voltage
(Pr. 19)
Boost value
(Pr. 0)
V/F characteristic Bas e f requency
(Pr. 3)
Frequency
<Setting>
(1) Confirm the settings of Pr. 19, Pr. 60 and Pr. 71.
Param eter Number Descrip t ion
19 Set the rated mot or vol t age.
This function is not activated i f i ts value is " 9999" and "8888" (fact ory setting).
60 Set "0" (ordinary operation mode).
71 Set "2" (V /F 5-point f l exible characteristic).
PARAMETERS
114
(2) Set the desired frequencies and voltages in Pr. 100 to Pr. 109.
· The setting must satisfy the following relationship: F1≠F2≠F3≠F4≠F5≠Pr. 19 "base frequency".
If the set frequencies are the same, a write error occurs.
If any frequency setting is "9999", its point is ignored.
Note: 1. The V/F 5-point flexible characteristic functions for V/F control only. It does not function for
advanced magnetic flux vector control.
2. The V/F 5-point flexible characteristic does not function when Pr. 60 is selected.
3. The frequency voltage setting should be equal to or less than the Pr. 3 and Pr. 19 settings.
4. Pr. 19 must be set. (When Pr. 19 = "9999", Pr. 71 cannot be set to "2" (5-point flexible V/F
characteristic).)
5. If "2" is set in Pr. 71, Pr. 47 and Pr. 113 do not function.
6. When "2" is set in Pr. 71, the electronic overcurrent protection is calculated for a standard motor.
Pr. 110, Pr. 111
Î
Refer to Pr. 7.
Pr. 112
Î
Refer to Pr. 0.
Pr. 113
Î
Refer to Pr. 3.
Pr. 114, Pr. 115
Î
Refer to Pr. 48.
Pr. 116
Î
Refer to Pr.
42.
z
Computer link operati on (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)
Pr. 117 "station number"
Pr. 118 "communication speed"
Pr. 119 "stop bit length/data length"
Pr. 120 "parity check presence/absence"
Pr. 121 "number of communication retries"
Pr. 122 "communication check time interval"
Pr. 123 "waiting time setting"
Pr. 124 "CR, LF presence/absence selection"
Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and personal computer.
Using the inverter setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP-WE (or -W J for Japanese version)), parameter setting,
monitoring, etc. can be done efficiently.
z
The motor can be run from the PU connector of the inverter using RS-485 communication.
Communication specifications
Conform i ng s tandard RS-485
Number of i nverters connected 1:N (m aximum 32 i nverters)
Communicat i on s peed Selected between 19200, 9600 and 4800bps
Control protoc ol Asynchronous
Communicat i on method Hal f-duplex
Character s ys t em ASCI I (7 bits/ 8 bi ts) selectable
Stop bit l ength Selectable between 1 bit and 2 bits.
Terminator CR/LF (presenc e/ absence selectable)
Parity c hec k Selected between presence (even/ odd) or absence
Check system Sumcheck Present
Communication
specifications
Waiting time s etting Selectabl e between presence or absence
PARAMETERS
115
z
For the data codes of the parameters, refer to the data code list in the appendices.
Parameter
Number Factory
Setting Setting Range
117 0 0 to 31
118 192 48, 96, 192
Data length 8 0, 1
119 1 Data length 7 10, 11
120 2 0, 1, 2
121 1 0 to 10, 9999
122 0 <9999> 0 to 999.8 s ec, 999
123 9999 0 t o 150ms, 9999
124 1 0, 1, 2
<Setting>
To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, the communication specifications
mus t be set to the inverter initially. If initial setting is not m ade or there is a setting f ault, data transfer c annot
be made.
Note: After m ak ing the initial setting of the param eters , always reset the inver ter. After you have changed the
communication-related parameters, communication cannot be made if the inverter is not reset.
Parameter
Number Name Setting Description
117 Station
number 0 t o 31 Stat i on number spec i fied for communi cation from the PU c onnector.
Set the inverter stati on numbers when two or m ore inverters are connec ted to one
personal computer.
48 4800 baud
96 9600 baud
118 Communi-
cation
speed 192 19200 baud
0 Stop bit l engt h 1 bi t
8 bits 1 Stop bit l ength 2 bits
10 S t op bi t length 1 bit
119 Stop bit
length/data
length 7 bit s 11 Stop bit length 2 bi ts
0 Absent
1 Odd parity present
120 Parity check
presence/
absence 2 Even parity pres ent
0 to 10 Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of data receive error. If the
number of consec utive errors exceeds the permiss ible value, t he inverter will com e
to an alarm stop.
121 Number of
communica-
tion retries 9999
(65535)
If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not come to an alarm stop. At this
tim e, t he inverter can be coasted to a s t op by MRS or RESET input.
During an error, the light fault signal (LF) is given to the open collector output.
Allocate the used terminal with any of Pr. 190 to P r. 195 (output term inal function
selection).
0 No communication
0.1 to 999.8 S et the communication check time [sec] interval .
122
Communi-
cation
check time
interval 9999 If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time, the
inverter will come to an alarm stop.
0 to 150m s Set the waiting time between data transmiss i on to the inverter and response.
123 Waiting
time setting 9999 Set with com munication data.
0 Wit hout CR/LF
1With CR
124
CR, LF
presence/
absence
selection 2 Wi t h CR/LF
PARAMETERS
116
<Computer programming>
(1) Communication protocol
Data communication between the computer and inverter is performed using the following procedure:
*1
*2
Computer
Inverter
↓ (Data flow)
Computer
↓ (Data flow)
Inverter
Data read
Data write
Time
1)
2) 3)
4)
5)
*1. If a data error is detected and a retry must be m ade, execute retry operation from the user program.
The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter
setting.
*2. On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns “reply data 3” to the computer again. The
inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the
parameter setting.
(2) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types
Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:
No. Operation Run
Command Running
Frequency Parameter
Write Inverter Reset Monitoring Parameter
Read
1) Communicat i on reques t is sent to the
inverter in ac cordance with the user
program. A’ A A A B B
2) Inverter data process i ng time Present Present Present Abs ent Pres ent P resent
No error
Request ac c epted C C C Absent E
E’ E
3) Reply data from the
inverter
(Data 1 is checked for
error) W ith error
request rejected D D D Absent F F
4) Com put er processing del ay time Abs ent A bs ent A bsent Absent G G
No error
No process i ng Absent Absent Absent Absent G G
5)
Answer from
com put er i n response
to reply data 3
(Data 3 is c hecked for
error) With error dat a
3 is output Absent Absent Absent Absent H H
(3) Data format
Hexadecimal data is used. Data is automatically transferred in ASCII between the computer and inverter.
1) Data format types
(1) Communication request data from computer to inverter
*3
ENQ *4
123456789101112
13
*3
ENQ *4
1234567891011
*3
ENQ *4
123456789
[Data format]
Format A
[Data read]
Format A'
Format B
Inverter
station
number
Instruction
code
*5
Waiting
time
Data
Sum
sheck
Inverter
station
number
Inverter
station
number
Instruction
code
Instruction
code
*5
Waiting
time
*5
Waiting
time
Data
Sum
sheck
Sum
sheck
←Number of characters
←Number of characters
←Number of characters
PARAMETERS
117
Note: 1. The inverter station numbers may be set between H00 and H1F (stations 0 and 31) in
hexadecimal.
2. *3 indicates the control code.
3. *4 indicates the CR or LF code.
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return)
and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. In
this case, setting must also be made from the inverter according to the computer.
Also, the presence and absence of the CR and LF codes can be selected using Pr. 124.
4. *5: When Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" ≠ 9999, create the communication request data
with no "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
2) Send data from computer to inverter during data write
*3
ACK *4
1234
*3
NAK
1234
*4
5
[
No data error detected] [Data error detected]
Format C Format D
Inverter
station
number
Inverter
station
number Error
code
←Number of character
s
←Nu mber of characters
3) Reply data from inverter to computer during data read
123 4 5
1234567891011
[No data error detected]
123456789
*3
STX
Format E
Inverter
station
number
Read
data
Sum
check
←Number of characters
Format E'
*3
ETX *4Read data
Inverter
station
number
Sum
check *4
*3
ETX
*3
STX
[Data error detected]
Format F
*3
NAK Error
code *4
Inverter
station
number
4) Reply data from computer to inverter during data read
1234 123 4
[No data error detected]
*3
ACK
Format G Inverter
station
number
←Number of characters
Format H
*4 *3
NAK
[Data error detected]
*4
Inverter
station
number
←Number of character
s
(4) Data definitions
1) Control codes
Signal ASCII Code Desc ri ption
STX H02 Start of Text (Start of data)
ETX H03 End of Text (End of data)
ENQ H05 Enquiry (Communication request)
ACK H06 Acknowledge (No data error det ected)
LF H0A Line Feed
CR H0D Carriage Return
NAK H15 Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)
2) Inverter station number
Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
3) Instruction code
Specify the processing request (e.g. operation, monitoring) given by the computer to the inverter. Hence,
the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate.
4) Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions
and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to Appendix 1.)
PARAMETERS
118
5) Waiting time
Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter form the computer and the transmission
of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and
150ms in 10ms increments (e.g. 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).
Computer
↓
Inverter
Inverter
↓
Computer
Inverter data processing time
=waiting time + data check time
(set value×10ms) (12ms)
6) Sum check code
The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum
(binary) derived from the checked ASCII data.
1
01E1 07ADF4
H05 H30 H31 H31H45 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34
(Example1)
Computer→Inverter
ASCII code→
Station
number Instruction
code
*Waiting
time
Data Sum check
code
←Binary code
Sum
↓
30 + 31 + 45 + 31 + 31 + 30 + 37 + 41 + 44
=1F4
HHHHHHHHH
H
0117 0 30
H02 H30 H31 H37H31 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
7
(Example2)
Inverter→Computer
ASCII code→←Binary code
Sum check
code
STX Station
number Read data ETX
Sum
↓
30 + 31 + 31 + 37 + 37 + 30
=130
HHHHHH
H
ENQ
*When Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" ≠‚ 9999, create the communication request data with no "waiting time" in the data format.
(The number of characters is decr ease d by 1. )
7) Error co de
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to the computer together
with the NAK code.
Note: 1. When the data from the computer has an error, the inverter will not accept that data.
2. Any data communication, e.g. run command, monitoring, is started when the computer
gives a communication request. Without the computer's command, the inverter does not
return any data. For monitoring, therefore, design the program to cause the computer to
provide a data read request as required.
3. Data for link parameter expansion setting differs as indicated below between access to
Pr. 0 to Pr. 99 values and access to Pr. 100 to Pr. 905:
Instruction
Code Data
Read H7F H00: P r. 0 to Pr. 99 values are access i bl e.
Link parameter
expansion setti ng Write HFF
H00: Pr. 0 to Pr. 99 values are access i bl e.
H01: Pr. 100 t o Pr. 159, P r. 200 t o Pr. 231 and Pr. 900 t o
Pr. 905 values are access i bl e.
H02: Pr. 160 to Pr. 199 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 285 values are
accessible.
H03: Pr. 300 to Pr. 399 values are access i bl e.
H09: Pr. 990 val ue i s acces sible.
PARAMETERS
119
Instructions for the program
(1) When the operation mode is switched to communication operation.
(2) Since any data communication, such as operation command or monitoring, is always requested by the
computer, the inverter will not return data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so
that the computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.
(3) Program example
When the operation mode is switched to communication operation
10 OPEN "COM1: 9600, E, 8, 2, HD" AS#1
20 COMST1, 1, 1: COMST1, 2, 1
30 ON COM (1) GOSUB*REC
40 COM (1) ON
50 D$= "01FB10002"
60 S=0
70 FOR I=1 TO LEN (D$)
80 A$=MID$ (D$, I, 1)
90 A=ASC (A$)
100 S=S+A
110 NEXTI
120 D$=CHR$ (&H5) +D$+RIGHT$ (HEX$ (S) , 2)
130 PRINT#1, D$
140 GOTO 50
1000 *REC
1010 IF LOC (1)= 0 THEN RET U RN
1020 PRINT "RECE IVE DATA "
1030 PRINT INPUT$ (LOC (1) , #1)
1040 RETUR N
Initial setting of I/O file
: Communication file
opening
: Circuit control signal
(RS, ER) ON/OFF setting
: Interrupt definition at
data receive
: Interrupt enable
Transmission data setting
Sum c ode calculati on
: Addition of control and
sum codes
Data transmission
Interrupt data receive
: Interrupt occurrence at
data receive
Receive data pro cessing
{
Data import
{
Screen display
General flowchart
Line number
10
40
50
140
Input file
initial setting
Transmission data
processing
{
Data setting
{
Sum c ode calculati on
{
Data transmission
Interrupt
1000
1040
CAUTION
When the inverter's communication check time interval is not set, interlocks are provided to
disable operation to prevent hazard. Always set the communication check time interval
before starting operation.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only when the computer
provides a communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to
signal cable breakage etc, the invert er cannot be st opped. When the communication check
time interval has elapsed, the inver ter will come to an alarm st op ( E. PUE) .
The inverter can be coast ed t o a st op by switching on its RES signal or by switching power
off.
If communication is halted due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter
does not detect such a fault . This should be fully noted.
PARAMETERS
120
<Setting items and set data>
After completion of parameter setting, set the instruction codes and data and start communication from
the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
No. Item Instruction
Code Description Number of
Data Digits
Read H7B H0000: Communication option operation
H0001: External operati on
H0002: Com municat i on operation (PU connec tor)
1Operation
mode Write HFB H0000: Communicat i on opt i on operation
H0001: External operati on
H0002: Com municat i on operation (PU connec tor)
4 digits
Output frequency
[speed] H6F
H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency (hexadecimal) in 0.01Hz
increments
[Speed (hexadecimal) in 1r/min increments if Pr. 37 = 1 to
9998 or Pr. 144 = 2 to 10, 102 to 110.]
4 digits
Output current H70 H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.1A
increments 4 digits
Output volt age H71 H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V
increments 4 digits
Special monitor H72 H0000 to HFFFF: Monitored data s elected by inst ruct ion c ode
HF3 4 digits
H01 to H0E Monit or selecti on dat a
Data Description Incre-
ments Data Description Incre-
ments
H01 Output
frequency 0.01Hz H09 Regenerative
brake 0.1%
Read H73
H02 Output current 0.01A H0A
Electronic
overcurrent
protection load
factor
0.1%
H03 Output voltage 0.1V H0B Output current
peak value 0.01A
H05 Frequency
setting 0.01Hz H0C Converter output
voltage peak value 0.1V
H06 Running speed r/min H0D Input power 0.01kW
H07 Motor torque 0.1% H0E Output power 0.01kW
Special monitor
selection No.
Write HF3
2 digits
H0000 to HFFFF: Two most recent alarm def initions
Read data : [Example ] H30A0
Most recent alarm
(
HA0
)
b15 b8b7 b0
001100 0 0 00000011
(Previou s ala rm ........ THT)
(Most recent alarm ..... OPT)
Previous alarm
(
H30
)
Alarm data
Data Description Data Description Data Description
H00 No alarm H51 UVT HB1 PUE
H10 0C1 H60 OLT HB2 RET
H11 0C2 H70 BE HC1 CTE
H12 0C3 H80 GF HC2 P24
H20 0V1 H81 LF HD5 MB1
H21 0V2 H90 OHT HD6 MB2
H22 0V3 HA0 OPT HD7 MB3
H30 THT HA1 OP1 HD8 MB4
H31 THM HA2 OP2 HD9 MB5
H40 FIN HA3 OP3 HDA MB6
H50 IPF HB0 PE HDB MB7
2
Monitoring
Alarm definition H74 to H77 2 digits
PARAMETERS
121
No. Item Instruction
Code Description Number
of Data
Digits
3 Run command HFA
b0:
b1: Forward rotation (STF)
b2: Reverse rotation (STR)
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
H00 to HFF: Run command
000000 01
b7 b0
[Example 1] H02
... Forward rotation
[Example 2] H00
... Stop
(For example 1) 2 digits
4Inverter s tatus
monitor H7A
b0: Inverter running (RUN) *
b1: Forward rotation (STF)
b2: Reverse rotation (STR)
b3: Up to frequency (SU) *
b4: Overload (OL) *
b5: Instantaneous power
failure (IPF) *
b6: Frequency detection (FU) *
b7: Alarm occurrence *
H00 to HFF: Inverter status monitor
000000 01
b7
[Example 1] H02
... During forward rotation
[Example 2] H80
... Stop due to alarm
(For example 1)
*The output data depends on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 settings.
2 digits
5Running frequency
write
(E2PROM) HEE H0000 to H9C40: 0.01Hz increment s (hexadecimal )
(0 ≠ 400.00 Hz)
To change the running frequency consecutively, write data to the
inverter RAM. (Instruc tion code: HED) 4 digits
6 Inverter reset HFD H9696: Resets the inverter.
As the inverter is reset on s tart of com munic ation by the com puter, the
inverter cannot send reply data back to the c omputer. 4 digi ts
All parameters return to the factory settings.
Any of four different clear operations is performed according to the data.
Pr.
Data
Communi-
cation Pr. Calibration Other Pr. HEC
HF3
HFF
H9696
{
×
{{
H9966
{{{{
H5A5A ××
{{
H55AA ×
{{{
7 All clear HFC
When all parameter clear i s executed for H9696 or H9966,
com municat i on-rel ated paramet er settings al so return to the factory
setti ngs. When resuming operati on, set the parameters agai n.
4 digits
H9669: User c l ear i s made.
Communi-
cation Pr. Calibration Other Pr. HEC
HFC
HFF
{
×
{{
8 User clear HFC 4 digits
9 Paramet er write H80 t o HE 3
10 P arameter read H00 to H63
Refer to the data list (A ppendi x 1) and write and/or read parameter
values as requi red.
Note that some parameters may not be accessibl e. 4 digits
Read H7F
11
Link
parameter
expansion
setting Write HFF
H00 to H6C and H80 to HE C parameter values are changed.
H00: Pr. 0 to Pr. 99 values are access i bl e.
H01: Pr. 100 to Pr. 159 , P r. 200 to Pr. 231 and P r. 900 to Pr. 905
values are accessibl e.
H02: Pr. 160 to Pr. 199 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 285 values are access i bl e.
H03: Pr. 300 to Pr. 399 values are access i bl e.
H09: Pr. 990 val ue i s acces sible.
2 digits
Read H6C
When settin
g
the pro
g
rammed operation
(data code H3D to H5A, H8D to HAD)
parameter
H00: Tim e
H01: Tim e
H02: Rotati on di rection
633B
Time (Min.) Min. (Sec.)
12
Second
parameter
changing
(Code
FF = 1) Write HEC
When sett i ng the bias/gai n (data code H5E to H6A , HDE to HED)
parameter
H00: Offset/gain
H01: Analog
H02: Analog value of term i nal
2 digits
PARAMETERS
122
<Error code List>
The corresponding error code in the following list is displayed if an error is detected in any communication
request data form the computer.
Error
Code Item Definiti on Inverter Operation
H0 Computer NAK error The number of errors consecutively detected in communication
request data from the computer is greater than allowed number
of retry times.
H1 Parity error The parity chec k result does not m atch the s pecified pari t y.
H2 Sum check error The sum chec k code in t he com puter does not matc h that of the
data received by the inverter.
H3 Protocol error Data received by the inverter is in the wrong protocol, data
receive is not com pleted within t he given tim e, or CR and LF are
not as s et i n the paramet er.
H4 Framing error The stop bi t length is not as speci fied.
H5 Overrun error New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter
com pl et es receiving t he prec edi ng data.
Brought to an al arm stop
(E.OPT) if error occurs
continuously more than
the allowable number of
retry times.
H6
H7 Character error The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F,
control code).
Does not accept receive
data but is not brought to
alarm stop.
H8
H9
HA Mode error Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link
operation mode or during inverter operati on.
HB Instruction code
error The specified command does not exist.
HC Data range error Invalid data has been specified for parameter write, frequency
setti ng, etc.
Does not accept or
receive data but is not
brought to alarm stop.
HD
HE
HF
PARAMETERS
123
(5) Communication specifications for RS-485 communication
Operation Mode
Operation Locat i on Item Communication
Operation from PU
Connector
External
Operation Computer Link Operat i on
(inboard option us ed)
Run com mand (start) Enable Disable Disable
Running frequency s etting E nabl e Enable
(Combined
mode) Disable
Monitoring Enable Enable Enable
Parameter write Enable (*4) Disable (*4) Disable (*4)
Parameter read Enabl e Enable Enable
Inverter reset Enable Enable Enable
Comput er user program via
PU connector
Stop comm and (*3) Enable Enable Enable
Run com mand Disable Disable E nabl e (*1)
Running frequency s etting Disabl e Dis abl e Enable (*1)
Monitoring Enable Enable Enable
Parameter write Disable (*4) Disable (*4) Enable (*4)
Parameter read Enabl e Enable Enable
Inverter reset Disable Disable Enable
Comput er user program via
inboard option
Stop comm and (*3) Enable Enable Enable
Inverter reset Enable Enable Enable
Run com mand Disable Enable Enable (*1)Control ci rcuit terminal Running frequenc y setting Disable Enable Enable (*1)
(*1) As set in the operation and speed command write parameters.
(*2) At occurrence of RS-485 communication fault, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer.
(*3) As set in Pr. 75.
(*4) As set in Pr. 77.
(6) Operation at alarm occurrence
Operation Mode
Fault Locat i on Descript i on Communication
Operation
(PU connec tor) External Operation Computer link Operation
(inboard option us ed)
Inverter operat i on Stop Stop Stop
PU connector Continued Continued ContinuedInverter f aul t Communication I nboard option Continued Continued Continued
Inverter operati on St op/continued (*5) Conti nued Cont i nued
PU connector Stop St op S top
Communication
error
(Communication
from PU connector) Communication Inboard opt i on Continued Continued Cont i nued
Inverter operati on Continued Continued Stop/c ontinued (*6)
PU connector Continued Continued Continued
Communication
error
(Inboard option) Communication I nboard option Stop Stop S t op
(*5) Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to continue)
(*6) Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to stop)
(7) Communication error
Fault Locat i on Error Message
Communicat i on error
(Communicat i on f rom PU connector) E.PUE
Communicat i on error
(Inboard option) E.OP1 to E.OP3
PARAMETERS
124
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal assignment)
Pr. 191 to Pr. 194
(output terminal assignment)
Pr. 902 to Pr. 905
(frequency setting voltage
(current) biases and gains)
Related parameters
z
PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)
Pr. 128 "PID action selection"
Pr. 129 "PID proportional band"
Pr. 130 "PID integral time"
Pr. 131 "upper limit"
Pr. 132 "lower limit"
Pr. 133 "PID action set point for PU operation"
Pr. 134 "PID differential time"
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure.
z
The voltage input signal (0 to ±5V or 0 to ±10V) or Pr. 133 setting is used as a set point and the 4 to
20mADC current input signal used as a feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remark s
128 10 10, 11, 20, 21
129 100% 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 9999: No proporti onal control
130 1 s 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 9999: No integral control
131 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 9999: Function invali d
132 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 9999: Function invali d
133 0% 0 to 100%
134 9999 0.01 to 10.00 s, 9999 9999: No di f ferential c ont rol
<Setting>
(1) Basic PID control configuration
+-
x
y
fi IM y
U
Ti
S
1
1+ +Td
S
Kp: Proportional constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
Set point
Deviation
Kp
PID
operation
Manipulated
variable
Inverter
drive circuit
Motor
Process value
(2) PID action overview
1) PI action
A combination of proportional control action (P) and integral control action (I) for providing a manipulated
variable in response to deviation and changes with time.
[Operation example for stepped changes of process value]
Note: PI action is the sum of P and I actions.
Time
Time
Time
Process value
P action
I action
PI action
Deviation Set point
PARAMETERS
125
2) PD action
A combination of proportional control action (P) and differential control action (D) for providing a
manipulated variable in response to deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic.
[Operation example for proportional changes of process value]
Note: PD action is the sum of P and D actions.
Time
Time
Time
Deviation
P action
D action
PD action
Set point
Process
value
3) PID action
The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both actions for control.
Note: The PID action is the sum of P and I and D actions.
4) Reverse action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X (set point - process value) is positive,
and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is negative.
X>0
X<0
+
-Process value
Set point
[Heating]
Process value
Cold → fi up
Hot → fi down
Deviation Set point
5) Forward action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X (set point - process value) is negative,
and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive.
X>0
X<0
+
-
Set point
Too cold → fi dow n
Hot → fi up
Set point
[Cooling]
Process value
Process value
Deviation
Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency)
Deviation
Positive Negative
Reverse act ion
ÒÔ
Forward action
ÔÒ
PARAMETERS
126
(3) Wiring example
z
Sink logic
z
Pr. 183 = 14
z
Pr. 192 = 16
z
Pr. 193 = 14
z
Pr. 194 = 15 NFB
024V
AC1φ
200/220V 50/60Hz
R 〈L1〉
S 〈L2〉
T 〈L3〉
STF
STR
RT(Note 3)
SD
10
2
5
1
4
U
V
W
(Note 2)
FU
OL
SE
(Process value•j 4 ∼ 20mADC
IM P
-
++ +
-
(OUT) (24V)
IPF
(Note 1)
Power supply
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
PID control selection
Setting po tentiometer
(Set point setting)
Deviation signal
Inverter Motor Pump
Upper limit
Lower limit
Forward
rotation outpu t
Reverse
rotation outpu t
Output signal common
For 2-wire
type Detector For 3-wire
type
DC power
supply
(COM)
Note: 1. The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power specifications of the detector
used.
2. The output signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 191 to Pr. 194 settings.
3. The input signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings.
PARAMETERS
127
(4) I/O signals
Signal Terminal Used Function Description Remarks
X14 Depending on
Pr. 180 to P r. 186 PID c ontrol
selection Swit c h on X14 to sel ect PID control. Set any of "10, 11, 20
and 21" in Pr. 128.
22
Set point i nput Ent er the set point for PID c ont rol .
11
Deviation s ignal
input Enter t he devi ation signal calculat ed externally.
Input
44
Proces s value
input Enter t he 4-20mADC proc es s value signal from
the detector.
FU
PUpper lim i t output Output t o i ndi cate that the process val ue signal
exceeded the upper lim i t value.
FD
NLower limit out put Output t o i ndi cate that the process val ue signal
exceeded the lower limi t val ue.
(Pr. 128 = 20,
21)
RL
Depending on
Pr. 191 to P r. 195 Forward (reverse)
rotation di rec tion
output
"Hi" is output to indi c ate that the output
indicat i on of the paramet er uni t is forward
rotation (FWD) or "Low" to indicate that it i s
reverse rotati on (REV) or stop (STOP).
(Pr. 128 = 10,
11, 20, 21)
Open collec tor output
Output
SE SE Output terminal
common Comm on to term i nal s FUP, FDN and RL
z
To start PID control, switch on the X14 signal. When this signal is off, ordinary inverter operation is
performed without the PID action being performed.
z
Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-5 or into Pr. 133 and enter the process value signal across
inverter terminals 4-5.
z
When entering the externally calculated deviation signal, enter it ac ross term inals 1-5. At this tim e, set "10"
or "11" in Pr. 128.
Item Entry Description
Set 0V as 0% and 5V as 100%. When "1, 3, 5, 11, 13 or 15" is set in Pr. 73
(5V selec ted for terminal 2).
Set point A cross t erminals 2-5 S et 0V as 0% and 10V as 100%. When "0, 2, 4, 10, 12 or 14" is set in Pr. 73
(10V selec ted for terminal 2).
Set point Pr. 133 Set the set poi nt (%) in Pr. 133.
Set −5V as −100%, 0V as 0% and +5V as
+100%. W hen "2, 3, 5, 12, 13 or 15" is set in Pr. 73
(5V selec ted for terminal 1).
Deviation
signal Across terminals 1-5 Set −10V as −100%, 0V as 0% and +10V as
+100%. W hen "0, 1, 4, 10, 11 or 14" is set in Pr. 73
(10V selec ted for terminal 1).
Process
value Ac ross terminals 4-5 4 mADC is equivalent t o 0% and 20mA DC to 100%.
PARAMETERS
128
(5) Parameter setting
Parameter
Number Setting Name Description
10 For heating, pressure control,
etc. PID reverse
action
11 For cooling, etc.
Deviation val ue
signal input
(term i nal 1) PID forward
action
20 For heating, pressure control,
etc. PID reverse
action
128
21
PID ac tion
selection
For cooling, et c.
Process value input
(term i nal 4) PID forward
action
0.1 to 1000%
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the
manipul ated variabl e varies greatly with a s light change of the proces s val ue.
Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the response sensitivity (gain)
improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs.
Gain K = 1/proport i onal band
129
9999
PID proport i onal
band
No proportional c ont rol
0.1 to 3600 s Time required for the integral (I) action to provide the same manipulated
variable as that for the proportional (P) action. As the integral time
decreases , the set point is reached earl i er but hunting occurs more eas i l y.
130
9999
PID integral time
No integral c ont rol .
0 to 100% Set the upper limit. If the f eedback value exceeds t he s ett ing, t he FUP si gnal
is output . (Proces s value of 4m A is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.)
131 9999 Upper lim it No func tion
0 to 100% Set the lower limit. (If the process value goes out of the setting range, an
alarm c an be output. In this case, the proces s value of 4mA is equivalent to
0% and 20m A to 100%.)
132
9999
Lower limit
No functi on
133 0 to 100% PID ac tion set
point for P U
operation
Only valid for t he PU c om m and in t he PU operation or PU/ external c om bined
mode.
For external operation, t he vol tage across 2-5 i s the set point.
(Pr. 902 value is equivalent t o 0% and Pr. 903 value t o 100% .)
134 0. 01 to 10.00 s Time only required f or the dif ferential (D) acti on to provide t he sam e proc ess
value as that for the proportional (P) action. As the differential time
increases, greater response is made to a deviati on c hange.
9999
PID differential
time No differential c ontrol.
(6) Adjustment procedure
Set the I/O terminals and PID control terminals.
Pr. 128 = 10, 11, 20, 21
Parameter setting
Terminal setting
Switch X14 signal on.
Run
Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 128 to Pr. 133.
PARAMETERS
129
(7) Calibration example
(A detector of 4mA at 0°C and 20mA at 50°C is used to adjust the room temperature to 25°C under PID
control.
The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0-5V).)
Yes
No
*When calibration is required, use Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 to calibrate the detector output and set point setting
input in the PU mode durin
g
an inverter stop.
START
Determine the set point.
Determine the set point of the
item to be adjusted.
Convert the set point into %.
Calculate the ratio of the set
point to the detector output.
Make calibration .
Set the set point.
Enter a voltage to across
terminals 2-5 according to
the set point (%).
Operation
Set the proportional band and
integral time to slightly higher
values and the differential time to
a slightly lower value, and switch
on the start signal.
Is the process
value stead y?
Adjust parameters.
Set the proportional band and
integral time to slightly higher
values and set the differential time
to a slightly lower value to stabilize
the process value.
END
Optimize parameters.
While the process value is steady,
the proportional band and integral
time may be reduced and the
differential time increased
throughout the operation.
xxxxxx
Set the room temperature to 25°C.
Set Pr. 128 and switch on the X14 signal to enable PID control.
xxxxxx
Detector specifications
When the detector used has the specifications that 0°C is equivalent to
4mA and 50°C to 50mA, the set point of 25°C is 50% because 4mA is
equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.
xxxxxx
When the set point setting input (0 to 5V) and detector output (4 to
20mA) must be calibrated, make the following calibration*.
xxxxxx
Set point = 50%
Since the specifications of terminal 2 are such that 0% is equivalent
to 0V and 100% to 5V, enter 2.5V into terminal 2.
xxxxxx
For PU operation, set the set point (0 to 100%) in Pr. 133.
During operation, set the proportional band and integral time to
slightly higher values and set the differential time to a slightly
lower value. In accordance with the system operation, reduce the
proportional band and integral time and increase the differential time.
PARAMETERS
130
<Set point input calibration>
1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) to across terminals 2-5.
2. Make calibration using Pr. 902. At this tim e, enter the frequency which should be output by the inverter at
the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0Hz).
3. Apply the voltage of 100% set point setting (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 2-5.
4. Make calibration using Pr. 903. At this tim e, enter the frequency which should be output by the inverter at
the deviation of 100% (e.g. 60Hz).
<Detector output calibration>
1. Apply the output current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 4mA) to across terminals 4-5.
2. Make calibration using Pr. 904.
3. Apply the output current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 20mA) to across terminals 4-5.
4. Make calibration using Pr. 905.
Note: The frequencies set in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 should be the same as set in Pr. 902 and Pr. 903. The
results of the above calibration are as shown below:
100
005(V)
%
[Set point setting]
100
0020 (mA)
%
4
[Detection value]
60
0
0100
Deviation (%)
[Manipul ated var iable]
Manipulated
variable (Hz)
Note: 1. If the m ulti-speed (RH, RM, RL) signal or jog operation ( jog) signal is enter ed with the X 14 signal
on, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or jog operation is started.
2. W hen "20" or "21" is set in Pr. 128, note that the input across inverter terminals 1-5 is added to
the set point across terminals 2-5.
3. W hen "5" (programmed operation mode) is selected for Pr. 79, PID control operation cannot be
performed. In this setting, programmed operation is performed.
4. When "6" (switch-over mode) is selected for Pr. 79, PID is made invalid.
5. When "9999" is set in Pr. 22, the s tall prevention level is the value enter ed fr om term inal 1. When
using terminal 1 as the edit input terminal for PID, therefore, set a value other than "9999" in
Pr. 22.
6. When "1" (online auto tuning) is selected for Pr. 95, PID control is made invalid.
7. W hen the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 and/or Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the
other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before
making settings.
PARAMETERS
131
Pr. 11 "DC dynamic brake operation
time"
Pr. 17 "MRS input selection"
Pr. 57 "restart coasting time"
Pr. 58 "restart cushion time"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection)
Pr. 190 to Pr. 195
(output terminal function selection)
Related parameters
z
Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over funct ion (Pr. 135 to Pr. 139)
Pr. 135 "commercial power supply-inverter
switch-over sequence output terminal selection"
Pr. 136 "MC switch-over interlock time"
Pr. 137 "start waiting time"
Pr. 138 "commercial power supply-inverter
switch-over selection at alarm occurrence"
Pr. 139 "automatic inverter-commercial power
supply switch-over frequency"
The inver ter contains a com plicated sequence c ircuit for com merc ial power supply-inverter operation switch-
over. Hence, the magnetic contactors for switch-over can be interlocked easily by merely entering the start,
stop or automatic switch-over select signal.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remarks
135 0 0, 1
136 0.1 sec. 0 to 100.0 sec.
137 0.5 sec. 0 to 100.0 sec.
138 0 0,1
139 9999 0 to 60. 0Hz, 9999 9999: No automatic
switch-over
(1) Wiring example
Sink logic, Pr. 185 = 7, Pr. 186 = 6, Pr. 192 = 17, Pr. 193 = 18, Pr. 194 = 19
MC1 R 〈L1〉
S 〈L2〉
T 〈L3〉
STF
R1 〈L11〉
S1 〈L21〉
CS
MRS
RES
SD
10
2
5
U
V
W
MC2
×
MC3
IM
IPF
OL
SE
*1
*1
*1
*2
MC3
MC2 DC24V
MC
1
FU
NFB
MC
2
MC
3
*3
OH
SU
IPF
OL
FU
SE DC
24V
External thermal relay
Reset
Frequency setting signal
External
thermal relay
Signal set in Pr. 190 to Pr. 195
*3. The terminals used depend on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings .
Note:
This switch -over function is used in the external operation
mode. Always connect terminals R1, S1 (L11, L21) to a
different power supply (power s upply different from the o ne
for MC1) to ensure proper operation.
MC2 and MC3 must be mechanically interlocked.
*1. Note the sequence output terminal capacities. The terminals used
depend on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 194 settings .
Output Terminal Capacity Permissible Output Terminal Load
Inverter's open collector outputs
(IPF, OL, FU) 24VDC 0.1A
FR-A5AR (option output) 230VAC 0.3A
30VDC 0.3A
*2. When connecting an AC power supply, connect the FR-A5AR option
and use the c ontact output.
When connecting a DC power supply , install the following protective
diode.
Inverter
Operation interlock
Inverter start
(forward rot ation)
Inverter-commercial
power supply
switch-over
PARAMETERS
132
· Roles of the magnetic contactors (MC1, MC2, MC3)
Magnetic
Contactor Place of Installation Role
MC1 Between power supply and
inverter Normally shorted with the following exception:
Opened only when an inverter fault occurs (s horted again by resett i ng)
MC2 Between power supply and motor
Shorted for commercial power supply operation, opened for inverter
operation
Shorted when an inverter fault occurs (selected with parameter, except
for external thermal relay operat i on)
MC3 Between inverter out put and motor Shorted for inverter operation, opened for commercial power supply
operation
Opened when an inverter fault oc curs
<I/O signals>
1) When this function is used (Pr. 135 = "1"), the input signals are switched on-off as indicated below:
MC Operation (
{
: ON, ×: OFF)
Signal Terminal Used Function On-Of f MC1 MC2 MC3
MRS MRS Operation
enable/dis abl e selecti on
Commercial power suppl y-
inverter operati on enabl e
............................ON
Commercial power suppl y-
inverter operati on di s abl e
............................OFF
{
{
×
Unchanged
CS Depending on
Pr. 180 to P r.186
Inverter-commercial
power supply switch-
over
Inverter operati on.ON
Commercial power supply
operation..............OFF
{
{
×
{
{
×
STF
(STR) STF
(STR)
Inverter operat i on
com mand (invali d for
com mercial power
supply) (Note)
Forward (reverse) rotati on
............................ON
Stop.....................OFF
{
{
×
×
{
{
OH Depending on
Pr. 180 to P r.186 External thermal rel ay
input Motor normal ........ON
Motor fault............OFF
{
×
×
×
RES RES Operating condition
initialization Initialization..........ON
Normal operation .OFF Unchanged
{
×
Unchanged
Note: ·In the above MC Operation field, [-] indicates that MC1 is on, MC2 is off and MC3 is on in inverter
operation and MC1 is on, MC2 is off and MC3 is off in commercial power supply operation.
[Unchanged] indicates that the status before signal-on or -off is held.
·The CS signal only functions when the MRS signal is on. STF (STR) only functions when MRS and
CS are on.
·MC1 switches off when an inverter fault occurs.
·If the MRS signal is not switched on, neither com mer cial power supply nor inverter operation can be
performed.
2) The output signals are output as follows:
Signal Terminal Us ed Descripti on
MC1 MC1's operat i on signal is output
MC2 MC2's operat i on signal is output
MC3
Depending on Pr. 190
to Pr. 195 MC3's operat i on signal is out put
PARAMETERS
133
(2) Parameter setting
Parameter
Number Name Setting Description
0Sequence output is not provided. (Pr. 136, Pr. 137, Pr. 138 and Pr. 139
setti ngs are ignored.)
135
Commercial power
supply-inverter
switch-over
sequence out put
terminal selection 1
Sequence output is provided.
When MC1 to MC3 are assigned with Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal
function selection), open collector outputs are provided. When they are not
assigned, relay outputs are provi ded from the FR-A5AR (option).
136 MC switch-over
interlock time 0 to 100.0 s Sets t he MC2 and MC3 operation interlock t i me.
137 Start waiting time 0 to 100.0 s Set a slightly longer (about 0.3 to 0.5 s) value than the time from when the
ON signal ent ers inverter operation MC3 to when it actually switches on.
0Stops i nverter operation and coasts the motor.
The inverter stops when an inverter fault occ urs (both MC2 and MC3 switch
off).
138
Commercial power
supply-inverter
switch-over selection
at alarm occurrenc e 1
Stops inverter operation and automatically switches inverter operation to
com merci al power suppl y operation.
W hen an inverter fault occurs , inverter operat ion is aut omat ically s witched to
com mercial power supply operat i on (MC2: ON, MC3: OFF).
0 to 60.0Hz
The motor is started and run by the inverter up to the set frequency, and
when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the set frequency, inverter
operation is automatically switched to commercial power supply operation.
Start and stop are controlled by the inverter operation command (STF or
STR).
139
Automatic inverter-
com mercial power
supply swit ch-over
frequency 9999 Automat i c switch-over is not done.
Note: 1. Pr. 139 functions when Pr. 135 setting is other than "0".
2. When the motor started by the inverter reaches the automatic switch-over frequency , inverter
operation is switched to commercial power supply operation. If the inverter's run command value is
then lowered to or below the switch-over frequency, commercial power supply operation is not
automatically switched to inverter operation.
Switch off the inverter operation command signal (STF or STR) to switch commercial power supply
operation to inverter operation and decelerate the motor to a stop.
<Operation sequence>
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(MRS)
(STF)
(CS)
ON
OFF
(MC1)
ON
OFF(MC3)
ON
OFF(MC2)
AA,B AC,
DA C,DB Each timer
A: Pr. 136 (MC switch-over interlo c k time )
B: Pr. 137 (MC start wa iting ti me)
C: Pr. 57 (reset time)
D: Pr. 58 (switch-over cushion ti me)
Power
Operation interloc k
Inverter operation command
Inverter-commercial power supply switch-over
Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over
Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over
Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over
Each timer
Operating status
(Motor speed)
Off for inve r te r faul t on ly
Operation command
Actual operation (Note)
Coast to stop
Commercial power
supply stop
Inverter
operation Coasting
Commercial power
supply operation
Coasting Inverter
operation Stop Inverter
operation
ON: Operation enabl e
OFF: Operation disable
ON: Forward rotation
ON: Inverter operation
OFF: Stop
OFF: Commercial power supply operation
Note: Indicates a delay until MC switches on.
PARAMETERS
134
(3) Operation procedure
1) Operation procedure for running
Operation pattern
Pr. 135 = "1" (inverter's open collector output terminals)
Pr. 136 = "2.0 s"
Pr. 137 = "1.0 s" (Set the value equal to or longer than the time
from when MC3 switches on actually until the inverter and
motor are connected. If it is shorter, restart may not function properly.
Pr. 57 = "0.5 s"
Pr. 58 = "0.5 s" (Always set this parameter when commercial power
supply operation is switched to inverter operation.)
Constant-speed operation,
commercial power supply operation
Switch power on.
Set parameters.
Start, inverter operation
Deceleration (stop), inverter operation
2) Signal on-off after parameter setting
MRS CS STF MC1 MC2 MC3 Remarks
Power on OFF
(OFF) OFF
(OFF) OFF
(OFF) OFF ON
(OFF ON) OFF
(OFF) OFF ON
(OFF ON) External operation m ode
(PU operation mode)
At start
(Inverter) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
Constant speed
(Commercial
power supply) ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
After MC3 switches off,
MC2 switches on.
(Motor coast s during this
period.)
Waiting time 2 s econds.
Switched to
inverter
operation for
deceleration
(Inverter)
ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
After MC2 switches off,
MC3 switches on.
(Motor coast s during this
period.)
Waiting time 4 s econds.
Stop ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Note: 1. This function is onl
y
activated when R1 and S1 are connected to a diff erent power suppl
y
(
power
supply which is not connected to MC1).
2. This function is onl
y
valid in the external operation or PU
(
speed command
)
and external
(
run
command
)
operation mode when the Pr. 135 value is other than "0". W hen the Pr. 135 value is
other than "0" in the operation mode other than the above, MC1 and MC3 switch on.
3. MC3 is on when the MRS and CS si
g
nals are on and STR is off, but when the motor run b
y
the
commercial power suppl
y
was coasted to a stop at the last time, it restarts after the time set in
Pr. 137 has elapsed.
4. Inverter operation is enabled when the MRS, STF and CS s i
g
nals switch on. In other cases
(
MRS
is on), commercial power supply operation is performed.
5. When the CS si
g
nal is switched off, the motor is switched over to commercial power suppl
y
operation. Note that when the STF
(
STR
)
si
g
nal is switched of f , the motor is deceler ated to a s top
by the inverter.
6. W hen both MC2 and MC3 are off and MC2 or MC3 is then switched on, the motor restarts after
the waiting time set in Pr. 136 has elapsed.
7. If the Pr. 135 setting is other than 0, the Pr. 136 and Pr. 137 settings are ignored in the PU
operation mode.
Also, the inverter's input terminals (STF, CS, MRS, OH) return to their ordinary functions.
8. W hen the commercial power suppl
y
-inverter switch-over se
q
uence is selected, the PU operation
interlock function (Pr. 79 = 7) is not activated if it has been set.
9. W hen the terminal functions are chan
g
ed usin
g
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 and/or Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the
other functions ma
y
be affected. Confirm the functions of the correspondin
g
terminals before
making settings.
Pr. 140 to Pr. 143
Î
Refer to Pr. 29.
Pr. 144
Î
Refer to Pr. 37.
Pr. 148, Pr. 149
Î
Refer to Pr. 22.
PARAMETERS
135
Pr. 190 to Pr. 195
(output terminal function selection)
Related parameters
z
Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151)
Pr. 150 "output current detection level"
Pr. 151 "output current detection time"
z
If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting during inverter operation for longer than the
time set in Pr. 151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter's open collector
output terminal.
(Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 to assign the terminal used for Y12 signal output.)
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
150 150% 0 to 200.0%
151 0 0 to 10 s
Pr.151
Pr.150
OFF ON OFF
Minimum 100m s
Time (t)
Output current
detection signal Output (I)
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Param eter Number Descrip t ion
150 Set the output current detection l evel .
100% is t he rated inverter current.
151 Set the out put c urrent det ect ion t im e. Set a period of t im e f rom when the output c urrent rises to or above t he
Pr. 150 setting to when the output current detection si gnal (Y 12) i s output.
Note: 1. Once switched on, the output current detection signal is held on for at least 100ms.
2. This function is also valid during execution of the online or offline auto tuning.
3. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be
affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
PARAMETERS
136
Pr. 190 to Pr. 195
(output terminal function selection)
Related parameters
z
Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)
Pr. 152 "zero current detection level"
Pr. 153 "zero current detection time"
When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not be generated. This may cause a gravity drop
when the inverter is used in vertical lift application.
To prevent this, the output current "zero" signal can be output from the inverter to close the mechanical brake
when the output current has fallen to "zero".
z
If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting during inverter operation for longer than the time
set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the inverter's open collector output
terminal.
(Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 to assign the terminal used for Y13 signal output.)
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
152 5.0% 0 to 200.0%
153 0.5 s 0 to 1 s
Output current 0 [A]
OFF ON
OFF ON
Pr.152
OFF ON
100 ms (Note)
St ar t signa l
Pr. 152 "zer o current
detection level"
Zero current detection
signal output
Pr. 153 "detection time" Pr. 153 "detection time"
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number Description
152 Set t he zero current detec tion level.
Set this parameter to def ine the percentage of t he rated current at which the zero current will be detected.
153 Set the zero current detec t i on time.
Set a period of time from when the output c urrent drops to or below the Pr. 152 setti ng to when the zero current
detecti on signal (Y13) is output.
Note: 1. If the current falls below the preset detection level but the timing condition is not satisfied, the zero
current detection signal is held on for about 100ms.
2. This function is also valid during execution of the online or offline auto tuning.
3. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be
affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
CAUTION
The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the zero current detection
time setting not be too long. Otherwise, the detection signal may not be output when torque
is not generated at a low out put current .
To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous conditions by use of the
zero current det ect ion signal, inst all a safety backup such as an emergency brake.
PARAMETERS
137
Pr. 14 "load pattern selection"
Pr. 44 to Pr. 49
(second function selection)
Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection)
Related parameters
Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level"
Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level at
double speed"
Pr. 47 "second stall prevention operation
current"
Pr. 48 "second stall prevention operation
frequency"
Pr. 114 "third stall prevention operation
current"
Pr. 115 "third stall prevention operation
frequency"
Pr. 154 "voltage reduction selection
during stall prevention operation"
Pr. 157 "OL signal output waiting time"
Related parameters
Pr. 154
Î
Refer to Pr. 22.
z
RT signal act ivated condition selection (Pr. 155)
Pr. 155 "RT signal activated condition selection"
z
Set the condition of activating the RT term inal to s elect the sec ond control f unctions by switching on-off the
RT signal.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Set ting Range
155 0 0, 10
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameter:
Pr. 155 Set ting Des cription
0Made valid im mediately by switching the RT signal
on-off.
10 Made valid only when the RT signal i s on at const ant
speed.
(Invalid during accelerati on/ deceleration)
z
Stall prevention function and current lim it function (Pr. 156)
Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation selection"
Stall prevention and fast-response current limit can be disabled and the OL signal output delayed.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Set ting Range
156 0 0 to 31, 100, 101
PARAMETERS
138
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameter as required:
Stall Prevention
{
...Activated
z
...Not activated
Pr. 156 Set ting
Fast-Response
Current Limit
{
...Activated
z
...Not activated Acceleration Constant speed Decelerati on
OL Signal Output
{
...Operation continued
z
...Operation not
continued (Not e 1)
0
{ {{{ {
1
z
{{{ {
2
{
z
{{ {
3
zz
{{ {
4
{{
z
{{
5
z
{
z
{{
6
{
zz
{{
7
zzz
{{
8
{{{
z
{
9
z
{{
z
{
10
{
z
{
z
{
11
zz
{
z
{
12
{{
zz
{
13
z
{
zz
{
14
{
zzz
{
15
z zzz
{
16
{ {{{
z
17
z
{{{
z
18
{
z
{{
z
19
zz
{{
z
20
{{
z
{
z
21
z
{
z
{
z
22
{
zz
{
z
23
zzz
{
z
24
{{{
zz
25
z
{{
zz
26
{
z
{
zz
27
zz
{
zz
28
{{
zz z
29
z
{
zz z
30
{
zzz z
31
z zzz z
Driving
{{{{ {
100 Regenerative
zzzz
{
Driving
z
{{{ {
101 Regenerative
zzzz
{
Note 1: When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected, the "E.OLT" alarm code
(stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation stopped.
(Alarm stop display "E.OLT")
Note 2: If the load is heavy, the lift is predetermined, or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, the
stall prevention may be activated and the motor not stopped in the preset
acceleration/deceleration time. Therefore, set optimum values to the Pr. 156 stall prevention
operation level.
(When the output voltage reduces during stall prevention operation, an overcurrent trip will be less
liable to occur but the torque decreases. Set "0" in Pr. 154 when the torque may be reduced.)
CAUTION
Always perform test operat ion.
Stall prevent ion operat ion performed during acceleration may increase t he accelerat ion t ime.
Stall prevent ion operat ion performed during constant speed may cause sudden speed
changes.
Stall prevent ion operat ion performed during deceleration may increase t he decelerat ion t ime,
increasing the deceleration distance.
PARAMETERS
139
Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function
selection"
Pr. 191 "SU terminal function selection"
Pr. 192 "IPF terminal function selection"
Pr. 193 "OL terminal function selection"
Pr. 194 "FU terminal function selection"
Pr. 195 "ABC terminal function
selection"
Related parameters
z
OL signal out put timer (Pr. 157)
Pr. 157 "OL signal output waiting time"
Use this parameter to set whether the overload alarm signal (OL signal) is output immediately or a preset
period of time after occurrence of an overload status.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remarks
157 0 0 to 25 s, 9999 9999: No s i gnal output
Set time t (seconds)
Overload status (OL output)
OL output signal
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameter:
Pr. 157 Set ting Description
0 Out put immediat el y.
0.1 to 25 Output af ter the set t i me t (s econds) have elapsed.
9999 Overload alarm signal i s not output.
Pr. 158
Î
Refer to Pr. 54.
PARAMETERS
140
z
User group selection (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 t o Pr. 176)
Pr. 160 "user group read selection"
Pr. 173 "user group 1 registration"
Pr. 174 "user group 1 deletion"
Pr. 175 "user group 2 registration"
Pr. 176 "user group 2 deletion"
From among all parameters, a total of 32 parameters can be registered to two different user groups.
The registered parameters may only be accessed for reading and writing.
Other parameters than those registered to the user groups cannot be read.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setti ng Range Remarks
160 0 0, 1, 10, 11
173 0 0 to 999
174 0 0 to 999, 9999 9999: Batch deleti on
175 0 0 to 999
176 0 0 to 999, 9999 9999: Batch deleti on
<Examples of use>
(1) Parameter registration to user group (when registering Pr. 3 to user group 1)
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
Pr. 173 reading
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
SET SET
1.5 seconds
The number of parameters
registered for user setting
appears.
Using the [UP/DOWN] key,
choose the p ara me ter nu mb er
to be registered.
Pr. 3 is registered to user
group 1. Using the [UP/DOWN] key,
move to the next parameter
to be registered.
Using the [SET] key, make
registration.
.....
Flickering
.....
.....
.....
(2) Parameter deletion from user group (when deleting Pr. 5 from user group 1)
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL
Hz
MON EXT PU
A
V
REV FWD
Pr. 174 reading
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
SET SET
1.5 seconds
The number of parameters
registered for user setting
appears.
Using the [UP/DOWN] key,
choose the p ara me ter nu mb er
to be deleted.
Pr. 5 is deleted from user
group 1. Using the [UP/DOWN] key,
choose the parameter to be
deleted.
Using the [SET] key, make
deletion.
.....
Flickering
.....
.....
.....
(3) By setting the required value in Pr. 160, make the user groups valid or invalid.
Pr. 160 Set ting Descript i on
0 All parameters can be acces sed for reading and writing (Factory sett i ng)
1 Parameters registered to us er group 1 may only be acc essed for reading and writi ng.
10 Param et ers registered to user group 2 m ay onl y be ac cessed f or readi ng and writi ng.
11 Param et ers registered to user groups 1 and 2 may only be accessed for reading and writi ng.
Note: 1. Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 991 values can always be read independently of the user group setting.
2. W hen Pr. 173 or Pr. 174 is read, the num ber of parameters registered to user group 1 appears.
When Pr. 175 or Pr. 176 is read, the number of parameters registered to user group 2 appears.
3. "0" set in the second digit of the 2-digit Pr. 160 setting is not displayed. However, it is displayed
when "0" is set in the first digit only.
4. When "9999" is set in Pr. 174 or Pr. 176, the parameters registered to the corresponding user
group is batch-deleted.
Pr. 162 to Pr. 165
Î
Refer to Pr. 57.
PARAMETERS
141
Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data
selection"
Related parameter
z
Watt-hour m et er clear/actual operation hour met er clear (Pr. 170, Pr. 171)
Pr. 170 "watt-hour meter clear"
Pr. 171 "actual operation hour meter clear"
You can clear the watt-hour value and actual operation hour monitoring function.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
170 0 0
171 0 0
<Setting>
Write "0" in the parameters to clear the watt-hour value and actual operation hour.
Pr. 173 to Pr. 176
Î
Refer to Pr. 160.
z
Input terminal functi on select ion (Pr. 180 to Pr. 186)
Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection"
Pr. 181 "RM terminal function selection"
Pr. 182 "RH terminal function selection"
Pr. 183 "RT terminal function selection"
Pr. 184 "AU terminal function selection"
Pr. 185 "JOG terminal function selection"
Pr. 186 "CS terminal function selection"
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Parameter
Number Terminal
Symbol Factory Setting Factory-S et Terminal Function Setting Range
180 RL 0 Low-speed operati on c omm and (RL) 0 to 99, 9999
181 RM 1 Middle-speed operat i on command (RM) 0 t o 99, 9999
182 RH 2 Hi gh-speed operation command (RH) 0 to 99, 9999
183 RT 3 Second function selec tion (RT) 0 to 99, 9999
184 AU 4 Current input selecti on (A U) 0 t o 99, 9999
185 JOG 5 Jog operat i on s el ection (JOG) 0 to 99, 9999
186 CS 6 Automatic restart after instant aneous
power failure selec t i on (CS) 0 to 99, 9999
PARAMETERS
142
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Setting Signal
Name Func tions Relevant Param eters
Pr. 59 = 0 Low-speed operat i on command Pr. 4 to Pr. 6
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27
Pr. 232 to P r. 239
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (acceleration) Pr. 59
Pr. 79 = 5 * Programmed operation group
selection Pr. 79, Pr. 200, P r. 201 to Pr. 210, Pr.
211 to Pr. 220, Pr. 221 to P r. 230, Pr.
231
0RL
Pr. 270 = 1, 3 * Stop-on-cont act selection 0 Pr. 270, P r. 275, Pr. 276
Pr. 59 = 0 Middle-speed operation command Pr. 4 t o P r. 6, Pr. 24 t o Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to
Pr. 239
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remot e setting (dec el eration) Pr. 59
1RM
Pr. 79 = 5 * Programmed operation group
selection Pr. 79, Pr. 200, P r. 201 to Pr. 210, Pr.
211 to Pr. 220, Pr. 221 to P r. 230, Pr.
231
Pr. 59 = 0 High-speed operation command Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to P r. 239
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remot e setting (s etting cl ear) Pr. 59
2RH
Pr. 79 = 5 * Programmed operation group
selection Pr. 79, Pr. 200, P r. 201 to Pr. 210, Pr.
211 to Pr. 220, Pr. 221 to P r. 230, Pr.
231
Second function sel ection Pr. 44 to Pr. 50
3RT
Pr.270 = 1, 3 * Stop-on-contact selecti on 1 Pr. 270, Pr. 275, Pr. 276
4 A U Current input s el ection Refer to page 10
5 JOG Jog operat i on selecti on Pr. 15, Pr. 16
6 CS Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165
7OH
External thermal relay input**
The externally provided overheat protec tion thermal relay,
mot or-embedded temperature relay or the l i ke is operated t o
stop t he i nverter. Refer t o page 174
8 REX 15-speed selection (combination wit h RL, RM, RH) Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to P r. 239
9 X9 Third func tion Pr. 110 to P r. 116
10 X10 FR-HC connection (inverter operation enable) Pr. 30, Pr. 70
11 X11 FR-HC connection (ins t antaneous power failure detec tion) Pr. 30, Pr. 70
12 X12 PU operati on external i nterlock Pr. 79
13 X13 External DC dynamic braking start Pr. 10 to Pr. 12
14 X14 PI D control vali d terminal Pr. 128 to P r. 134
15 BRI Brake openi ng completion signal Pr. 278 t o Pr. 285
16 X16 PU-external operati on switch-over Pr. 79
17 X17 Load pattern selecti on forward/reverse rotation boost Pr. 14
18 X18 Advanc ed magneti c flux vector-V /F switch-over Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89
19 X19 Load torque high-speed frequency Pr. 271 to Pr. 274
20 X20 S-pattern acceleration/decel erat i on C switch-over terminal
(only when FR-A5AP option i s fitted) P r. 380 to Pr. 383
22 X22 Orientation command (Note 11) (onl y when FR-A5A P option
is fitted) Pr. 350 t o Pr. 369
23 LX Pre-excit ation (Note 2) (only when FR-A5AP option is f i tted) Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 359, Pr. 369, Pr. 370
9999 No function
*: When Pr. 59 = " 1 or 2" , Pr. 79 = "5" , and Pr. 270 = "1 or 3", t he functions of the RL, RM, RH and RT signals c hange as list ed above.
**: Operated when the relay contact "opens".
PARAMETERS
143
Note:1. One function can be assi
g
ned to two or more terminals. In this case, the terminal inputs are
OR’ed.
2. The speed command priorities are hi
g
her in order of
j
o
g
, multi-speed settin
g
(
RH, RM, RL
)
and
AU.
3. When HC connec tion
(
inverter operation enable s i
g
nal
)
is not selected, the MRS term inal shares
this function.
4. W hen advanc ed ma
g
netic flux vector-V/F switch-over and load pattern selection forward/reverse
rotation boost are not selected, the second functions (RT) share these functions.
5. Use common terminals to assign programmed operation group selection, multi-speeds (7
speeds) and remote setting. They cannot be set individually.
(Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for speed setting and need not
be set at the same time.)
6. Stop-on-contact control selection, Pr. 270 = "1 or 3", shares RT with multi-speed settin
g
(
low
speed), and its allocation cannot be changed.
7. When FR-HC connection inverter operation enable
(
X10
)
si
g
nal is not assi
g
ned, the MRS
terminal shares this function.
8. When "7" is s et in Pr . 79 and the PU operation ex ter nal interloc k
(
X12
)
si
g
nal is not ass i
g
ned, the
MRS signal acts as this function.
9. W hen the load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost
(
X17
)
si
g
nal is not assi
g
ned, the
RT signal shares this function.
10. When advanced m a
g
netic flux vector-V/F switch-over
(
X18
)
si
g
nal is not ass i
g
ned, the RT si
g
nal
shares this function.
11. When a stop position is entered externall
y
for orientation control, the FR-A5AX
(
12-bit di
g
ital
input) is required.
12. Made valid when vector control servo lock is set valid.
PARAMETERS
144
Pr. 76 "operation mode selection"
Related parameter
z
Output terminal functi on select ion (Pr. 190 to Pr. 195)
Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection"
Pr. 191 "SU terminal function selection"
Pr. 192 "IPF terminal function selection"
Pr. 193 "OL terminal function selection"
Pr. 194 "FU terminal function selection"
Pr. 195 "ABC terminal function selection"
You can change the functions of the open collector and contact output terminals.
Parameter
Number Terminal
Symbol Factory Set ting Factory-Set Terminal
Function S et ting Range
190 RUN 0 Inverter running 0 to 199, 9999
191 SU 1 Up to frequenc y 0 to 199, 9999
192 IPF 2 Inst ant aneous power
failure/undervoltage 0 to 199, 9999
193 OL 3 Overl oad al arm 0 to 199, 9999
194 FU 4 Frequency detecti on 0 to 199, 9999
195 A , B, C 99 Al arm output 0 to 199, 9999
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Setting
Positive
logic Negative
logic
Signal
Name Function Operation Related
parameter
0 100 RUN I nverter running Output during operation when the invert er output
frequency rises to or above the start i ng frequency.
1 101 SU Up to frequency Refer to P r. 41 "up-to-f requency sensitivity" . (Note
2) Pr. 41
2 102 IPF Instantaneous power failure or
undervoltage Output when an instantaneous power fail ure or
undervoltage occurs.
3 103 OL Overload alarm
Output while st al l prevention function is ac t i vated. Pr. 22, Pr. 23,
Pr. 66, P r. 148,
Pr.1, P r. 149,
Pr. 154
4 104 FU Output frequency detect i on Refer to Pr. 42, Pr. 43 (output frequency
detection). Pr. 42, Pr. 43
5 105 FU2 Second output frequency
detection Refer to Pr. 50 (second output f requency
detection). Pr. 50
6 106 FU3 Third output frequency
detection Refer to Pr. 116 (third output f requency
detection). Pr. 116
7 107 RBP Regenerati ve brak e pre-al arm Output when 85% of the regenerative brak e duty
set in P r. 70 is reached. Pr. 70
8 108 THP Electroni c overcurrent
protecti on pre-al arm
Output when the cumulative el ectronic
overcurrent protection value reac hes 85% of the
preset level. Pr. 9
9 109 P RG Programmed mode Output in the programmed mode. (Not e 3) Pr. 79, Pr. 200
to Pr. 231
10 110 PU PU operation mode Output when the PU operati on mode is selected. Pr. 17 = 0 to 3
11 111 RY Inverter operati on ready Output when the inverter can be st art ed by
switching t he start s i gnal on or while it is running.
12 112 Y12 Output current det ection Refer to P r. 150 and Pr. 151 (output current
detection). Pr. 150, P r. 151
13 113 Y13 Zero current detection Refer to Pr. 152 and Pr. 153 (zero current
detection). Pr. 152, P r. 153
14 114 FDN PID lower limit
15 115 FUP P I D upper l i mit
16 116 RL PID forward-reverse rotati on
output
Refer to Pr. 128 to Pr. 134 (P ID control). Pr. 128 to
Pr. 134
PARAMETERS
145
Setting
Positive
logic Negative
logic
Signal
Name Function Operation Related
parameter
17 MC1 Commerci al power suppl y-
inverter swit ch-over MC1
18 MC2 Commerci al power suppl y-
inverter swit ch-over MC2
19 MC3 Commerci al power suppl y-
inverter swit ch-over MC3
Refer to Pr. 135 to Pr.139 (commercial power
supply-inverter switch-over). Pr. 135 to
Pr. 139
20 120 BOF Brake openi ng reques t Refer to Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 (brake sequence
functions). Pr. 278 t o
Pr. 285
25 125 FAN Fan f aul t output Output when a fan faul t occurs .
26 126 FIN Fin overheat pre-alarm Output when the heat sink temperature reac hes
about 85% of the fin overheat prot ection
temperature.
127 ORA In-position
28 128 ORM Orientation error
When orientat i on i s val i d (onl y when FR-A5A P
option is l oaded)
29 129 Y29 Overspeed detecti on
30 130 Y30 Forward running output
31 131 Y31 Reverse running output
For PLG feedback control, vector control
(only when the FR-A5AP opt i on i s loaded)
32 132 Y32 Regeneration status output
33 133 RY2 Operation ready 2 For vect or control
(only when the FR-A5AP opt i on i s loaded)
98 198 LF Minor fault out put Output when a mi nor fault occurs. (Refer to page
179.)
99 199 ABC Alarm output Output when the invert er' s protecti ve function i s
activat ed to stop t he out put (major fault).
9999 No functi on
0 to 99: Positive logic
100 to 199: Negative logic
Note: 1. Under PLG feedback control (when the FR-A5AP option is loaded), the operations of the up-to-
frequency SU and frequency detection FU, FU2, FU3 are as follows:
SU, FU: The actual speed (frequency) provided by the PLG feedback signal is output at or above
the frequency specified for detection.
FU, FU3: The inverter output frequency is output at or above the frequency specified for
detection.
2. When the frequency setting is varied with the analog signal or the [UP/DOWN] key of the
operation panel, note that the output of the SU (up-to-frequency) signal may alternate between
ON and OFF due to that varying speed and the timing of the varying speed dependent on the
acceleration/deceleration time setting.
3. This signal is output when "5" is set in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" and the external
operation mode is selected (the inverter goes into the programmed mode).
4. The same function may be set to more than one terminal.
5. When the function is activated, the terminal conducts with the settings of 0 to 99 and does not
conduct with the settings of 100 to 199.
6. Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 do not function if the values set are other than the above.
7. When Pr. 76 = 1 or 3, the output signals of the SU, IPF, OL and FU output terminals conform to
Pr. 76. When an inverter alarm occurs, the signal outputs are switched over to alarm code
outputs.
8. The output as signm ent of the RUN terminal and alarm output relay conform s to the above s etting
independently of Pr. 76.
PARAMETERS
146
Pr. 77 "parameter write disable
selection"
Related parameter
z
User initial value setti ng (Pr. 199)
Pr. 199 "user's initial value setting"
Among the parameters, you can set user-only parameter initial values. These values may be set to 16
parameters.
By performing user clear operation from the operation panel or parameter unit, you can initialize the
parameters to the user-set initial values. Note that the parameters of which initial values have not been set
are initialized to the factory settings by user clear operation.
z
You can read the user's initial value list in the help mode of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
199 0 0 to 999, 9999
The read Pr. 199 value is displayed as the number of parameters registered.
<Setting example>
(1) To set "1" in Pr. 7 and "2" in Pr. 8 as user's initial values. (Operation from the FR-DU04)
6) Thr o ug h the abo ve s te ps, the i ni ti al val ue s of Pr . 7 and
Pr. 8 are registered.
1) Set "1" (target initial value) in Pr. 7.
2) Set "2" (target initial value) in Pr. 8.
3) Pre ss the [SET] key to read Pr. 199. The number of
parameters having user's initial values are then dis played.
4) Further press the [SET] key for 1.5 se conds.
The parameter setting scr een is then d isplayed.
5) Se lect Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 with the [ U P/DOWN] key and
press the [SET] key for 1.5 seconds to enter.
The settings of the parameters whose numbers are set in Pr. 199 (i.e. Pr. 7 = 1, Pr. 8 = 2 in the above
example) are user's initial values.
(2) Deletion of user's initial values
By writing "9999" to Pr. 199 (and pressing the [SET] key for 1.5 seconds), the user's initial values
registered are batch-deleted.
Note: 1. When user's initial values for Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 are set, one parameter uses the area of two
parameters for registration.
2. As this setting is concer ned with user-cleared initial values , the parameter number s which cannot
be cleared cannot be set.
3. The operation panel (FR-DU04) cannot be used to refer to user's initial values.
4. Values cannot be registered to Pr. 201 to Pr. 231.
PARAMETERS
147
Pr. 76 "alarm code output selection"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Related parameters
z
Programmed operation function (Pr. 200 to Pr. 231)
Pr. 200 "program minute/second selection"
Pr. 201 to Pr. 210 "program setting 1 to 10"
Pr. 211 to Pr. 220 "program setting 11 to 20"
Pr. 221 to Pr. 230 "program setting 21 to 30"
Pr. 231 "time-of-day setting"
z
In programmed operation, automatic operation is performed under the control of the internal timer in
accordance with the preset time of day, running frequency and rotation direction.
z
This function is made valid when the following parameter is set to the following value:
· Pr. 79 = "5" (programmed operation)
z
You can select the time unit for programmed operation between "minute/second" and "hour/minute".
z
The s tart time of day, rotation direction and running f requenc y are defined as one point and ever y 10 points
are grouped into three:
· Group 1: Pr. 201 to Pr. 210
· Group 2: Pr. 211 to Pr. 220
· Group 3: Pr. 221 to Pr. 230
z
Use Pr. 231 to set the time of day when programmed operation is started.
Parameter
Number Factory
Setting Setting Range Remark s
200 0 0 to 3 0, 2 [minute/second]
1, 3 [hour/minute]
201 to 210 0,9999,0 0 to 2
0 to 400, 9999
0 to 99.59
0 to 2: Rotation direct i on
0 to 400, 9999: Frequency
0 to 99.59: Time
211 to 220 0,9999,0 0 to 2
0 to 400, 9999
0 to 99.59
0 to 2: Rotation direct i on
0 to 400, 9999: Frequency
0 to 99.59: Time
221 to 230 0,9999,0 0 to 2: Rotation di rec tion
0 to 400, 9999: Frequency
0 to 99.59: Time
0 to 2: Rotation direct i on
0 to 400, 9999: Frequency
0 to 99.59: Time
231 0 0 to 99.59
<Wiring example>
· For sink logic
STF
RH
RM
RL
STR
SD
FU
OL
PF
SU
SE
I
1
2
3
U,V,W
Out put signal common
Programmed
operation start
Group selection
T
imer reset
Input signal common
Inverter
Motor
Terminal function Pr. 79 = 5
Terminal function Pr. 76 = 3
Group run signals
(Open collector)
Time-out si gnal
R,S,T
〈L1,L2,L3〉
PARAMETERS
148
<Setting>
(1) Set the time unit for programmed operation in Pr. 200. Select either of "minute/second" and
"hour/minute".
Setting Description
0 Minute/second unit (voltage monitor)
1 Hour/mi nute unit (voltage monitor)
2 Minute/second unit (referenc e time of day monit or)
3 Hour/mi nute unit (referenc e time of day monit or)
Note: 1. When "2" or "3" is set in Pr. 200, the reference time-of-day monitor screen is displayed
instead of the voltage monitor screen.
2. Note that when the Pr. 200 setting is changed, the units for Pr. 201 to Pr. 231 setting will
change.
(2) The inverter has an internal timer (RAM). When the reference time of day is set in Pr. 231,
programmed operation is started at this time of day.
1)Setting range
The time unit depends on the Pr. 200 setting.
Pr. 200 Set ting Pr. 231 S etting Range Pr. 200 S etting P r. 231 Setti ng Range
0 Maxim um 99 m i nut es 59 seconds 2 Maximum 99 minutes 59 seconds
1 Maxim um 99 hours 59 minutes 3 Maximum 99 hours 59 minutes
Note: The referenc e time-of -day timer returns to "0" when both the start s ignal and group selec t signal
are entered. Set the reference time of day in Pr. 231 when both signals are on.
2) Resetting the reference time of day
The reference time of day is cleared by switching on the timer reset signal (STR) or by resetting
the inverter. Note that the reference time-of-day value set in Pr. 231 is also reset to "0".
(3) Program setting
The rotation direction, running frequency and start time of day can be set by using Pr. 201 to Pr. 231.
No.1 Pr. 201
2 Pr. 202
3 Pr. 203
4 Pr. 204
10 Pr. 210
No.11 Pr. 211
20 Pr. 220
No.21 Pr. 221
30 Pr. 230
Group 3
Setting Point Rotation Direction, Frequency, Start Time of Day
Group 1
Group 2
Parameter
Number Name S et ting Range Factory
Setting Remarks
0 to 2 0 Rotation direction setting
0: Stop, 1: Forward rotation, 2: Reverse rotati on
0 to 400Hz 9999 Frequency sett i ng
201 to 230 Programm ed operation
minute/second
selection 0 to 99:59 0 Tim e of day setting
PARAMETERS
149
<Setting procedure>
(Example: Set point No. 1, forward rotation, 30Hz, 4 hours 30 minutes)
1) Read Pr. 201 value.
2) Enter "1" (forward rotation) in Pr. 201 and press the [SET] key ([WRITE] key when using the FR-PU04
parameter unit).
3) Enter 30 (30Hz) and press the [SET] key ([WRITE] key when using the FR-PU04 parameter unit). (Note 1)
4) Enter "4.30" and press the [SET] key ([WRITE] key when using the FR-PU04 parameter unit). (Note 2)
5) Press the [UP] key to move to the next parameter (Pr. 202), and press the [SET] key ([READ] key when
using the FR-PU04 par am eter unit) to dis play the current setting. Hereafter , press the [UP] key to advance
the parameter one by one.
Note 1: To make a stop, write "0" in the rotation direction and frequency. Set "9999" for no
setting.
Note 2: An error will result if 4.80 is entered (59 minutes or 59 seconds is exceeded).
· Assuming that operation has been programmed as indicated in the following table, the operation
pattern is as shown in the figure below:
No. Operation Parameter Setting
1Forward rotation, 20Hz, 1 hour 0
minutes Pr. 201 = 1, 20, 1:00
2 Stop, 3 hours 0 minutes Pr. 202 = 0, 0, 3: 00
3Reverse rotation, 30Hz, 4 hours 0
minutes Pr. 203 = 2, 30, 4:00
4Forward rotation, 10Hz, 6 hours 0
minutes Pr. 204 = 1, 10, 6:00
5Forward rotation, 35Hz, 7 hours 30
minutes Pr. 205 = 1, 35, 7:30
6 Stop, 9 hours 0 minutes Pr. 206 = 0, 0, 9: 00
<Operation pattern>
20Hz
01 3469
10Hz
32456
7:30
35Hz
Time of day
Set point 1
Forward
rotation
(4) Input signals
Name Des cription Signal Level Remarks
Group signal
RH (group 1)
RM (group 2)
RL (group 3)
Used to select the group for
programmed operation.
Timer reset signal (S TR) Input to zero the reference time of day.
Programmed operation start
signal (STF) Input to start program med operation.
Photocoupler
isolated
May also be driven by
transis tor. When ic = 10mA,
Vec<0. 5V should be sati sfied.
(5) Output signals
Name Des cription Signal Level Remarks
Time-out signal (SU) Output on completion of the operat i on of
the selected group and cleared on t i mer
reset.
Group select signals
(FU, OL, IPF)
Output during runni ng of corresponding
group's program and cleared on ti mer
reset.
Open collec tor
output (is ol ated)
Permi ssible l oad
24VDC, 0. 1A
Only when Pr. 76 = 3
PARAMETERS
150
(6) Operation
1) Ordinary operation
After completion of all preparations and settings, turn on the desired group select signal (any of RH
(group 1), RM (group 2) and RL (group 3)), then turn on the start signal (STF). This causes the internal
timer (reference time of day) to be reset automatically and the operation of that group to be performed
in sequence in accordance with the settings. When the operation of the group ends, a signal is output
from the time-out output terminal. (The open collector signal of SU is turned on.)
Note: Use the program med operation function with "5" set in Pr. 79. Program med operation will not be
performed if any of the group select signals is switched on during PU operation or data link
operation.
t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6
f1 f2 f3 f4 f5
00
Note that the operation i s not started if th
e
timer reset signal (STR) is o n.
Start signal
STF
Grou p 1 RH
Inverter outpu t
frequency
Time-out
signal (SU)
Setting of group 1
2) Multi-group select operation
When two or more groups are selected at the same time, the operations of the selected groups are
executed in sequence of group 1, group 2 and group 3.
For example, if group 1 and group 2 have been selected, the operation of group 1 is first carried out,
and after that operation ends, the reference time of day is reset, the operation of group 2 is started, and
the time-out signal (SU) is output after the operation of group 2 ends.
t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6
f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f1 f2 f3 f4
000
0
t'1 t'2 t'3 t'4 t'5 t'1 t'2 t'3 t'4 t'5
Time-out
signal (SU)
Start s ignal
STF
Grou p 1 RH
Grou p 2 RM
Inverter output
frequency
Group 1 select
signal (FU)
Group 2 select
signal (OL)
Setting of group 1 Setting of group 2
(7) To repeat the operation of the same group, reset the timer using the time-out signal as shown below.
1) To repeat the operation of only group 1 2) To repeat the operation of groups 1 and 2
STF
STR
SU
SD
SE
(Group 3) RL
Inverter
(Group 1) RH
(Group 2) RM
STF
STR
SU
SD
SE
(Group 3) RL
Inverter
(Group 1) RH
(Group 2) RM
Note: 1. If the inverter power is switched off, then on (including an instantaneous power failure) during the
execution of the programmed operation, the internal timer is reset and the inverter does not
restart if the power is restored.
To resume the operation, turn the programmed operation start signal (STF) off, then on. (At this
time, when it is required to set the reference time of day, switch the start signal on before setting.)
2. When the inverter is wired for programmed operation specifications, the following signals are
invalid:AU, STOP, 2, 4, 1, JOG
3. During programmed operation, the inverter cannot be operated in any other mode. When the
programmed operation start signal (STF) and timer reset signal (STR) are ON, the operation
mode cannot be switched between PU operation and external operation.
PARAMETERS
151
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Î
Refer to Pr. 4.
Pr. 240
Î
Refer to Pr. 72.
z
Cooling fan operati on selection (Pr. 244)
Pr. 244 "cooling fan operation selection"
You can control the operation of the cooling fan built in the inverter (200V class, 1.5K or more).
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
244 0 0, 1
<Setting>
Setting Description
0 Operated at power on (independently of whether the i nverter is running or at a stop).
1Cooling fan on-of f control valid
(The cooling f an i s always on while the inverter is runni ng. During a stop, the inverter s tatus
is monitored and the f an switches on-of f according to temperature.)
<Reference>
In either of the following cases, fan operation is regar ded as faulty, [FN] is shown on the operation panel, and
the fan fault (FAN) and light fault (LF) signals are output. Use Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (multi-function outputs) to
allocate the terminals used to output the FAN and LF signals.
1) Pr. 244 = "0"
When the fan comes to a stop with power on.
2) Pr. 244 = "1"
When the fan stops during the fan ON command while the inverter is running, or when the fan starts
during the fan OFF command.
Note: When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be
affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.
PARAMETERS
152
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration
time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
Pr. 110 "third acceleration/deceleration
time"
Pr. 111 "third deceleration time"
Related parameters
z
Stop selection (Pr. 250)
Pr. 250 "stop selection"
Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal (STF/STR)
switches off.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
250 9999 0 to 100 s, 9999
(1) Pr. 250 = "9999"
When the start signal switches off, the motor is decelerated to a stop.
Time
ON OFF
DC brake
St art si gn al
Output
frequency Decelerated when start signal switches off.
Deceleration time (time set in Pr. 8, etc.
)
(2) Pr. 250 = other than "9999"
The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has elapsed after the start signal had switched off. The
motor coasts to a stop.
OFF
OFF
Start signal
Output
frequency
RUN signal
Time
Output is shut off when time set in Pr. 250 has
elapsed after start signal had switched off.
Motor coasts to a stop.
Note: 1. The RUN signal switches off when the output stops.
2. When the start signal is switched on again during motor coasting, the motor starts at 0Hz.
PARAMETERS
153
Pr. 73 "0 to 5V, 0 to 10V selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 251 "Output phase failure protection selection"
You can make invalid the output phase f ailure pr otection ( E.LF) f unc tion which st ops the inver ter output if one
of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) becomes open.
Parameter
Number Setting Range Minimum
Setting
Increments Fact ory Setting Description
251 0, 1 1 1 0: Wit hout output phase failure protec t i on
1: Wit h out put phase fail ure prot ection
Pr. 252 "override bias"
Pr. 253 "override gain"
You can extend the 50% to 150% override range (to 0% to 200%) , which is covered when Pr. 73 "0 to 5V, 0
to 10V selection" is used to select the override, and set the override value as desired.
Parameter Number Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments Fact ory Setting
252 0 t o 200% 0.1% 50%
253 0 t o 200% 0.1% 150%
Override value (%)
Pr. 252
0V 2.5V
(5V) 5V
(10V)
0
50
100
150
200
Factory setting
(50% to 150%)
Voltag e across 2-5
Pr. 253
PARAMETERS
154
Pr. 12 "DC dynamic brake voltage"
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency"
Related parameters
z
Power failure-t ime decel eration-to-stop f unction (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266)
Pr. 261 "power failure stop selection"
Pr. 262 "subtracted frequency at deceleration
start"
Pr. 263 "subtraction starting frequency"
Pr. 264 "power-failure deceleration time 1"
Pr. 265 "power-failure deceleration time 2"
Pr. 266 "power-failure deceleration time switch-over frequency"
When an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop.
z
Remove the jumpers from across terminals R-R1 <L1-L11> and terminals S-S1 <L2-L21> and connect
terminal R1 <L11> to terminal P <+> and terminal S1 <L21> to terminal N <->.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
261 0 0, 1
262 3Hz 0 t o 20Hz
263 60Hz 〈50Hz〉0 to 120Hz, 9999
264 5 s 0 to 3600/ 0 t o 360 s
265 9999 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s, 9999
266 60Hz 〈50Hz〉0 to 400Hz
Pr.262 Pr.264
Pr.265
Pr.266
Time
Power supply
Output frequency
S
witch-over freq uency
Subtracted frequency Power-failure deceleration time 1
Power-failure deceleration time 2
<Setting>
Parameter
Number Setting Description
0Coasting t o stop
When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the inverter output i s shut of f .
261 1 When undervolt age or power fail ure occurs, t he i nverter is decel erated to a stop.
262 0 to 20Hz Normall y, operat i on can be perform ed with the factory setting unc hanged. The frequenc y can
be adjusted withi n the range 0 to 20Hz according t o the load speci fications (inertia m oment,
torque).
0 to 120Hz
If the output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure is equal to or greater
than the frequency set in Pr. 263, deceleration starts at the value found by subtracting the
frequency set in Pr. 262 from the output frequency at that time. If the output frequency at
occurrence of undervoltage or power failure is less than the frequency set in Pr. 263, the
inverter is decelerated to a s top, starting at the out put frequency at t hat time.
263
9999 The inverter is decelerat ed to a s top, s tart ing at t he value f ound by subt ract ing t he frequenc y
set in P r. 262 from the output frequency at occ urrence of undervoltage or power failure.
Pr. 21 = 0 0 to 3600 s
264 Pr. 21 = 1 0 to 360 s Set a deceleration slope down to the frequency set in Pr. 266. Set the s lope in term s of tim e
required for deceleration from the f requency set in Pr. 20 to 0Hz.
Pr. 21 = 0 0 to 3600 s
Pr. 21 = 1 0 to 360 s Set a deceleration slope below the frequency set in Pr. 266. Set the slope in terms of tim e
required for deceleration from the f requency set in Pr. 20 to 0Hz.
265 9999 Same slope as i n P r. 264
266 0 to 400Hz Set the frequency at which the deceleration slope is is switched from the Pr. 264 setting to
the Pr. 265 setting.
PARAMETERS
155
Note: 1. This function is invalid when the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is
activated.
2. If (output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure) minus (frequency set in
Pr. 263) is negative, the calculation result is regarded as 0Hz.
3. The power failure stop function is not activated during a stop or error.
4. If power is restored during deceleration, the inverter is kept decelerating to a stop.
To restart, switch off the start signal once, then switch it on again.
5. When the high power factor converter is used (Pr. 30 = 2), this function is made invalid.
CAUTION
If power-failure deceleration operation is set , some loads may cause t he inverter to trip and
the motor to coast.
If enough regenerative energy is not given by the mot or , the motor will coast .
PARAMETERS
156
Pr. 271 "high-speed setting maximum
current"
Pr. 272 "mid-speed setting minimum
current"
Pr. 273 "current averaging range"
Pr. 274 "current averaging filter
constant"
Pr. 275 "stop-on-contact exciting current
low-speed multiplying factor"
Pr. 276 "stop-on-contact PWM carrier
frequency"
Related parameters
z
Stop-on-contact, load torque high-speed f requency select ion (Pr. 270)
Pr. 270 "stop-on-contact, load torque
high-speed frequency selection"
To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit etc of a lift, stop-on-contact control causes a mechanical
brake to be closed while the motor is developing a holding torque to keep the load in contact with a
mechanical stopper etc.
This function suppresses vibration which is liable to occur when the load is stopped upon contact in vertical
motion applications, ensuring steady precise positioning.
Load torque high-speed f requency control autom atically sets the max imum operating f requency acc ording to
the load.
Specific ally, the weight of the load is determined after a s tart by the average current at a given time; when the
load is light, the preset frequency can be increased for operation.
When the load is light, speed can be automatically increased in a sky parking lot, for example, to reduce
incoming and outgoing times.
z
Using Pr. 270, select stop-on-contact control and/or high-speed frequency control (control which
automatically switches between high- and middle-speed operations according to load torque).
· When stop-on-contact control is selected, select advanced magnetic flux vector control. For function
details, refer to Pr. 275 and Pr. 276.
· For function details of load torque high-speed frequency control, refer to Pr. 271 to Pr. 274.
Parameter
Number Factory
Setting Setting Range Descript i on
0 Wit hout stop-on-c ont act cont rol and l oad t orque hi gh-speed frequency c ont rol
1 Stop-on-contact control
2 Load torque high-speed frequency c ont rol
270 0
3 Stop-on-contact control and load t orque hi gh-speed frequency control
PARAMETERS
157
Pr. 4 "multi-seed setting (high speed)"
Pr. 5 "multi-seed setting (middle
speed)"
Pr. 6 "multi-seed setting (low speed)"
Pr. 59 "remote setting function
selection"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection)
Related parameters
z
High-speed frequency cont rol (Pr. 271 to Pr. 274)
Pr. 271 "high-speed setting maximum current"
Pr. 272 "mid-speed setting minimum current"
Pr. 273 "current averaging range"
Pr. 274 "current averaging filter constant"
z
Used to set the curr ent, averaging range, etc. required when "2" or "3" is set in Pr. 270 to s elect load torque
high-speed frequency control.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
271 50% 0 to 200%
272 100% 0 to 200%
273 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999
274 16 1 to 4000 The lif t wi th a light load or wit hout
a load is m oved faster than t he
lift with a load.
(The ou tput frequency is increased.)
<With high-speed frequency control>
<Without high-speed frequency control>
Whether there i s a load or
not, the lift i s m oved vert ically
at the same speed.
Light
Faster
<Wiring example>
· Sink logic
· Pr. 186 = 19
R 〈L1〉U
S 〈L2〉V
T 〈L3〉W
MC
STF
SD
NFB
Motor
Power supply
200 to 230VAC or 380 to 480VAC
Start signal
Load torque high-speed
frequenc y fu nction selectio n CS (Note)
Mechanical
bra ke
Note: The input signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings.
PARAMETERS
158
<Operation example>
CS
STF (STR) OFF
ON
Pr.5
Pr.4
Pr.5
A
× Pr.5
1
2 × Pr.5
1
2
B
Terminal
Less than 1/2 rated
current and driven load Not less than rated current
or regenerati ve load
· When operation is performed with X19 (load detection high-speed frequency function selection) signal on,
the inverter automatically varies the maximum frequency between Pr. 4 “multi-speed setting (high speed)”
and Pr. 5 "multi-speed setting (middle speed)" settings as shown below according to the average current
flowing during acceleration from the frequency half of the Pr. 5 setting to the frequency set in Pr. 5.
Example: 1. If the average current is not more than half of the rated inverter current, the maximum
frequency is the value set in Pr. 4 as shown in operation example A.
2. If the average curr ent is not les s than the rated inverter curr ent, the maxim um f requency is the
value set in Pr. 5 as shown in operation example B.
Pr.4
(120Hz)
Pr.5
(60Hz)
Pr.271
(50%) Pr.272
(100%) Averag e curren
t
Frequency
<In this example, the frequency varies according to the cur rent; 60Hz for 100% cur rent
and 120Hz for 50% current.>
<Setting>
1) Set "2 or 3" in Pr. 270.
2) Assign X19 (load detection high-speed frequency function selection) to the input terminal using any of
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186.
3) Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number Name Setting Description
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 0 t o 400Hz Set the higher-speed f requenc y.
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 0 to 400Hz Set the lower-speed frequency.
271 Hi gh-speed setti ng maximum current 0 to 200%
272 Mid-speed setti ng minimum current 0 to 200% Set t he upper and l ower limits of the c urrent at hi gh and middle
speeds.
0 to 400Hz (Average c urrent duri ng acc elerati on from (P r. 273 × 1/2) Hz t o
(Pr. 273) Hz c an be achieved.
273 Current averaging range 9999 Average current during acceleration from (Pr. 5 × 1/2) Hz to
(Pr. 5) Hz is achieved.
274 Current averaging filt er constant 1 to 4000
Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the
output current.
(The time constant [ms] is 0.75 × Pr. 274 and the factory
setting is 12ms.) A larger setting provides higher stability but
poorer response.
PARAMETERS
159
Note: 1. This function is only valid in the external operation m ode. This function is not activated when "1"
or "2" (remote setting function) is selected for Pr. 59.
2. If the current averaging zone includes the low output region, the output current may increase in
the constant-output region. W hen the current is low, the running f requency increases, increasing
the deceleration time.
3. The maximum output frequency is 120Hz. If its setting exceeds 120Hz, the output frequency is
120Hz.
4. The fast-response current limit function is invalid.
5. Can be activated at every start.
6. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be
affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
CAUTION
W hen the load is light, the motor may accelerate suddenly up to 120Hz, causing hazardous
conditions. Provide sufficient int erlocks on the machine side before start ing operation.
z
Set frequency reference table for load torque high-speed frequency control
The following table lists the frequencies set when the load torque high-speed frequency control signal (X19)
and multi-speed terminals (RH, RM, RL) are selected together:
Input Si gnal s
X19 RH RM RL S et Frequency
{
Conform s to load torque high-s peed frequency control .
{
Speed 1 (high speed) Pr. 4
{
Speed 2 (mi ddl e speed) Pr. 5
{
Speed 3 (low speed) Pr. 6
{{
Speed 1 (high speed) Pr. 4
{{
Speed 2 (mi ddl e speed) Pr. 5
{{
Speed 3 (low speed) Pr. 6
{{
Speed 6 Pr. 26
{{
Speed 5 Pr. 25
{{
Speed 4 Pr. 24
{{{
Speed 6 Pr. 26
{{{
Speed 4 Pr. 24
{{{
Speed 7 Pr. 27
{{ {
Speed 5 Pr. 25
{{{ {
Speed 7 Pr. 27
Setti ng using terminal 2, 1, 4, JOG
{
indicates that the signal is on.
Note: 1. Assum es that the external operation c omm and mode is s elected and the remote s etting function
is not selected.
2. Multi-speeds override the main speeds (across terminals 2-5, 4-5, 1-5).
3. When the 12-bit digital speed input (option FR-A5AX) is selected, the above list is invalid.
(The 12-bit digital speed input has the highest priority.)
4. Jog operation overrides the above list.
PARAMETERS
160
z
Function list (The following specifications apply to the external operation mode.)
Pr. 270 Set ting Load Torque High-Speed
Frequency Control Stop-On-Contact Control Multi -Speeds (7 speeds )
0××
{
1×
{{
2
{
×
{
3
{{{
{
: Indicates that the function is valid.
z
Restrictions when 1 to 3 are selected for Pr. 270
Under the following conditions, the functions of Pr. 270 settings "1 to 3" are made invalid:
· PU operation
· Programmed operation
· PU + external combined
· PID control
· Remote setting function mode
· Orientation control (option FR-A5AP)
· Jog operation (common to PU and external operations)
PARAMETERS
161
Pr. 4 "multi-seed setting (high speed)"
Pr. 5 "multi-seed setting (middle speed)"
Pr. 6 "multi-seed setting (low speed)"
Pr. 48 "second stall prevention
operation current"
Pr. 72 "PWM carrier frequency"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal
function selection)
Pr. 270 "stop-on-contact, load torque
high-speed frequency selection"
Related parameters
z
Stop on contact (Pr. 275, Pr. 276)
Pr. 275 "stop-on-contact exciting current
low-speed multiplying factor"
Pr. 276 "stop-on-contact PWM carrier
frequency"
z
Set "1 or 3" (stop-on-contact control) in Pr. 270. Also advanced magnetic flux vector control must be
selected.
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Set ting Range
270 0 0, 1, 2, 3,
275 9999 0 to 1000%, 9999
276 9999 0 to 15, 9999
Lift
<Without stop-on-contact control> <With stop-on-contact control
>
Vibration Complete stop
Lift
<Wiring and operation examples>
· Sink logic
NFB
R 〈L1〉
S 〈L2〉
T 〈L3〉
STF
RH
RM
RL
RT
SD
U
V
W
MC
Motor
Power supply
200-230VAC
or 380-480VAC
Stop-on-contact selection 2
Start signal
Multi-speed selection 1
Multi-speed selection 2
Stop-on-contact selection 1
Mechanical
brake
(a) (b) (c)
Time
Pr.4
RH ON
OFF
RM ON
OFF
RL ON
OFF
RT ON
OFF
Pr.5
Pr.6
Output
frequency
0
Ordinary mode Stop-on-contact control
Goes into stop-on-contact control mode when both
RL and RT switch on.
Note: (RL and RT may be switched on in any order with
any time difference.)
(a) Acceleration time (Pr. 7)
(b) Deceleration time (Pr. 8)
(c) Second deceleration time (Pr. 44)
Note: The input signal terminals used depend on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings.
W hen both the RT and RL terminals are switched on, the inverter enters the s top-on-contact m ode, in which
operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 6 "multi-speed setting (low speed)" independently of the
preceding speed.
PARAMETERS
162
Note: 1. By increasing the Pr. 275 setting, the low-speed (stop-on-contact) torque increases, but the
overcurrent alarm (E.OCT) may occur or the machine may oscillate in a stop-on-contact state.
2. The s top-on- contac t f unc tion is dif f er ent f rom the ser vo lock func tion, and if us ed to s top or hold a
load for an extended period, the function can cause the motor to overheat. After a stop,
immediately reset this function and use a mechanical brake to hold the load.
3. Under the following operating conditions, the stop-on-contact function is made invalid:
· PU operation
· Programmed operation
· PU + external operation
· PID control function operation
· Remote setting function operation
· Orientation control function operation
· Jog operation
<Setting>
1) Select advanced magnetic flux vector control and set "1" or "3" in Pr. 270.
2) Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number Name Setting Description
6Multi-speed s etting (low
speed) 0 to 400Hz
Set the output frequency for stop-on-c ont act cont rol .
The frequency shoul d be as low as possibl e (about 2Hz). If i t is set
to more t han 30Hz, the operating frequency will be 30Hz.
When stop-on-contact control is t o be exercised during PLG
feedback c ontrol, PLG f eedback cont rol i s made inval i d when the
inverter enters the stop-on-c ontact control mode.
48 Second stall prevention
operation current 0 to 200% Set the s tall prevention operation for st op-on-contact control.
0 to 1000% Usuall y s et a value between 130% and 180%.
Set the force (holding t orque) f or stop-on-cont act control .
275 Stop-on-contact exciti ng
current low-speed
multiplying factor 9999 No compensat i on
0 to 15 S et a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-cont act cont rol .
(Valid at the frequency of 3Hz or l e ss)
276 Stop-on-contact PWM
carrier frequenc y 9999 Conform s to the Pr. 72 " PWM carrier frequenc y selecti on" .
· Function switch-over when stop-on-contact control is selected
Operation Mode (External) Ordinary Operati on Stop-on-Contact Cont rol
RL RT RL RTRL, RT terminals
Main functi on Ei t her i s OFF ON ON Remarks
Output f requency for a
stop on c ont act
Multi-speeds
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V
4 to 20mA Pr. 6 "low-speed frequenc y"
Stall prevention operation
level Pr. 22 (stall prevention
operation level) Pr. 48 (s econd stall prevention operation
current)
When RL and RT are on,
Pr. 49 (second stall prevention
operation frequency) is inval i d .
Exciting c urrent low-speed
multiplying factor
The current is com pens ated for by the
multiplying fac tor (0 to 1000%) set in
Pr. 275 before RL and RT are switched
on.
Carrier frequency Pr. 72 "PWM frequency
selection"
(0 to 15)
Pr. 276 (stop-on-contact PWM carrier
frequency)
(0 to 15, 9999)
Fast-res pons e current limit Yes No
PARAMETERS
163
Frequencies set in stop-on-contact control (Pr. 270 = 1 or 3) (In external operation mode)
The f ollowing table lists the frequenc ies set when the input term inals (RH, RM, RL, RT, JOG) are selec ted
together.
Input Si gnal s
RH RM RL RT JOG Set Frequency
Stop-on-
Contact
Control
Function
Remarks
{
Speed 1 (high speed) P r. 4
{
Speed 2 (mi ddl e speed) Pr. 5
{
Speed 3 (low speed) Pr. 6
{
Accordi ng to 0-5V, 0-10V, 4-20mA
{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{
Speed 6 Pr. 26 Middle speed when
Pr. 26 = 9999
{{
Speed 5 Pr. 25 Low speed when Pr. 25 = 9999
{{
Speed 1 (high speed) P r. 4
{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{
Speed 4 Pr. 24 Low speed when Pr. 24 = 9999
{{
Speed 2 (mi ddl e speed) Pr. 5
{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{
Speed 3 (low speed, stop-on-contac t
frequency) Pr. 6
~
{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{ {
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{{
Speed 3 (low speed, stop-on-contac t
frequency) Pr. 6
~
{{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{{
Speed 3 (low speed, stop-on-contac t
frequency) Pr. 6
~
{{ {
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{ {
Speed 6 Pr. 26 Middle speed when
Pr. 26 = 9999
{{{
Speed 7 Pr. 27 Low speed when Pr. 27 = 9999
{{{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{ {{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{ {{
Jog frequency P r. 15
{{{ {
Jog frequency P r. 6
{{{{
Speed 3 (low speed, stop-on-contac t
frequency) Pr. 6
~
{{{{{
Jog frequency P r. 15
Accordi ng to 0-5V, 0-10V, 4-20mA
*
~
indicat es that the function i s selected.
Note: 1.
{
indicates that the signal is on.
2. Indicates that the remote setting function is not selected. (The remote setting function disables
stop-on-contact control.)
3. The selection of the 12-bit digital speed input FR-A5AX (option) makes the above list invalid.
Note that when both RL and RT are on, the frequency is as set in Pr. 6 and stop-on-contact
control is exercised.
4. The jog frequency has the highest priority.
5. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be
affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
PARAMETERS
164
Pr. 60 "intelligent mode selection"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal
function selection)
Pr. 190 to Pr. 195
(output terminal function selection)
Related parameters
z
Brake sequence functi on (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285)
Pr. 278 "brake opening frequency"
Pr. 279 "brake opening current"
Pr. 280 "brake opening current detection time"
Pr. 281 "brake operation time at start"
Pr. 282 "brake operation frequency"
Pr. 283 "brake operation time at stop"
Pr. 284 "deceleration detection function selection"
Pr. 285 "overspeed detection frequency"
This function is used to output from the inver ter the mechanical br ake opening completion signal timing signal
in vertical lift and other applications.
This function prevents the load from dropping with gravity at starting due to the operation timing fault of the
mechanical brake or an overcurrent alarm from occurring at a stop, ensuring secure operation.
z
The mechanical brake opening completion signal may either be entered or not entered into the inverter.
z
This function is only valid when "7" or "8" is set in Pr. 60 to select brake sequence mode. (With the
exception of Pr. 285)
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
278 3Hz 0 to 30Hz
279 130% 0 to 200%
280 0.3 sec 0 t o 2 sec
281 0.3 sec 0 t o 5 sec
282 6Hz 0 to 30Hz
283 0.3 sec 0 t o 5 sec
284 0 0, 1
285 9999 0 to 30Hz, 9999
<Wiring example>
· Sink logic
· Pr. 184 = 15
· Pr. 190 = 20
R 〈L1〉U
S 〈L2〉V
T 〈L3〉W
MC
STF
RH
SD SE
MC MC
DC24V
*
NFB
Brake opening request signal (BOF signal)
*Note the permissible current of the
inverter's internal transistor.
(24VDC 0.1A)
Start signal
Multi-speed signal
Brake opening completion signal
(Note 2) RUN
AU (Note 1)
Mechanical
brake
Motor
(BRI signal)
Note: 1. The input signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings.
2. The output signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 settings.
PARAMETERS
165
<Operation example>
z
At start: When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running. When the output frequency
reaches the value set in Pr. 278 and the output current is not les s than the value set in Pr . 279, the inverter
outputs the brake opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 280 has elapsed.
When the time set in Pr. 281 elapses after the brake opening completion signal (BRI) was activated, the
inverter increases the output frequency to the set speed.
z
At stop: W hen the speed has decreased to the frequency set in Pr. 282, the brake opening request signal
(BOF) is switched off. When the time set in Pr. 283 elapses after the brake operation confirmation
signal (BRI) was activated, the inverter output is switched off.
* If Pr. 60 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input), this time is the time after the
brake opening request signal is output.
1) Pr. 60 = "7" (brake opening completion signal input)
STF
ON
ON
Pr.280Pr.278
Pr.13 Pr.283
Pr.278Pr.282
Pr.283
ON
Pr.279
Time
Target
frequency
Output frequency
Output current
Brake opening request
(BOF signal)
Brake opening completion
(BRI signal)
Electromagnetic brake operation Closed Opened Closed
2) Pr. 60 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input)
STF
ON
ON
Pr.280Pr.278
Pr.13 Pr.281
Pr.278Pr.282
Pr.283
Pr.279
Time
Target
frequency
Output frequency
Output current
Brake opening requ est
(BOF signal)
Electromagnetic brake operation Closed Opened Closed
PARAMETERS
166
<Setting>
(1) Parameter setting
1) Select advanced magnetic flux vector control. (Pr. 80, Pr. 81 •"9999")
2) Set "7 or 8" (brake sequence mode) in Pr. 60.
To ensure more complete sequence control, it is recommended to set "7" (brake opening completion signal
input) in Pr. 60. Note that the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is not activated
when the brake sequence mode is selected.
3) Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number Name Setting Description
278 Brake opening
frequency 0 to 30Hz Set t o the rated sli p f requency of the motor + about 1. 0Hz.
This parameter m a y onl y be set if Pr. 278 ≤ P r. 282.
279 Brak e openi ng current 0 t o 200% Generall y, set this parameter to about 50 to 90% . If the setting is too
low, the load is liable t o drop with gravity at s t art.
Suppose that the rated invert er current is 100%.
280 Brake opening c urrent
detecti on time 0 to 2 s ec Generall y, set this parameter to about 0.1 t o 0. 3 seconds.
281 Brake operati on time
at start 0 to 5 sec Pr. 60 = 7: Set the mechanical del ay time unt i l the brake is l oosened.
Pr. 60 = 8: S et the m echanical delay time unt i l the brake is l oosened +
about 0.1-0.2 seconds.
282 Brake cl osing
frequency 0 to 30Hz At t hi s frequency, the brake opening request signal (B OF) i s switched
off. Generally, set this parameter to the Pr. 278 setting + 3-4Hz.
This parameter m a y onl y be set if Pr. 282 ≥ P r. 278.
283 Brake operati on time
at stop 0 t o 5 sec
Pr. 60 = 7: S et the m echanical delay time unt i l the brake is closed + 0.1
seconds.
Pr. 60 = 8: S et the m echanical delay time unt i l the brake is closed +
about 0.2 to 0.3 seconds .
0 Decel eration is not det ected.
284 Deceleration
detecti on function
selection 1If deceleration i s not norm al duri ng deceleration operati on, the
inverter alarm (E.MB2) is provided to shut off the output and switch off
the brake opening request signal (B OF).
0 to 30Hz If (detec ted frequency) - (output frequency) > Pr. 285 i n the PLG
feedback c ontrol mode, the inverter al arm (E.MB1) i s provided to shut off
the output and switch off t he brake opening request signal (BOF).
285 Overspeed detec t i on
frequency 9999 Overspeed i s not detec t ed.
Note: When using this function, set the acceleration time to 1 second or longer.
(2) Explanations of terminals used
The terminals must be allocated using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 195.
Brake Sequence Mode
Signal Terminals Us ed P r. 60 = 7 (with mechanical brake
opening completion s i gnal ) Pr. 60 = 8 (without mechanical
brake opening completi on signal)
BOF Ac cording to Pr. 180 t o Pr. 186 Brake opening request Brake opening reques t
BRI A ccording to Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 B rake opening com pl etion signal
Note: 1. The brake opening completion signal (BRI) is a parameter valid when Pr. 60 = 7.
2. W hen the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to 186 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other
functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making
settings.
PARAMETERS
167
(3) Protective functions
If any of the following errors occur in the brake sequence mode, the inverter results in an alarm, shuts off the
output and switches off the brake opening request signal (BOF terminal).
On the operation panel (FR-DU04) LED and parameter unit (FR-PU04) screen, the following errors are
displayed:
Error
Display Error Displa y
E.MB1 (Detected frequenc y) - (out put frequency) > Pr. 286 in t he P LG feedback c ont rol mode. (Overs peed detection f unction)
E.MB2 Deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation (Use Pr. 284 to select this function.) (Except stall prevention
operation)
E.MB3 Brake opening request si gnal (B OF) switched on though t he motor is at a stop. (Gravi ty drop prevention func tion)
E.MB4 More than 2 seconds after the run command (forward or reverse rotation) is input, the brake opening request signal
(BOF) does not switch on.
E.MB5 More than 2 seconds after the brake opening request signal switched on, the brake opening completion signal (BRI)
does not s witc h on.
E.MB6 Though the inverter had switched on t he brake openi ng request si gnal (BOF), the brak e opening com pl etion s ignal (B RI)
switched off during that peri od.
E.MB7 More than 2 seconds aft er the brake opening reques t signal (BOF) switc hed off at a stop, the brake opening com plet ion
signal (B RI ) does not switc h of f.
Note: During PLG f eedbac k c ontr ol (when the FR- A5AP option is loaded) , over speed detec tion ( Pr. 285) is
valid if the Pr. 60 setting is other than "7 or 8".
PARAMETERS
168
z
Droop control (Pr. 286, Pr. 287)
Pr. 286 "Droop gain"
Pr. 287 "Droop filter time constant"
This function balances the load in proportion to the load torque with or without PLG, and provides speed
drooping characteristics.
This is effective in balancing the load when using multiple inverters.
z
The output frequency is varied according to the amount of torque current during unbalanced flux vector
control and vector control.
The drooping amount at the rated torque is set by the droop gain as a percentage using the rated
frequency as a reference.
Droop compensation frequency = Amount of torque current after filtering
Rated current × Rated frequency × droop gain
100
z
Confirm the following items when using the droop control.
1. This function is valid when Pr. 286 ≠ "0" during unbalanced flux vector and vector control.
2. This function is valid when the operation state is constant speed operation.
3. The upper limit of the droop compensation frequency is 120Hz.
4. The rated current follows the value set in Pr. 9 "Motor rated current".
Parameter No. Name Set ting range Min. setting uni t Fac tory setti ng
286 Droop gain 0 to 100% 0.01% 0%
287 Droop filter time constant 0.00 to 1.00s 0.01s 0.3s
Droop gain
Torque
100%
Droop compensation frequency
Frequency
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set each parameter.
Param eter No. Details
286 Set the drooping amount at the rated torque as a percentage with respect to the rated
frequency.
When the setting value is "0", the function will be invalid (no droop control).
287 Set the time constant of the filter applied on the torque amount current.
PARAMETERS
169
Pr. 54 "FM terminal function selection"
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference"
Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection"
Related parameters
z
Meter (frequency meter) cali brat ion (Pr. 900, Pr. 901)
Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration"
Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration"
z
By using the operation panel/parameter unit, you can calibrate a meter connected to terminal FM to full
scale.
z
Terminal FM provides the pulse output. By setting Pr. 900, you can calibrate the meter connected to the
inverter from the parameter unit without providing a calibration resistor.
z
You can display a digital value on a digital counter using the pulse train s ignal f rom term inal F M. A 1440Hz
output is provided at the f ull scale value as explained in the s ection of Pr. 54. W hen the running f requency
has been selected for monitoring, the ratio of this FM terminal output frequency can be set in Pr. 55.
(–) (+)
1mA
DC8V
T2
T1
FM (AM)
SD (5)
(–) (+) 1440Hz FM (AM)
SD (5)
Note: The parameter is factory-set to 1mA full-scale or 1440Hz FM
output frequency at 60Hz.
Meter
1mA full scale
Analog meter
Pulse width T1
Pulse period T2
(Digital meter)
:Adjusted with Pr. 900
:Set in Pr. 55 (valid for frequency monitoring only)
z
Terminal AM is factory-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale state of each monitored data. Pr. 901
allows the output voltage ratio (gain) to be adjusted acc or ding to the meter reading. Note that the maximum
output voltage is 10VDC.
(1)Calibration of terminal FM
1) Connect a meter (frequency meter) across inverter terminals FM-SD. (Note the polarity. FM is the
positive terminal.)
2) When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the
resistor.
3) Set any of "1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18 and 21" in Pr. 54.
When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as the output signal, preset in
Pr. 55 or Pr. 56 the running frequency or current at which the output signal is 1440Hz.
At this 1440Hz, the meter normally deflects to full scale.
(2)Calibration of terminal AM
1) Connect a 0-10VDC meter (frequency meter) across inverter terminals AM-5. (Note the polarity. AM is
the positive terminal.)
2) Set any of "1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18 and 21" in Pr. 158.
When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as the output signal, preset in
Pr. 55 or Pr. 56 the running frequency or current at which the output signal is 10V.
3) W hen outputting a signal which cannot achieve a 100% value easily by operation, e.g. output current,
set "21" in Pr. 158 and perf orm the f ollowing operation. Af ter that, set "2" (output c urrent, for exam ple)
in Pr. 158.
PARAMETERS
170
<Operation procedure>
· When operation panel (FR-DU04) is used
8) Press the [STOP/RESET] key to stop the inverter.
1) Select the PU operation mode.
2) Set the running frequency.
3) Press the [SET] key.
4) Read Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration" or Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration".
5) Press the [FWD] key to run the inverter. (Motor need not be connected.)
7) Press the [SET] key for about 1.5 seconds.
6) Hold down the [UP/DOWN] key to adjust the meter pointer to the required position.
(Depending on the setting, the pointer may take some time to move.)
Note: 1. Pr. 900 is factory-set to 1mA full-scale or 1440Hz FM output frequency at 60Hz. The maximum
pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400Hz.
2. When a frequency m eter is connected ac ross term inals F M-SD to m onitor the running f requency,
the FM terminal output is filled to capacity at the fac tory setting if the m axim um output fr equency
reaches or exceeds 100Hz. In this case, the Pr. 55 setting must be changed to the maximum
frequency.
3. For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04), refer to the FR-PU04
instruction manual.
PARAMETERS
171
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency"
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Related parameters
z
Frequency setti ng vol tage (current) bias and gain (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905)
Pr. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias"
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"
Pr. 904 "frequency setting current bias"
Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain"
You can s et the output frequency as desired in relation to the f requency setting signal (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4
to 20mA DC).
The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship between the input signal entered from
outside the inverter to set the output frequency, e.g. 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mADC, and the output
frequency.
z
Use Pr. 902 to set the bias frequency at 0V.
z
Use Pr. 903 to set the output frequency relative to the frequency command voltage set in Pr. 73.
z
Use Pr. 904 to set the bias frequency at 4mA.
z
Use Pr. 905 to set the output frequency relative to the 20mA frequency command current (4 to 20mA).
Parameter
Number Fac t ory Setting Setting Range
902 0V 0Hz 0 t o 10V 0 to 60Hz
903 5V 60Hz 〈50Hz〉0 to 10V 1 to 400Hz
904 4mA 0Hz 0 to 20mA 0 to 60Hz
905 20mA 60Hz 〈50Hz〉0 to 20mA 1 to 400Hz
60Hz
〈50Hz〉
Pr.902
Pr.904
Pr.903
Pr.73
Pr.905
Gain
Output frequency (Hz)
Bias
Factory setting
Frequency setting signal
0
0
4
05V
10V
20mA
100%
<Setting>
(1) The frequency setting voltage biases and gains may be adjusted in either of the following three ways:
1) Any point can be adjusted with a voltage applied across terminals 2-5.
2) Any point can be adjusted with no voltage applied across terminals 2-5.
3) Bias voltage is not adjusted.
(2) The frequency setting current biases and gains may be adjusted in either of the following three ways:
1) Any point can be adjusted with a current flowing at terminal 4.
2) Any point can be adjusted with no current flowing at terminal 4.
3) Bias current is not adjusted.
PARAMETERS
172
<Adjustment procedure> Pr. 902 (Pr. 904) "frequency setting voltage (current) bias"
• When operation panel (FR-DU04) is used
Select the PU operation mode.
Read Pr. 902 (Pr. 904) value.
Press the [SET] key.
Using the [UP/DOWN] key, set the bias
frequency.
Press the [SET] key for about 1.5 seconds
The bias voltage (current) setting flickers.
Press the [SET] key.
The cursor moves to the next parameter.
Bias se tti ng complete.
(1) Any point is adjust ed with
a voltage (current) applied (2) Any point is adjusted with
no voltage (current) applied (3) Bias voltage (current)
is not adjusted.
Apply the bias voltage (current).
Press the [SE T] key for about 1.5 s econds.
The analog voltage (current) monitor value
across terminals 2(4)-5 is displayed.
Using the [UP/DOWN] key, set
the bias voltage (current) in %.
[0% for 0V (0mA), 100% for 5V
(10V, 20mA)]
When the [UP] or [DOWN] key
is pressed, the present setting is
displayed.
*Pr. 903 to Pr. 905 can also be adjusted similarly using the above procedure.
Note: 1. If the Pr. 903 or Pr. 905 (gain adjustment) value is changed, the Pr. 20 value does not change.
The input signal to terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the f requency setting
signal.
2. For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04), refer to the FR-PU04 instruction
manual.
PARAMETERS
173
CAUTION
Be careful when setting any value other than "0". Even without the speed command, the
motor will st ar t running at the set fr equency by merely switching on the star t signal.
z
Buzzer control (Pr. 990)
Pr. 990 "buzzer control"
You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press any key of the operation panel or parameter unit.
Parameter
Number Fac tory Sett i ng Setting Range Remarks
990 1 0, 1 0: Wi t hout beep, 1: Wi t h beep
5
CHAPTER 5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains the "protective functions" of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
5.1 Errors (Alarms) ........................................................174
5.2 Troubleshooting.......................................................179
5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection...........182
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION
CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS
CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 6 SPECIFICAT IONS
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS
APPENDICES
5.1 Errors (A larms)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
174
5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.1 Errors (alarms)
If any fault has occurred in the inverter, the corresponding protective function is activated and the error
(alarm ) indication appears autom atically on the PU display. W hen the pr otective func tion is activated, ref er to
"5.2 Troubleshooting" and clear up the cause by taking proper action. If an alarm stop has occurred, the
inverter must be reset to restart it.
5.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions
Operation
Panel
Display
(FR-DU04)
Parameter
Unit
(FR-PU04) Name Description
E.OC1 OC During
Acc During
acceleration
E.OC2 Stedy Spd
OC
During
constant
speed
E.OC3 OC During
Dec
During
deceleration
During stop
Overcurrent
shut-off
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately
200% of the rated current, the protective circuit is activated to stop the
inverter output.
E.OV1 OV During
Acc During
acceleration
E.OV2 Stedy Spd
OV
During
constant
speed
E.OV3 OV During
Dec
During
deceleration
During stop
Regenerative
overvoltage
shut-off
If regenerati ve energy f rom the running motor causes the inverter's
internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the spec i fied value,
the protective circ ui t is activated to s top the inverter out put.
This may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power
supply system .
E.THM Motor
Ovrload Motor
The electronic overcurrent protection in the inverter detects motor
overheat due to overload or cooling capability reduced during constant-
speed operation. When 85% of the preset value is reached, pre-alarm
(TH indication) occurs. When the specified value is reached, the
protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. W hen a special
motor such as a multi-pole motor or more than one motor is run, the
motor cannot be protected by the electronic overcurrent protection.
Provide a thermal relay i n the inverter output circ ui t.
E.THT Inv.
Overload
Overload
shut-off
(electronic
overcurrent
protection)
Inverter
If a current more t han 150% of the rated output current flows and
overcurrent s hut-off (OC) does not occur (200% or less), i nverse-time
charact eri s tics cause the electronic overc urrent protect i on t o be activated
to stop the inverter output. (Overload immunity: 150%, 60 seconds)
E.IPF Inst.Pwr.
Loss Ins t antaneous power failure
protection
If a power failure has occurred in excess of 15ms (this applies also to
inverter input s hut-off), this function is ac tivated to stop the invert er
output to prevent the cont rol c i rcuit from mi soperation. At this time, the
alarm output contacts are opened (ac ros s B-C) and closed (across A-C)
(Note 1). If a power failure persis ts for more than 100m s, the alarm
output is not provided, if the start signal is on at the time of power
restoration, the inverter will restart. (I f a power failure is instantaneous
within 15ms, the control circ ui t operates properly.)
E.UVT Under
Voltage Undervoltage protect i on
•If the inverter power supply voltage reduces , the control circuit will not
operate properly, res ul t i ng i n decreased m otor torque or increas ed
heat generation. To prevent this, if the power supply voltage reduces
below 150V (about 300V for t he 400V class), this function stops the
inverter output.
•When a jum per i s not connect ed across P-P 1 〈+ -P1〉, the undervol tage
protecti ve function i s activat ed.
E.FIN H/Sink
O/Temp Fi n overheat If the cooling fin overheats, the temperature sensor is activated to stop
the inverter out put.
FN Fan
Failure Fan fault
For the inverter which contains a cooling fan, FN is displayed on the
operation panel and the fan fault signal (FAN) and light fault signal (LF)
are output when the cooling fan stops due to a fault or operates
different l y f rom the s et ting of Pr. 244 " cooling fan operat i on selecti on" .
E. BE Br.Cct.
Fault Brake t ransistor al arm
detection
If the brake circui t fault has occurred due to damaged brake trans i stors,
etc., this function s tops the inverter output.
In this case, the inverter power must be s witched off i mm edi ately.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
175
Operation
Panel
Display
(FR-DU04)
Parameter
Unit
(FR-PU04) Name Description
E. GF Ground
Fault Output s i de ground fault
overcurrent protection
This function st ops the inverter out put if a ground faul t current flows due
to a ground fault occurring in t he i nverter's output (l oad) side when
starti ng the inverter. A ground fault occurring at low ground resis t ance
may ac tivate t he overcurrent protec tion (OC1 to OC3).
E.OHT OH Fault E xternal t hermal relay
operation (Note 3)
If the external thermal rel ay designed for m otor overheat protection or the
internally mounted temperature relay in the mot or switches on (relay
contac t s "open"), t he i nverter output can be stopped if those contacts
had been entered into t he i nverter. If the relay contacts are reset
automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
During accel eration
If a current m ore t han 150% (Not e 4) of t he rated invert er current fl ows in
the motor, this function lowers the frequency until the load current
reduces to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off.
W hen the load current has reduc ed below 150%, t his function increases
the frequency again to accelerate and operate the inverter up to the set
frequency.
During constant-speed
operation
If a current more than 150% (Note 4) of the rated inverter current flows in
the motor, this function lowers the frequency until the load current reduces
to prevent overcurrent shut-off. When the load current has reduced below
150%, this function increases the frequency up to the set value.
E.OLT
(When
stall
prevention
operation
has
reduced
the
running
frequency
to 0. OL
during stall
prevention
operation)
Stll Prev
STP
(OL shown
during stall
prevention
operation)
During decelerat i on
If the regenerative energy of the motor has increased above the brake
capability, this function increases the frequency to prevent overvoltage
shut-off. If a current more than 150% (Note 4) of the rated inverter
current flows in the motor, t his function i ncreases the frequency unt il the
load current reduc es to prevent the inverter f rom resulting in overcurrent
shut-off. When the load current has reduced below 150%, this function
decreases t he frequency again.
E.OPT Option
Fault Option alarm
•Stops t he i nverter output if the dedicat ed i nboard option used in t he
inverter resul t s in setting error or connection (connect or) fault.
•When the high power fact or converter connec tion is s el ec ted, this alarm
is dis pl ayed i f AC power is connected to R, S, T 〈L1, L2, L3〉.
E.OP1 to
OP3
Option sl ot
alarm
1 to 3 Option slot al arm Stops the inverter output if a functional fault (such as communication
error of the comm unicat ion option) oc curs in t he inboard option loaded i n
any slot.
E. PE Corrupt
Memry Parameter error Stops t he output if a f aul t occurs i n the E2PROM which stores parameter
settings.
E.PUE PU Leave
Out PU disc onnection
occurrence
This function st ops the inverter out put if comm uni cation between inverter
and PU is s uspended, e.g. the operation panel or parameter unit i s
disconnected, when "2", " 3" , "16" or "17" i s set in P r. 75 "reset
selection/PU disconnecti on detection/PU stop selection". This f unction
stops t he i nverter output if the number of successive communication
errors is greater than the number of perm i ssible retri es when Pr. 121
value is "9999" for RS-485 communi c ation from PU connector.
This function stops the inverter output if communication is broken for a
period of ti me set i n Pr. 122.
E.RET Retry No
Over Retry count exceeded If operat i on cannot be resumed within the number of retries set, t hi s
functi on stops t he i nverter output.
E.LF Open output phase
protection This func tion stops the i nverter output when any of the three phases (U,
V, W) on t he i nverter's output side (load side) opens.
E.CPU CPU Fault CPU error I f the arithmetic operation of the buil t-in CPU does not end withi n a
predeterm i ned peri od, the inverter sel f-determi nes it has an al arm and
stops t he output.
E.E6 CPU error CPU error If the arithmeti c operation of the peripheral circuit of t he bui l t-in CPU
does not end within a predet ermined period, the inverter sel f -determines
it as an al arm and stops the output .
E.E7 CPU error CPU error The inverter output i s stopped if a data error occurs in the peripheral
circuit of t he bui l t-in CPU.
E.P24 24VDC power output short
circuit
When 24VDC power output from the PC t erminal is shorted, t hi s funct i on
shuts of f the power output. A t this ti me, all external c ontact input s switch
off. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal. To reset,
use the operation panel or switch power off, then on again.
E.CTE Operation panel power short
circuit
When the operati on panel power (P5S of the PU connector) is shorted,
this f unction shuts off the power output. At t hi s time, the operati on panel
(paramet er uni t ) cannot be used and RS-485 communicat i on f rom the
PU connector cannot be made. To reset , enter the RES signal or switc h
power off, then on again.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
176
Operation
Panel
Display
(FR-DU04)
Parameter
Unit
(FR-PU04) Name Description
Brake res i stor overheat
protection
Inverters of 7.5K or less contain a brake res istor. W hen the regenerat ive
brake duty from the motor has reac hed 85% of the s pec i fied value,
pre-alarm (RB indication) occurs. If the specified value is exceeded, the
brake circuit operati on i s stopped temporarily to protect the brake resistor
from overheating. (If the brake is operated in this state, regenerative
overvoltage shut-off will occur.) W hen the brak e resistor has cooled, the
brake operation i s resum ed.
E.MB1 to
MB7 Brak e sequence error This function s tops the inverter output if a sequence error occ urs during
the use of the brake sequenc e function (P r. 278 to Pr. 285).
Err Error T he i nverter output is stopped if a malfunction occ urs in the built-in CPU.
Note: 1. If Pr. 195 (A, B, C terminal function selection) is as set in the factory.
2. The terminals used must be allocated using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195.
3. External thermal relay operation is only activated when "OH" is set in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
(input terminal function selection).
4. Indicates that the stall prevention operation level has been set to 150% (factory setting). If this
value is changed, stall prevention is operated at the new value.
5. Resetting method
When the protective function is activated and the inverter stops its output (the motor is coasted to
a stop), the inverter is kept stopped. Unless reset, the inverter cannot restart. To reset the
inverter, use any of the following methods: switch power off once, then on again; short reset
terminal RES-SD for more than 0.1 second, then open; press the [RESET] key of the parameter
unit (use the help function of the parameter unit). If RES-SD is kept shorted, the operation panel
will show "Err." or the parameter unit will show that the inverter is being reset.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
177
zTo know the operating status at the occurrence of an alarm
When any alarm has occurred, the display automatically switches to the indication of the corresponding
protective function (err or). By press ing the [MODE] key at this point without resetting the inverter, the display
shows the output fr equency. In this way, it is pos sible to know the running f requency at the occurrence of the
alarm. It is also possible to know the current in the same manner. However, these values are not stored in
memory and are erased when the inverter is reset.
5.1.2 Correspondences between digital and actual characters
There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital
characters displayed on the operation panel:
Actual Digital Actual Digital Actual Digital
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
L
M
N
O
P
T
U
V
r
-
o
S
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
178
5.1.3 Alarm code output
By setting Pr . 76 "alarm c ode output se lect ion", an alarm def inition c an be output as a 4- bit digital s ignal. This
signal is output from the open collector output terminals equipped as standard on the inverter.
Correlations between alarm definitions and alarm codes are as follows.
Output Terminal Signal On-OffOperation Panel
Display
(FR-DU04) SU IPF OL FU Alarm Code Alarm Output (ac ross B-C)
E.OC1 0 0 0 1 1
E.OC2 0 0 1 0 2
E.OC3 0 0 1 1 3 Provided (Open)
E.OV1
E.OV2
E.OV3 0 1 0 0 4 Provi ded (Open)
E.THM 0 1 0 1 5
E.THT 0 1 1 0 6 Provided (Open)
E.IPF 0 1 1 1 7 Provided (Open)
E.UVT 1 0 0 0 8 Provided (Open)
E.FIN 1 0 0 1 9 Provided (Open)
E. BE 1 0 1 0 A Provi ded (Open)
E. GF 1 0 1 1 B Provided (Open)
E.OHT 1 1 0 0 C Provided (Open)
E.OLT 1 1 0 1 D Not provided (Provi ded when OLT
is dis pl ayed) (Open)
E.OPT 1 1 1 0 E Provided (Open)
E.OP1 to E.OP3 1 1 1 0 E Provi ded (Open)
E. PE Provided (Open)
E.PUE Provided (Open)
E.RET Provided (Open)
E.LF Provided (Open)
E.CPU Provided (Open)
E.E6 Provided (Open)
E.E7
1111 F
Provided (Open)
(Note) 0: Output transistor OFF, 1: Output transistor ON (common terminal SE)
The alarm output assumes that Pr. 195 setting is "99" (factory setting).
5.1.4 Resetting the inverter
The inverter can be reset by perform ing any of the following operations. Note that the electronic overcurrent
protection's internal heat calculation value and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the
inverter.
Operation 1: Using the operation panel (FR-DU04), press the [RESET] key to reset the inverter.
Operation 2: Switch power off once, then switch it on again.
Operation 3: Switch on the reset signal (RES).
5.2 Troubleshooting
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
179
5.2 Troubleshooting
If any function of the inverter is lost due to occurrence of a fault, clear up the cause and make correction in
accordance with the following procedures. Contact your sales representative if the corresponding fault is not
found below, the inverter has failed, parts have been damaged, or any other fault has occurred.
5.2.1 Checking the operation panel display at alarm stop
The alarm code is displayed on the operation panel to indicate the cause of a faulty operation. Clear up the
cause and take proper action in accordance with the following table:
Fault Rank
Operation Panel
Display Check Point Remedy Major Minor
E.OC1 Accelerati on t oo fast?
Check f or out put short c i rcuit or ground fault. Increase accelerat i on time.
{
E.OC2 Sudden load change?
Check f or out put short c i rcuit or ground fault. Keep load s table.
{
E.OC3 Deceleration too f ast?
Check f or out put short c i rcuit or ground fault.
Mechanical brak e of mot or operating too fas t? I ncrease deceleration time.
Check brak e operat i on.
{
E.OV1 Accel eration too fast? Increase acc el erat i on time.
{
E.OV2 Sudden load change? Keep load stable.
{
E.OV3 Deceleration too fast ? Increase deceleration t i me. (Set
decelerati on t i me which m atches load
GD2.)
Reduce braking duty.
{
E.THM
E.THT Motor used under overload? Reduc e l oad.
Increase motor and inverter capacities.
{
E.IPF Check t he c ause of instantaneous power
failure. Rest ore power.
{
E.UVT Large-capacity motor started?
Jum per or DC reactor connected across
term i nal s P-P1 (+ -P1)?
Check power syst em equipment such as
power supply.
Connect jumper or DC reactor across
term i nal s P-P1 (+ -P1).
{
E.FIN Ambient t emperature t oo hi gh? Set ambient temperature withi n
specifications.
{
E. BE Correct brak e duty? Change inverter.
{
E. GF Check motor and cables for ground fault. Res ol ve ground f aul ts.
{
E.OHT Check motor for overheat. Reduce load and frequency of operation.
{
E.OLT Motor used under overload? Reduc e l oad.
Increase motor and inverter capacities.
{
E.OPT Check for loos e connectors . Connect securely
{
E.OP1 to E.OP3 Option function set ting or operation proper?
(1 to 3 indic at es the option slot numbers.) Check the option function sett i ng, etc.
{
E. PE Number of parameter write ti mes too many? Change inverter.
{
E.PUE DU or PU fitted securely? Fit DU or PU securely.
{
E.RET Check the cause of retry fail ure. Correct retry problem.
{
E.LF Check for open out put phase. Repair open phase.
{
E.CPU Check f or l oose connect ors. Change inverter.
Connect s ec urel y.
{
E.E6 Chec k for loose c onnectors. Change inverter.
Connect s ec urel y.
{
E.E7 Chec k for loose c onnectors. Change inverter.
Connect s ec urel y.
{
Err Check for loose connectors. Change inverter.
Connect s ec urel y.
{
E.P24 Check PC termi nal output for short. Repair short.
{
E.CTE Check PU c onnector cable for short. Check PU and c abl e.
{
FN Cooling fan normal? Change fan.
{
E.MB1 to MB7 Check brake s equenc e. Change brake sequence.
{
PS STOP key of operation panel pressed during
external operation to s top? Check load st at us.
For clearing method, ref er to page 96.
RB B rak e resistor used too often? Increase deceleration t i me.
TH Load too large? S udden accelerati on? Reduce load amount or frequency of
running.
OL Motor used under overload?
Sudden decelerat i on?
oL: Overvol t age stall
OL: Overcurrent s tall
Lighten load.
Reduce frequency of braking.
z
When the protective function is activated, take proper corrective action, reset the inverter, then resume
operation.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
180
5.2.2 Faults and check points
POINT: Check the corr esponding areas . If the caus e is s till unknown, it is r ecom m ended to initialize the
parameters (return to factory settings), re-set the required parameter values, and check again.
(1) Motor remains stopped.
1) Check the main circuit
· Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel display is provided).
· Check that the motor is connected properly.
2) Check the input signals
· Check that the start signal is input.
· Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input.
· Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero.
· Check that the AU signal is on when the frequency setting signal is 4 to 20mA.
· Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on.
· Check that the CS signal is not off when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is
selected (Pr. 57 = other than "9999").
3) Check the parameter settings
· Check that the reverse rotation prevention (Pr. 78) is not selected.
· Check that the operation mode (Pr. 79) setting is correct.
· Check that the bias and gain (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905) settings are correct.
· Check that the starting frequency (Pr. 13) setting is not greater than the running frequency.
· Check that various operational functions (such as three-speed operation), especially the maximum
frequency (Pr. 1), are not zero.
4) Check the load
· Check that the load is not too heavy.
· Check that the shaft is not locked.
5) Others
· Check that the ALARM lamp is not lit.
· Check that the Pr. 15 "jog frequency" setting is not lower than the Pr. 13 "starting frequency " value.
(2) Motor rotates in opposite direction.
· Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct.
· Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected properly.
(3) Speed greatly differs from the setting.
· Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal level.)
· Check that the following parameter settings are proper: Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr. 19.
· Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise. (Use shielded cables)
· Check that the load is not too heavy .
(4) Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth.
· Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short.
· Check that the load is not too heavy .
· Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112) setting is not too large to activate the stall
function.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
181
(5) Motor current is large.
· Check that the load is not too heavy.
· Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112) setting is not too large.
(6) Speed does not increase.
· Check that the maximum frequency (Pr. 1) setting is correct.
· Check that the load is not too heavy . (In agitators, etc., load may become heavy in winter.)
· Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112) setting is not too large to activate the stall
prevention function.
(7) Speed varies during operation.
During operation under advanced magnetic flux vector control, the output frequency varies with load
fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is a normal operation and is not a fault.
1) Inspection of load
· Check that the load is not varying.
2) Inspection of input signal
· Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying.
· Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by induced noise.
3) Others
· Check that the settings of the applied m otor capac ity (Pr. 80) and the number of applied m otor poles
(Pr. 81) are correct for the inverter and motor capacities in advanced magnetic flux vector control.
· Check that the wiring length is within 30m (98.42 feet) in advanced magnetic flux vector control.
· Check that the wiring length is correct in V/F control.
(8) Operation mode is not changed properly.
If the operation mode is not changed properly, check the following:
1. External input signal .............Check that the STF or STR signal is off.
When it is on, the operation mode cannot be changed.
2. Parameter setting .................Check the Pr. 79 setting.
When the setting of Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" is "0" (factory
setting), switching input power on places the inverter in the external
operation mode. Press the operation panel's [MODE] key three times
and press the [UP] key (press the [PU] key for the parameter unit
(FR-PU04)). This changes the external operation mode into the PU
operation mode. For any other setting (1 to 8), the operation mode is
limited according to the setting.
(9) Operation panel (FR-DU04) display is not provided.
· Make sure that the operation panel is connected securely with the inverter.
(10) POWER lamp is not lit.
· Make sure that the wiring and installation are correct.
5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
182
5.3 Precaut ions for Maintenance and Inspect ion
The transistorized inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must
be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to adverse influence by the operating environment, such
as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other
factors.
5.3.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection
For some shor t time after the power is s witched of f , a high voltage r emains in the smoothing capac itor . When
access ing the inverter for inspection, switch power off. When more than 10 m inutes have elaps ed, mak e sur e
that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P-N of the inverter is 30VDC or less using a tester, etc.
5.3.2 Check items
(1) Daily inspections
• Check the following:
1) Motor operation fault
2) Improper installation environment
3) Cooling system fault
4) Unusual vibration and noise
5) Unusual overheating and discoloration
• During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a tester.
(2) Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean state.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
Note: Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter
surface paint to peel off.
Do not use detergent or alcohol to clean the display and other sections of the operation panel (FR-
DU04) or parameter unit (FR-PU04) as these sections do not like them.
5.3.3 Periodic inspection
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection. For periodic inspection,
consult us.
1) Cooling system:.....................Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Screws and bolts:..................These parts may become loose due to vibration, temperature changes, etc.
Check that they are tightened securely and retighten as necessary.
3) Conductors and insulating materials: Check for corrosion and damage.
4) Insulation resistance: Measure.
5) Cooling fan, smoothing capacitor, relay: Check and change if necessary.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
183
5.3.4 Insulation resistance test using megger
1) Before performing the insulation resistance test using a megger on the external circuit, disconnect the
cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.
2) For the continuity test of the c ontr ol cir cuit, us e a meter (high r es istanc e r ange) and do not us e the megger
or buzz er.
3) For the inverter , conduct the insulation r esistance test on the m ain circ uit only as shown below and do not
perform the test on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC megger.)
R 〈L1〉
S 〈L2〉
T 〈L3〉
U
V
MIM
Inverter Motor
Power
supply
DC500V
megger
Ground terminal
5.3.5 Pressure test
Do not conduct a press ure tes t. The inverter's main circ uit us es s emiconduc tors , which may be deteriorated if
a pressure test is made.
Daily and Periodic Inspect ion
Interval
Periodic
Area of
Inspec-
tion
Inspection
Item Description Daily 1
year 2
years
Method Criterion Instrument
Surrounding
environment
Check ambient
tem perature, hum i dity,
dust, di rt, etc .
{
(Refer to page 7)
Ambient
temperature:
(const ant torque)
−10ºC to +50ºC,
non-freezing.
(Variable torque)
−10ºC to +40ºC,
non-freezing
Am bi ent humi di ty:
90% or less,
non-condensing.
Thermometer,
hygrometer,
recorder
Overall unit Check for unusual
vibration and noi se.
{
Visual and audi t ory
checks. No fault.
General
Power
supply
voltage
Check t hat main ci rcuit
voltage is normal.
{
Measure voltage
across i n vert er
term i nal s R-S-T
〈L1-L2-L3〉.
Within permissible
AC voltage
fluctuation
(Refer to page
190)
Meter, digital
multimeter
General
(1) Check with megger
(across main circuit
term i nal s and
ground term i nal ).
(2) Check f or l oose
screws and bolts.
(3) Check f or overheat-
ing of each part .
(4) Clean.
{
{
{
{
(1) Disconnect all
cables from
inverter and
meas ure across
terminals R, S, T,
V, W 〈L1, L2, L3,
V, W〉 and ground
terminal with
megger.
(2) Re-tighten.
(3) Visual check.
(1) 5M Ω or more.
(2), (3) No fault.
500VDC class
megger
Conductors,
cables
(1) Check c onductors
for dist ortion.
(2) Check c abl e
sheaths f or
breakage.
{
{
(1), (2) Visual chec k. (1), (2) No fault.
Main
circuit
Terminal
block Check for dam age.
{
Visual c heck. No fault
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
184
Daily and Periodic Inspection
Interval
Periodic
Area of
Inspec-
tion
Inspection
Item Description Daily 1
year 2
years
Method Crlterlon Instrument
Inverter
module,
Converter
module
Check resistance
across t erminals .
{
Disconnect cables
from i nverter and
meas ure across
terminals R, S, T, P,
N and U, V, W, P, N
〈L1, L2, L3, +, − and
U, V, W, +, −〉 with
tester range of 100Ω.
(See the fol l owing
pages) Analog meter
Smoothing
capacitor
(1) Check f or l iquid
leakage.
(2) Check f or safety
valve projecti on and
bulge.
(3) Measure
electrostatic
capacity.
{
{
{
(1), (2) Vis ual check.
(3) Measure with
capacity meter.
(1), (2) No fault.
(3) 85% or m ore
of rated c apacity. Capacity
meter
Relay
(1) Check f or chatter
during operation.
(2) Check f or rough
surfac e on
contacts.
{
{
(1) Auditory check.
(2) Visual check. (1) No fault.
(2) No fault.
Main
circuit
Resistor
(1) Check for crack in
resistor insulation.
(2) Check f or open
cable.
{
{
(1) Visual check.
Cement res i stor,
wire-wound
resistor.
(2) Disconnect one
end and meas ure
with tester.
(1) No fault.
(2) Error should
be within
±10% of
indicated
resistance
value.
Meter, digital
multimeter
Control
circuit
Protec-
tive circuit
Operation
check
(1) Check balance of
output volt ages
across phases with
inverter operated
independently.
(2) Perform sequence
protecti ve operation
test to make sure of
no fault i n protecti ve
and display circuits.
{
{
(1) Measure voltage
across i n vert er
output terminals
U-V-W.
(2) Simulativel y
connect or
disconnect
inverter protective
circui t output
terminals.
(1) Phase-to-
phase voltage
balance within
4V (8V) for
200V (400V).
(2) Fault must
occur bec ause
of sequenc e.
Digital
multimeter,
rectifier type
voltmeter
Cooling
system Cooling fan
(1) Check f or unus ual
vibration and noi se.
(2) Check f or l oose
connection.
{
{
(1) Turn by hand with
power off.
(2) Re-tighten
No unusual
vibration, unusual
noise.
Display (1) Check if LED lam p
is blown.
(2) Clean.
{
{
(1) Light indicator
lamps on panel.
(2) Clean with rag.
(1) Check t hat
lamps are lit.
Display
Meter
Check t hat readi ng i s
normal.
{
Check reading of
met ers on panel . Must satisfy
specified and
management
values.
Voltmeter,
ammeter, etc.
General
(1) Check f or unus ual
vibration and noi se.
(2) Check f or unus ual
odor.
{
{
(1) Auditory, sensory,
visual checks.
(2) Check f or unus ual
odor due to
overheating,
damage, et c.
(1), (2) No fault.
Motor
Insulation
resistance
(1) Check with megger
(across terminals
and ground
terminal).
{
(1) Disconnect cables
from U, V, W,
including motor
cables.
(1) 5M Ω or more
500V megger
Note: The value for the 400V class is indicated in the parentheses.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
185
zChecking the inverter and converter modules
<Preparation>
(1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R, S, T) 〈L1, L2, L3〉 and motor cables (U, V, W).
(2) Prepare a meter. (Use 100Ω range.)
<Checking method>
Change the polarity of the tester alter nately at the inverter term inals R, S, T , U, V, W, P and N 〈L1, L2, L3, U,
V, W, + and −〉, and check for continuity.
Note: 1. Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.
2. At the time of continuity, the measured value is several to several ten’s-of ohms depending on the
module type, circ uit tester type, etc. If all m eas ured values are almost the sam e, the m odules ar e
without fault.
<Module device numbers and terminals to be checked>
Tester Polarity Tester Polarity
Measured Value Measured Value
R 〈L1〉P 〈+〉 Discontinuity R 〈L1〉N 〈−〉 Continuity
D1 P 〈+〉 R 〈L1〉Continuity D4 N 〈−〉 R 〈L1〉Discontinuity
S 〈L2〉P 〈+〉 Disconti nui ty S 〈L2〉N 〈−〉 Continuity
D2 P 〈+〉 S 〈L2〉Continuity D5 N 〈−〉 S 〈L2〉Discontinuity
T 〈L3〉P 〈+〉 Disconti nui t y T 〈L3〉N 〈−〉 Continuity
Converter
dl
D3 P 〈+〉 T 〈L3〉Continuity D6 N 〈−〉 T 〈L3〉Discontinuity
UP
〈+〉 Discontinuity U N 〈−〉 Continuity
TR
1P 〈+〉 U Continuity TR4 N 〈−〉 U Discontinuity
VP
〈+〉 Discontinuity V N 〈−〉 Continuity
TR
2P 〈+〉 V Continuity TR6 N 〈−〉 V Discontinuity
WP
〈+〉 Discontinuity W N 〈−〉 Continuity
Inverter module
TR
5P 〈+〉 W Continuity TR2 N 〈−〉 W Discontinuity
D1 D2 D3
D4 D5 D6
TR1 TR3 TR5
TR4 TR6 TR2
U
V
W
R
〈L1〉
S
〈L2〉
T
〈L3〉
C
P 〈+〉
N 〈–〉
Inverter moduleConverter module
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
186
5.3.6 Replacement of parts
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to
reduced performance or failure of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be changed
periodically.
(1) Cooling fan
The cooling fan cools heat-generating parts such as the main circuit semiconductor devices. The life of the
cooling fan bearing is usually 10,000 to 35,000 hours. Hence, the cooling fan must be changed every 2 to 3
years if the inver ter is r un continuously. When unus ual noise and/or vibration is notic ed during ins pection, the
cooling fan must be changed immediately.
z
Removal
1) Push the catches from above and remove the fan cover.
2) Disconnect the fan connector(s).
3) Remove the fan.
z
Reinstallation
1) After confir ming the orientation of the f an, reins tall the f an s o that the
arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
↑ AIR FLOW
<Fan side face>
2) Reconnect the fan connectors.
When wiring, use care to avoid the cables being caught by the fan.
3) Reinstall the fan cover.
Fan cover
Fan
Fan connectors
<Example: FR-A520-5.5K>
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
187
(2) Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing the DC in the main circuit, and an
aluminum electrolytic capacitor is also used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their
characteristics are adversely affected by ripple current, etc. When the inverter is operated in an ordinary, air-
conditioned environment, change the capacitors about every 5 years. When 5 years have elapsed, the
capacitors will deteriorate more rapidly.
Check the capacitors at least every year (less than six months if their life will be expired soon).
Check the following:
1) Case (side faces and bottom face for expansion)
2) Sealing plate (for remarkable warping and extreme cracks)
3) Explosion-proof valve (for excessive valve expansion and operation)
4) Appearance, external cracks, discolor ation, leak age. When the measur ed c apacitanc e of the c apac itor has
reduced below 85% of the rating, change the capacitor.
(3) Relays
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be changed according to the number of accumulative switching
times (switching life).
See the following table for the inverter parts replacement guide. Lamps and other short-life parts must also be
changed during periodic inspection.
Replacement Parts of the Inverter
Part Name Standard Replacement I nterval Description
Cooling fan 2 t o 3 years Change (as required)
Smoothing capaci tor in mai n circuit 5 years Change (as requi red)
Smoothing capaci tor on control board 5 years Change the board (as required)
Relays Change as required
5.3.7 Inverter replacement
The inverter can be changed with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the
screws in the wiring cover of the inverter.
1) Remove the mounting screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block.
2) With both hands, pull down the terminal block from the back of the control circuit terminals.
3) When installing the terminal bloc k to a new inverter, exer cis e c are not to bend the pins of the c ontrol c irc uit
terminal block connector.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
188
5.3.8 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and power
z Measurement of voltages and currents
Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include harmonics,
accurate measurement depends on the instruments used and circuits measured.
When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the following circuits
using the instruments given on the next page.
+-
Ar
As
At
Vr
Vs
Vt
W11
W12
W13
Au
Av
Aw
Vu
Vv
Vw
W12
W22
V
R 〈L1〉
S 〈L2〉
T 〈L3〉
U
V
W
Inverter
P 〈+〉
2〈–〉 N
3-phase
power
supply
Instrument
types
Input volta ge
Input curren t
Output voltag
e
Output current
To motor
5
Typical Measuring Points and I nst ruments
Note: Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. Accurate measurement cannot be made if you
use a tester or general measuring instrument.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
189
Measuring Points and Instruments
Item Measuring P oi nt Measuring Instrum ent Remarks
(Reference Measured V al ue) *
Power supply volt age V1Across R-S, S-T and T-R
〈Across L1-L2, L2-L3 and L3-L1〉Moving-iron type AC volt meter Commercial power supply
Within permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Power supply si de
current I1R, S and T line c urrent s
〈L1, L2 and L1 line currents〉Moving-iron t ype AC ammeter
Power supply si de power
P1
At R, S and T, and across R-S,
S-T and T-R
〈At L1, L2 and L3, and across
L1-L2, L2-L3 and L3-L1〉
Elect rodynamic type single-
phase wattm eter P1 = W11 + W 12 + W13
(3-wattmet er method)
Power supply si de power
factor Pf1
Calculat e after measuring power supply voltage, power supply side current and power supply side
power.
× 100%
3 V1 × I1
P1
Pf1 =
Output si de vol tage V2Across U-V, V-Wand W-U Rectifier type AC voltmeter
(Note 1) (Not moving-iron t ype)
Differenc e between phases is
within ±1% of maximum output
voltage.
Output si de current I2U, V and W line current s Moving-iron type AC ammeter
(Note 3)
Current should be equal t o or l ess
than rated inverter current.
Differenc e between phases is 10%
or lower.
Output si de power P2A t U, V and W, and across U-V
and V-W Elect rodynamic type single-
phase wattm eter
P2 = W21 + W22
2-wattmet er method
(or 3-wattmet er method)
Output si de power fac tor
Pf2
Calculat e i n simi l ar manner to power supply si de power fac tor.
× 100%
3 V2 × I2
P2
Pf2 =
Converter output Across P -N 〈Across + and −〉 Moving-coil t ype (s uch as
tester)
POWER lamp lit
1.35 × V1
Maximum 380V (760V ) duri ng
regenerative operation
Across 2 (+) −5 0 to 5V/0 to 10VDC
Across 1 (+) −5 0 to ±5V/0 to ±10VDCFrequency set t i ng signal Across 4 (+) −5 4 to 20mADC
Across 10 (+) −55VDC
Frequency setting power
supply Across 10E (+) −5 10VDC
“5” is
common.
Across FM (+) −SD
Approximat el y 5VDC at
maxim um frequency
(without frequenc y meter)
DC8V
T1
T2
Pulse width T1:
Adjusted by Pr.900
Pulse cycle T2: Set by Pr.55
(Valid for frequency
monitoring only)
Frequency m et er signal
Across AM (+) −5Approxim ately 10DVC at
maxim um frequency
(without frequenc y meter)
Start signal
Select signal Across STF, STR, RH, RM, RL,
JOG, RT, AU , STO P, C S ( +) −SD
Reset Across RES (+) −SD
Output stop Across MRS (+) −SD
Moving-coil type (Tester, etc.
may be us ed) (Internal
resistance: 50k Ω or l arger)
20 to 30VDC when open.
ON voltage: 1V or l ess
SD is c omm on.
Alarm signal Across A-C
Across B-C Moving-c oil type
(such as t ester)
Continuit y c heck (Note 2)
<At OFF> <At ON>
Across A-C: Discontinuity Continuity
Across B-C: Continuity Discontinuity
Note 1. Accurate data will not be obtained by a tester.
2. When P r. 195 "A, B , C termi nal function selecti on" setting is positi ve logi c.
3. When t he carrier frequency exceeds 5k Hz, do not use the inst rument because overcurrent losses occ urring in the metallic
parts insi de t he instrum ent will increase and may lead to burnout.
In this case, us e an approximate effective value type instrum ent.
* Values i n parent heses indic ate those for 400V class.
6
CHAPTER 6
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter provides the "specifications" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
6.1 Standard Specifications...........................................190
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION
CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS
CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 6 SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS
APPENDICES
6.1 Standard Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
190
6 SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Standard S pec ificati ons
6.1.1 Model specifications
z200V class (Japanese version, NA version)
Type FR-A520-
K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
CT0.51 2 3 57.5101520253040506075
Applicable
mot or c apacity
(Note 1) HP VT 1 1.5 3 3 5 10 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
CT 1.1 1.9 3.1 4.2 6.7 9.2 12.6 17.6 23.3 29 34 44 55 67 82
Rated capac i t y
(kVA ) (Not e 2) VT 1.3 1.9 3.7 4.6 7.1 10.7 14.1 20.7 25.9 30.5 39.2 49.7 58.4 70.8 94.6
CT 3 5 8 11 17 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215
Continuous
current (A ) VT 3.6 5 9.6 12 18 28 37 54 68 80 104 130 154 185 248
CV 150% 60 seconds, 200% 0.5 sec onds (inverse-time charac teristi cs)
Overload
capacity
(Note 3) VT 120% 60 seconds, 150% 0.5 sec onds (inverse-ti me characteristi cs)
Voltage (Not e 4) Three phase, 200V to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz Three phase, 200V to
220V 50Hz,
200 to 230V 60Hz
Maximum
value/time 150% 5 seconds 100% 5 seconds 20% (Note 5)
Output
Regen-
erative
braking
torque Permissi-
ble duty 3%ED 2%ED Continuous (Note 5)
Rated input A C
voltage, f requency Three phase, 200V to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz Three phase, 200V to
220V 50Hz,
200 to 230V 60Hz
Permi ssible A C
voltage fl uc tuation 170 to 242V 50Hz, 170 t o 264V 60Hz 170 to 242V 50Hz, 170 to
253V 60Hz
Permissible
frequency f l uctuatio n ±5%
Power supply
Power supply sys tem
capacity (kVA ) (Note
6) 1.52.54.55.59 121720283441526680100
Protec tive structure (JE M
1030) Enclos ed type (IP20 NEMA1) (Not e 7) Open type (I P 00)
Cooling system Self -cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. weight (kg (lbs)),
with DU 2.0
(4.4) 2.5
(5.51) 3.5
(7.72) 3.5
(7.72) 3.5
(7.72) 6.0
(13.23) 6.0
(13.23) 8.0
(17.64) 13.0
(28.66) 13.0
(28.66) 13.0
(28.66) 30.0
(66.14) 40.0
(88.18) 40.0
(88.18) 55.0
(121.25)
Note: 1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable when Mitsubishi
4-pole standard motor is used.
2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and
440V for 400V class.
3. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated
current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the
temperatures under 100% load.
4. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output
voltage may be set as desired below the power supply voltage.
5. The torque indicated is the average value for deceleration from 60Hz to a stop and varies with
motor loss.
6. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side inverter im pedances
(including those of the input reactor and cables).
7. The open type (IP00) is used when the inboard option is fitted after removal of the option wiring
port cover.
SPECIFICATIONS
191
z400V class (Japanese version, NA version, EC version)
Type FR-A540-
K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
CT 0.5 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
Applicable
mot or c apacity
(Note 1) HP VT11.53 3 5 101520253040506075100
CT 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.9 9.1 13 17.5 23.6 29 32.8 43.4 54 65 84
Rated capac i t y
(kVA ) (Not e 2) VT 1.3 2.3 3.6 4.7 6.9 10.6 16.0 20.5 25.9 30.5 39.7 49.5 58.6 72.6 94.7
CT1.52.54 6 9 121723313843577186110
Continuous
current (A ) VT1.834.86.79 142127344052657796124
CT 150% 60 seconds, 200% 0.5 seconds (i nverse-tim e characteristics)
Overload
capacity
(Note. 3) VT 120% 60 seconds , 150% 0.5 seconds (inverse-time characteris tics)
Voltage (Not e 4) Three phase, 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
Maximum
value/time 100% 5 seconds 20% (Note 5)
Output
Regen-
erative
braking
torque Permissi-ble
duty 2%ED Continuous (Not e 5)
Rated input A C
voltage, f requency Three phas e, 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
Permi ssible A C
voltage fl uc tuation 323 to 528V 50Hz/ 60Hz
Permissible frequency
fluctuation ±5%
Power supply
Power supply sys tem
capacity (kVA ) (Note
6) 1.52.54.55.59 121720283441526680100
Protec tive structure (JE M
1030) Enclos ed type (IP20 NEMA1) (Not e 7) Open type (IP 00)
Cooling system Self-cool i ng Forced air cool i ng
Approx. weight (kg (lbs)),
with DU 3.5
(7.72) 3.5
(7.72) 3.5
(7.72) 3.5
(7.72) 3.5
(7.72) 6.0
(13.23) 6.0
(13.23) 13.0
(28.66) 13.0
(28.66) 13.0
(28.66) 13.0
(28.66) 24.0
(52.91) 35.0
(77.16) 35.0
(77.16) 36.0
(79.37)
Note: 1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable when Mitsubishi
4-pole standard motor is used.
2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and
440V for 400V class.
3. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated
current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the
temperatures under 100% load.
4. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output
voltage may be set as desired below the power supply voltage.
5. The torque indicated is the average value for deceleration from 60Hz to a stop and varies with
motor loss.
6. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side inverter im pedanc es
(including those of the input reactor and cables).
7. The open type (IP00) is used when the inboard option is fitted after removal of the option wiring
port cover.
SPECIFICATIONS
192
6.1.2 Common specifications
Control sys tem Soft-PWM c ont rol /high carrier f requenc y PWM control (V /F control or
advanced m agnet i c flux vector c ont rol can be selected)
Output frequency range 0.2 to 400Hz
Analog input 0.015Hz/60Hz (term i nal 2 i nput : 12 bits/0 to 10V, 11 bi t s/0 to 5V, term i nal 1 i nput: 12 bits /−10
to +10V, 11 bi ts/−5 to +5V)
Frequency
setting
resolution Digital input 0.01Hz
Frequency acc uracy Within ±0.2% of maximum output f requency (25°C ±10°C (77°F ±18°F) for analog input, withi n
0.01% of set output f requency for digit al i nput
Voltage/frequency
characteristic B ase frequency set as required between 0 and 400Hz. Cons t ant torque or variable t orque
pattern can be selected.
Start i ng torque 150%: At 0.5Hz (for advanced magnetic flux vector cont rol)
Torque boost Manual torque boost
Acceleration/deceleration
time setting 0 to 3600 s (acc el eration and decelerat i on can be set indi vi dual l y), l i near or S -pattern
acceleration/decel erat i on mode can be s el ected.
DC dynamic brake Operati on frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s ), voltage (0 to 30%) variable
Control specific at i ons
Stall prevention operation
level Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% variable), pres ence or absence can be selected.
Analog input 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 0 to ±10VDC, 4 to 20mADC
Frequency
setting
signal Digital input 3-digit B CD or 12-bi t binary using operat i on panel or parameter unit
(when the FR-A5AX option is us ed)
Start signal Forward and reverse rot ation, st art signal aut omatic self-holding i nput (3-wire input) can be
selected.
Multi-speed s el ection Up to 15 speeds can be s el ected. (Each speed can be s et between 0 and 400Hz, running
speed can be c hanged duri ng operat i on from t he P U (FR-DU04/FR-PU04).)
Second, third
acceleration/
decelerati on t i me
selection
0 to 3600 sec onds (up to three different accel erations and decel erations
can be set i ndividually.)
Jog operation
selection Provided with jog operation m ode select t erminal (Not e 1)
Current input s el ection Input of frequency s et ting signal 4 to 20mADC (terminal 4) i s selected.
Output stop Ins tantaneous s hut-off of i nverter output (frequency, voltage)
Input si gnal s
Alarm reset A l arm retained at the acti vation of protec tive function is res et .
Operation func tions
Maximum/mi ni mum frequency set ting, frequency jum p operation, external t hermal relay i nput
selection, polarit y reversible operation, autom at i c restart operat i on after instantaneous power
failure, com merci al power supply-inverter switc h-over operation, f orward/revers e rotation
prevention, s l i p compens ation, operati on mode selec tion, off l i ne auto tuning function, onli ne
auto tuning f unction, P ID control, programmed operation, comput er l i nk operation (RS-485)
Operating st atus
5 different signals can be selected from i nverter running, up to f requency, ins tant aneous power
failure (undervoltage), frequency detection, second frequency detection, third frequency
detecti on, during program mode operation, during PU operation, overload al arm, regenerative
brake pre-alarm, electronic overcurrent protection pre-alarm, zero current detection, output
current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation, commercial
power supply-inverter switch-over MC1, 2, 3, operation ready, brake releas e request, fan fault
and fin overheat pre-al arm mi nor fault. Open collector output.
Alarm (inverter trip) Contact output...change-over contact (230VAC 0.3A, 30VDC 0.3A)
Open collector...alarm code (4 bit) output
Operational s pecific at i ons
Output si gnal s
For meter
1 signal can be selected from output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output
voltage, frequency setting, running speed, motor torque, converter output voltage (steady or
peak value), regenerat i ve brake duty, elec tronic overcurrent protection l oad factor, i nput power,
output power, load meter, and motor exciting current. Pulse train output (1440 pulses/s ec./full
scale) and anal og output (0 to 10VDC).
Operating
status
Select i on can be made f rom output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output
voltage, frequency set ting, running speed, m otor torque, overload, converter out put voltage
(steady or peak val ue), el ectronic overcurrent protection load fac t or, input power, output power,
load meter, motor exciting current , cum ul ative energization t i me, ac tual operation ti me,
watt-hour met er, regenerative brake dut y and motor load f actor.
PU (FR-DU04
/FR-PU04) Alarm
definition Alarm definition is displayed when protective function is activated. 8 alarm definitions are stored.
(Four alarm definitions are only displayed on t he operation panel.)
Operating
status Input terminal si gnal states, output terminal s i gnal states , option fit t i ng status , terminal
assignment s t atus
Alarm
definition Output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time
immediat el y before protect i ve function i s acti vat e d
Display
Additional
display on
paramet er uni t
(FR-PU04)
only Interactive
guidance Operati on gui de and t roubl eshooting by help f unction
SPECIFICATIONS
193
Protective/alarm funct i ons
Overcurrent shut-off (during acceleration, deceleration, constant speed), regenerative
overvoltage shut-off, undervoltage, instantaneous power failure, overload shut-off (electronic
overcurrent protection), brake transistor alarm (Note 2), ground fault current, output short
circuit, main circuit device overheat, stall prevention, overload alarm, brake resistor overheat
protecti on, fin overheat, fan fault , option fault, param et er error, PU disc onnection
Ambi ent tem perature
Constant torque: -10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F) (non-freezing)
(-10°C to +40°C with FR-A5CV
attachment)
Variable torque: -10°C to +40°C (14°F to 104°F) (non-freezing)
(-10°C to +30°C with FR-A5CV
attachment)
Ambi ent humidi ty 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage temperature (Note 3) −20°C to +65°C (−4°F to +149°F)
Ambi ence Indoors. (No corrosi ve and flammable gases, oil mist , dust and dirt. )
Environment
Alti tude, vibrati o n Maximum 1000m (3280. 80 feet) above sea level f or standard operation.
Aft er that derate by 3% f o r every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%).
Note: 1. Jog operation may also be performed from the operation panel or parameter unit.
2. Not provided for the FR-A520-11K to 55K and FR-A540-11K to 55K which do not have a built-in
brake circuit.
3. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
SPECIFICATIONS
194
6.1.3 Outline drawings
zFR-A520-0.4K, 0.75K
z 200V class
Inverter Type D D1
FR-A520-0.4K 110 (4.33) 21 (0. 83)
FR-A520-0.75K 125 (4. 92) 36 (1.42)
110 (4.33)
260 (10.24)
D
95 (3.74)
6 (0.24)
D1
5 (0.20)
245 (9.65)
2-φ6 hole
(Unit: mm (inches))
zFR-A520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
zFR-A540-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
150 (5.91)
260 (10.24)
140 (5.51)
143 (5.63)
49.5 (1.95)
125 (4.92)
6 (0.24)
5 (0.20)
245 (9.65)
2-φ6 hole
Note: FR-A540-0.4K to 1.5K are not provided
with the cooling fan.
(Unit: mm (inches))
SPECIFICATIONS
195
zFR-A520-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K
zFR-A540-5.5K, 7.5K
z 200V class
Inverter Type H H1 D D1
FR-A520-5.5K 260
(10.24) 245
(9.65) 170
(6.69) 86.5
(3.41)
FR-A520-7.5K 260
(10.24) 245
(9.65) 170
(6.69) 86.5
(3.41)
FR-A520-11K 300
(11.81) 285
(11.22) 190
(7.48) 101.5
(4.00)
z 400V class
Inverter Type H H1 D D1
FR-A540-5.5K 260
(10.24) 245
(9.65) 170
(6.69) 86.5
(3.41)
FR-A540-7.5K 260
(10.24) 245
(9.65) 170
(6.69) 86.5
(3.41)
220 (8.66)
H
D
211 (8.31)
195 (7.68)
6 (0.24)
H1
10.5 (0. 41)
D1
2-φ6 hole
(Unit: mm (inches))
zFR-A520-15K, 18.5K, 22K
zFR-A540-11K, 15K, 18.5K, 22K
250 (9.84)
400 (15.75)
190 (7.48)
242 (9.53)
230 (9.06)
380 (14.96)
101.5 (4.00)
10.5 (0.4)
10 (0.39)
2-φ10 hole
(Unit: mm (inches))
SPECIFICATIONS
196
zFR-A520-30K, 37K, 45K, 55K
zFR-A540-30K, 37K, 45K, 55K
D1
W2
CW1
H
W D
3.2 (0.13)
H1
2-φC hole
z200V class
Inverter Type W W1 W2 H H1 D D1 C
FR-A520-30K 340
(13.39) 270
(10.63) 320
(12.60) 550
(21.65) 530
(20.87) 195
(7.68) 71.5
(2.81) 10
(0.39)
FR-A520-37K 450
(17.72) 380
(14.96) 430
(16.93) 550
(21.65) 525
(20.67) 250
(9.84) 154
(6.06) 12
(0.47)
FR-A520-45K 450
(17.72) 380
(14.96) 430
(16.93) 550
(21.65) 525
(20.67) 250
(9.84) 154
(6.06) 12
(0.47)
FR-A520-55K 480
(18.90) 410
(16.14) 460
(18.11) 700
(27.56) 675
(26.57) 250
(9.84) 154
(6.06) 12
(0.47)
z400V class
Inverter Type W W1 W2 H H1 D D1 C
FR-A540-30K 340
(13.39) 270
(10.63) 320
(12.60) 550
(21.65) 530
(20.87) 195
(7.68) 71.5
(2.81) 10
(0.39)
FR-A540-37K 450
(17.72) 380
(14.96) 430
(16.93) 550
(21.65) 525
(20.67) 250
(9.84) 154
(6.06) 12
(0.47)
FR-A540-45K 450
(17.72) 380
(14.96) 430
(16.93) 550
(21.65) 525
(20.67) 250
(9.84) 154
(6.06) 12
(0.47)
FR-A540-55K 450
(17.72) 380
(14.96) 430
(16.93) 550
(21.65) 525
(20.67) 250
9.84) 154
(6.06) 12
(0.47)
(Unit: mm (inches))
SPECIFICATIONS
197
z Operation panel (FR-DU04)
<Outline drawing>
81.5 (3. 21)
72 (2.83) 15 (0.59) 10.5 (0.41)
20 (0.79)
54 (2.13)
16.5 (0. 65)46.5 (1.83)
24 (0.94)
2-φ4 hole
<Panel cutting dimension drawing>
19.75 (0.78)
3.25 (0.1 3)
16.5 (0.65) 23.75 (0.94)
46.5 (1.83)
17 (0.67)
54 (2.13)
2-φ4 hole
3.5 (0.14)
(Unit: mm (inches))
z Parameter unit (FR-PU04)
<Outline drawing>
125 (4.92)
72 (2.83) 15 (0.59) 10.5 (0.41)
40 (1.57)
80 (3.15)
45 (1.77)
24 (0.97)
13 (0.51)
20 (0.79)
14.5 (0.51)
21.5 (0.85)
5-M3 threads
18.5 (0.79)
<Panel cutting dimension drawing>
40(1.57)
5-φ4hole
11.75(0.46)
81.5(3.21)
1.25(0.05)
17(0.67)
16.5(0.65)
1.5(0.06)
23.75(0.93)
1.5
(0.06)
13(0.51)
3.75(0.15)
(Unit: mm (inches))
7
CHAPTER 7
OPTIONS
This chapter describes the "options" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
7.1 Option List................................................................198
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION
CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS
CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 6 SPECIFICAT IONS
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS
APPENDICES
7.1 Option List
OPTIONS
198
7 OPTIONS
7.1 Option List
7.1.1 Stand-alone options
Name Type Applicati on, Specif i cations, etc. Applicable
Inverter
Parameter unit
(8 languages) FR-PU04 Interactive parameter unit using LCD display (For use in Japanese,
Englis h, German, Frenc h, Spanish, Italian, Swedish and Finnish)
Parameter unit
connect i on c abl e FR-CB2
Cable for connection of t he operation panel or param et er uni t.
Common to
all m odel s
Cooling fin protrusion
attachment FR-A5CN
Used to place only the heat generat i ng section of the inverter in
the back of the control box.
1.5K to 55K,
according to
capacity
totally enclosed
struc t ure specifi cation
attachment FR-A5CV
By inst al l i ng t hi s option, the inverter m eets the totally enclosed
struc t ure specifi cations (I P40).
0.4K to 22K,
according to
capacity
Attachment f or conduit
connection FR-A5FN
Used to c onnec t a conduit di rectly. 30K to 55K,
according to
capacity
FR-A200E seri es
instal l at i on i nterchange
attachment FR-A5AT
Mounting plate us ed to mak e t he mounting di mensions identic al t o
those of the conventional models.
0.4K to 55K,
according to
capacity
EMC Directive
compatible noise filer
(Note 3) SF
Noise fi ler conforming to t he EMC Directive (E N50081-2) 0.4 to 55K,
according to
capacity
High-duty brake
resistor FR-ABR-(H)
(Note 1) Used to im prove t he braking capability of t he brak e built in the
inverter.
0.4K to 7.5K,
according to
capacity
Surge voltage
suppress i ng f i l ter FR-ASF-H
Suppresses surge voltages on the inverter out put side. 0.4 to 55K,
according to
capacity
Power factor improving
DC reactor FR-BEL-(H)
(Note 1) Used to improve the in vert er input power factor (overal l power
factor about 95%) and cooperat e with t he power supply.
0.4K to 55K,
according to
capacity
Power factor improving
AC reactor FR-BAL-(H)
(Note 1) Used to improve the in vert er input power factor (overal l power
factor about 90%) and cooperat e with t he power supply.
0.4K to 55K,
according to
capacity
Radio noise f i l t er FR-BIF-(H)
(Note 1) For radio noise reduc t i on
FR-BSF01 For line noise reduc tion (applies to smal l capaciti es of 3.7k W or
less)
Line noise f i l t er FR-BLF For line noi se reduction
Common to
all m odel s
BU brake unit BU-1500 to 15K,
H7.5K to H30K Used to improve the braking capability of t he inverter (for high-
inertia load or negative load).
Brake unit FR-BU-15K to 55K ,
H15K to H55K
Resistor unit FR-B R-15K to 55K,
H15K to H55K
Used to improve the braking capabilit y of the inverter (for high-
inertia load or negative load). Use the brake unit and res i stor unit
together.
Power return converte r FR-RC-15K to 55K,
H15K to H55K High-func tion brake unit which can return m otor-generated braking
energy to the power supply.
High power factor
converter FR-HC7.5K to 55K,
H7.5K to H55K
The high power factor converter switches the converter ci rcuit on-
off t o convert the input current waveform into a s ine wave to
suppress harmonics considerabl y. (Used with the standard
accessories.)
According to
capacity
Manual controller FR-AX (Note 4) For independent operation. With frequency met er, frequency
setti ng potentiometer and start switch.
DC tach. follower FR-AL (Note 4) For joint operation using external s i gnal s. (0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC)
(1VA) (Note 2)
Three speed selector FR-AT (Note 4) For three-speed (hi gh, middle, l ow) switchi ng operation. (1.5V A)
Motorized speed setter FR-FK (Note 4) For rem ote operation. A l l ows operat i on to be controll ed f rom
several places. (5V A )
Ratio setter FR-FH (Note 4) For ratio control. Allows ratios to be set to five inverters. (3VA)
Common to
all m odel s
OPTIONS
199
Name Type Application, Spec i ficati ons, etc. Applicable
Inverter
PG foll ower (Note 4) FR-FP For foll ow-up operation us i ng the signal of a pi l ot
generator (PG). (2VA)
Master cont rol l er (Note 4) FR-FG For parallel operati on of several (up to 35) i nvert ers.
(5VA)
Soft starter (Note 4) FR-FC For soft start and st op. Allows parallel operat i on and
acceleration/decel erat i on. (3VA)
Deviation det ec tor (Note 4) FR-FD For sync hronous operation. Used with a devi ation sensor
and synchro. (5V A)
Preampl i fier (Note 4) FR-FA Can be used as A/V conversion or operational amplif i er.
(3VA)
Pilot generator (Note 4) QVAH-10 For foll ow-up operation. 70/35VAC 500Hz (at 2500rpm)
Deviation s ensor (Note 4) YV GC-500W-NS For s ync hronous operation (mechanical devi ation
detecti on). Output 90VAC/90°
Frequency set t i ng
potentiometer (Note 4) WA2W
1kΩFor frequenc y s etting. Wire-wound type. 2W1KΩ B
characteristic.
Frequency m et er (Note 4) YM206RI
1mA Dedicated frequenc y meter (up to 120Hz scale ). Movi ng-
coil DC amm eter.
Calibrati on resistor (Note 4) RV 24Y N
10kΩFor cali bration of the f requency met er. Carbon-film type.
B characteristi c.
Inverter s etup soft ware FR-S W0-SETUP-WE Supports steps from inverter start-up to maintenanc e.
(FR-SW0-SE T UP -WJ is Japanese version.)
Common to
all m odel s
Note: 1. "H" in the type code indicates 400V class.Power supply specifications of FR series controllers
and setters: 200VAC 50Hz, 200V/220VAC 60Hz, 115VAC 60Hz.
2. Rated power consumption
3. The intercompatibility attachment (FR-A5AT
) is required to mount the inverter, with the
exception of some models.
4. Options available in Japan only.
OPTIONS
200
7.1.2 Inboard dedicated options
Inboard options
Name Type Function
12-bit digital input FR-A5AX
z
Input int erface used t o set the invert er frequency accurately using external 3-digit BCD or
12-bit binary-c oded di gi t al signals.
z
Gains and off sets c an al so be adjusted.
Digital output
z
Among 26 standard output signals of the inverter, t hi s option outputs any 7 selected
signals from open col l ector output t erminals .
Extension analog
output
FR-A5AY
z
Outputs extra 16 s i gnal s which can be m oni t ored on the FM and AM terminal s such as
output f requency,
z
20mA DC or 5V (10V)DC met e r can be connect ed.
Relay output FR-A5A R
z
Among 26 standard output signals of the inverter, t hi s option outputs any 3 selected
signals from relay c ontact out put terminal s.
Orientati on, PLG
output (Note 3)
z
Used with a posit i on detector (pulse encoder) installed on a m ac hi ne tool spindle to stop
the spindl e i n position (orient ation control ).
z
The mot or s peed i s detect ed by the pulse encoder and t hi s detect i on s i gnal i s fed back to
the inverter t o automat i cally compensate for speed variation. Hence, the motor speed c an
be kept c ons tant if l oad vari ation occurs .
z
The current s pi ndl e pos i tion and actual motor s peed c an be monitored on the operation
panel or parameter unit.
Pulse t rai n i nput
FR-A5AP
z
A pulse t rai n signal can be us ed to enter the speed command to the i nvert er.
Comput er l i nk
z
Operation/monitoring/paramet er change of the invert er can be perform ed under t he control
of a user program from a comput er, e.g. personal computer or FA controll er, connected by
a com municat i on cable.
Relay output
FR-A5NR
z
Any one output signal can be s el ected from among t he standard output signals of t he
inverter and output as a relay contact (contactor) signal .
Profibus DP FR-A5NP
z
Operation/monitoring/paramet er change of the invert er can be perform ed f rom a computer
or PLC.
Device Net TM FR-A5ND
z
Operation/monitoring/paramet er change of the invert er can be perform ed f rom a computer
or PLC.
CC-Link (Note 2) FR-A5NC
z
Operation/monitoring/paramet er change of the invert er can be perform ed f rom a PLC.
Communication
Modbus Plus FR-A5NM
z
Operation/monitoring/paramet er change of the invert er can be perform ed f rom a computer
or PLC.
Note: 1. Three inboard options may be mounted at the same time (the number of the same options
mountable is only one, and only one of the communication options may be mounted.)
2. CC-Link stands for Control & Communication Link.
3. The FR-A5AX (12-bit digital input) is required for orientation control.
8
APPENDICES
This chapter provides the "appendices" for use of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Appendix 1 Data Code List..................................................201
Appendix 2 List of Parameters Classified
by Purpose of Use..................................207
Appendix 3 Operating the Inverter Using
Single-Phase Power Supply...................208
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION
CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS
CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 6 SPECIFICAT IONS
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
201
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Data Code List
Appendix 1 Data Code List
Data Codes
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Read Write Link Paramet er E xtens i on
Setting (Data code 7F/FF)
0 Torque boost 00 80 0
1 Maxim um frequenc y 01 81 0
2 Minimum frequency 02 82 0
3 Base frequency 03 83 0
4 Multi-speed set t i ng (hi gh speed) 04 84 0
5 Multi-speed set t i ng (middle s peed) 05 85 0
6 Multi-speed set t i ng (l ow speed) 06 86 0
7 Accelerat i on time 07 87 0
8 Deceleration ti me 08 88 0
Basic functions
9 Electronic therm al O/ L rel ay 09 89 0
10 DC injection brake operati on frequency 0A 8A 0
11 DC injection brake operati on time 0B 8B 0
12 DC injection brake volt age 0C 8C 0
13 Start i ng frequency 0D 8D 0
14 Load pattern selecti on 0E 8E 0
15 Jog frequency 0F 8F 0
16 Jog acceleration/ deceleration ti me 10 90 0
17 MRS input s el ection 11 91 0
18 High-speed maximum frequency 12 92 0
19 Bas e frequency voltage 13 93 0
20 Acceleration/ dec el eration reference frequency 14 94 0
21 Acceleration/ dec el eration time increments 15 95 0
22 Stal l prevent i on operation level 16 96 0
23 Stall prevention operation level at double
speed 17 97 0
24 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 4) 18 98 0
25 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 5) 19 99 0
26 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 6) 1A 9A 0
27 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 7) 1B 9B 0
28 Multi-s peed i nput compens ation 1C 9C 0
29 Acceleration/ dec el eration pattern 1D 9D 0
30 Regenerative function sel ection 1E 9E 0
31 Frequency jump 1A 1F 9F 0
32 Frequency jump 1B 20 A0 0
33 Frequency jump 2A 21 A1 0
34 Frequency jump 2B 22 A2 0
35 Frequency jump 3A 23 A3 0
36 Frequency jump 3B 24 A4 0
Standard operati on functions
37 Speed dis pl ay 25 A 5 0
41 Up-to-frequency sensi tivity 29 A9 0
42 Output frequency detection 2A A A 0
Output
terminal
functions
43 Output frequency detection for reverse rot ation 2B AB 0
44 Second accelerati on/ deceleration t i me 2C AC 0
45 Second deceleration t i me 2D AD 0
46 Second torque boost 2E AE 0
47 Second V /F (base frequenc y) 2F AF 0
48 Second stall prevent i on operat i on current 30 B0 0
49 Second stall prevent i on operat i on frequency 31 B1 0
Second functions
50 Second output frequency detection 32 B2 0
52 DU/PU main display data s el ection 34 B4 0
53 PU level display data selection 35 B5 0
54 FM termi nal function s el ec tion 36 B6 0
55 Frequency monitoring ref erence 37 B7 0
Display
functions
56 Current monitoring ref erence 38 B8 0
57 Automatic restart f unc tions 39 B 9 0
Rated
output
current
58 Restart coast i ng t i me 3A BA 0
APPENDICES
202
Data Codes
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Read Write Link Paramet er E xtens i on
Setting (Data code 7F/FF)
Additional
function
59 Remote sett i ng f unction sel ection 3B BB 0
60 Intel l i gent mode s el ec tion 3C BC 0
61 Reference current 3D BD 0
62 Reference current for ac c el eration 3E BE 0
63 Reference current for dec el erat i on 3F BF 0
64 Starting frequenc y f o r el evator mode 40 C0 0
65 Retry selection 41 C1 0
66 Stall prevention operation level reduction
starti ng frequency 42 C2 0
67 Number of retries at al arm occ urrence 43 C3 0
68 Retry waiting tim e 44 C4 0
69 Retry c ount display eras ure 45 C5 0
70 Speci al regenerative brake duty 46 C6 0
71 Applied motor 47 C7 0
72 PWM frequency selec tion 48 C8 0
73 0-5V/0-10V selecti on 49 C9 0
74 Filter time constant 4A CA 0
75 Reset s election/ disc onnected PU det ection/ PU
stop selection 4B CB 0
76 Alarm code output selecti on 4C CC 0
77 Parameter write disable selecti on 4D None 0
78 Reverse rot ation prevention s election 4E CE 0
Operation sel ection func tions
79 Operation mode selec tion 4F None 0
80 Motor capac i t y 50 D0 0
81 Number of mot or pol es 51 D1 0
82 Motor exciting c urrent 52 D2 0
83 Rated motor volt age 53 D3 0
84 Rated motor frequency 54 D4 0
89 Speed control gain 59 D9 0
90 Motor constant (R1) 5A DA 0
91 Motor constant (R2) 5B DB 0
92 Motor cons t ant (L1) 5C DC 0
93 Motor cons t ant (L2) 5D DD 0
94 Motor cons t ant (X) 5E DE 0
95 Online auto tuning selec tion 5F DF 0
Advanced magnetic flux
vectorcontrol
96 Auto t uni ng setting/status 60 E0 0
100 V/ F1 (f i rst frequency) 00 80 1
101 V/ F1 (f i rst frequency vol tage) 01 81 1
102 V/ F2 (second frequency) 02 82 1
103 V/ F2 (second frequency vol tage) 03 83 1
104 V/ F3 (t hi rd frequency) 04 84 1
105 V/ F3 (t hi rd frequency voltage) 05 85 1
106 V/ F4 (f ourth frequency) 06 86 1
107 V/ F4 (f ourth frequency volt age) 07 87 1
108 V/ F5 (f i fth frequency) 08 88 1
5-point fl exible V/F
characteristics
109 V/ F5 (f i fth frequency vol tage) 09 89 1
110 Third acceleration/ deceleration ti me 0A 8A 1
111 Third decel eration time 0B 8B 1
112 Third torque boost 0C 8C 1
113 Third V/F (base frequency) 0D 8D 1
114 Third stall prevention operation current 0E 8E 1
115 Third stall prevention operation frequency 0F 8F 1
Third funct i ons
116 Third output frequency detection 10 90 1
APPENDICES
203
Data Codes
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Read Write Link Paramet er E xtens i on
Setting (Data code 7F/FF)
117 St at i on number 11 None 1
118 Com munication speed 12 None 1
119 St op bi t l ength/data lengt h 13 None 1
120 Parity check presence/absence 14 None 1
121 Num ber of com municat i on retries 15 None 1
122 Com munication check tim e i nterval 16 None 1
123 Wait i ng time setting 17 None 1
Communication
functions
124 CR, LF pres ence/absenc e s el ection 18 None 1
128 PID acti on selecti on 1C 9C 1
129 PID proportional band 1D 9D 1
130 PID integral time 1E 9E 1
131 Upper l i mit 1F 9F 1
132 Lower limit 20 A0 1
133 PID acti on set point f or PU operation 21 A1 1
PID c ontrol
134 PID diff erential time 22 A 2 1
135 Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over
sequence out put terminal selecti on 23 A3 1
136 MC switch-over interlock time 24 A4 1
137 Start waiting t i me 25 A5 1
138 Commercial power suppl y-i nverter switch-over
selection at alarm occurrenc e 26 A6 1
Commercial power
supply-inverter
switch-over
139 Automatic inverter-commercial power supply
switch-over frequency 27 A7 1
140 Backlas h accelerati on stopping frequenc y 28 A8 1
141 Backlas h accelerati on stopping ti me 29 A9 1
142 Backlas h deceleration s topping frequency 2A AA 1
Backlash
143 Backlas h deceleration s topping time 2B AB 1
144 Speed setti ng switch-over 2C AC 1
Dis-
play 145 Parameter unit language s witc h-over
148 Stall preventi on l evel at 0V input 30 B0 1
Addit-
ional
functions
149 Stall preventi on l evel at 10V input 31 B 1 1
150 Output current detection l evel 32 B2 1
151 Output current detection peri od 33 B3 1
152 Zero current detection level 34 B4 1
Current
detection
153 Zero current detection period 35 B5 1
154 Voltage reduc tion selec tion during st al l
prevention operati on 36 B6 1
155 RT activated c ondi tion 37 B7 1
156 Stall preventi on operation selec tion 38 B8 1
157 OL signal waiting ti me 39 B9 1
Sub functions
158 AM terminal function s el ection 3A BA 1
Additional
function
160 User group read selection 00 80 2
162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure selection 02 82 2
163 Fi rst cus hi on t i me for res t art 03 83 2
164 Fi rst cus hi on vol t age for restart 04 84 2
Restart after
instantaneous
power failure
165 Restart stall prevention operation level 05 85 2
170 Watt-hour meter clear 0A 8A 2
Initial
monitor
171 Actual operat i on hour meter c l ear 0B 8B 2
173 User group 1 registrat i on 0D 8D 2
174 User group 1 deletion 0E 8E 2
175 User group 2 registrat i on 0F 8F 2
User
functions
176 User group 2 deletion 10 90 2
APPENDICES
204
Data Codes
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Read Write Link Paramet er E xtens i on
Setting (Data code 7F/FF)
180 RL terminal func t i on selecti on 14 94 2
181 RM term i nal f unction sel ection 15 95 2
182 RH terminal func t i on selecti on 16 96 2
183 RT terminal func t i on selecti on 17 97 2
184 AU terminal function sel ection 18 98 2
185 JOG terminal f unction selection 19 99 2
186 CS terminal function sel ection 1A 9A 2
190 RUN terminal function se l ection 1E 9E 2
191 SU terminal function sel ection 1F 9F 2
192 IPF t erminal f unction sel ection 20 A0 2
193 OL terminal func t i on selecti on 21 A1 2
194 FU terminal func t i on selecti on 22 A2 2
Terminal assignment functions
195 ABC t erminal f unc tion selec tion 23 A3 2
Additional
function
199 User's initi al val ue setti ng 27 A7 2
200 Programmed operation minute/ second
selection 3C BC 1
201 Program setti ng 1 3D BD 1
202 Program setti ng 1 3F B E 1
203 Program setti ng 1 3F BF 1
204 Program setti ng 1 40 C1 1
205 Program setti ng 1 41 C1 1
206 Program setti ng 1 42 C2 1
207 Program setti ng 1 43 C3 1
208 Program setti ng 1 44 C4 1
209 Program setti ng 1 45 C5 1
210 Program setti ng 1 46 C6 1
211 Program setti ng 2 47 C7 1
212 Program setti ng 2 48 C8 1
213 Program setti ng 2 49 C9 1
214 Program setti ng 2 4A CA 1
215 Program setti ng 2 4B CB 1
216 Program setti ng 2 4C CC 1
217 Program setti ng 2 4D CD 1
218 Program setti ng 2 4E CE 1
219 Program setti ng 2 4F CF 1
220 Program setti ng 2 50 D0 1
221 Program setti ng 3 51 D1 1
222 Program setti ng 3 52 D2 1
223 Program setti ng 3 53 D3 1
224 Program setti ng 3 54 D4 1
225 Program setti ng 3 55 D5 1
226 Program setti ng 3 56 D6 1
227 Program setti ng 3 57 D7 1
228 Program setti ng 3 58 D8 1
229 Program setti ng 3 59 D9 1
230 Program setti ng 3 5A DA 1
Programmed operation
231 Tim er setting 5B DB 1
232 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 8) 28 A8 2
233 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 9) 29 A9 2
234 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 10) 2A AA 2
235 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 11) 2B AB 2
236 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 12) 2C AC 2
237 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 13) 2D AD 2
238 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 14) 2E AE 2
Multi-speed
operation
239 Multi-s peed s etting (speed 15) 2F AF 2
APPENDICES
205
Data Codes
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Read Write Li nk Parameter Extension
Setting (Data code 7F/FF)
240 Soft -PWM setti ng 30 B0 2
Sub
function
244 Cooling fan operation selec tion 34 B4 2
Stop
selection
function
250 Stop selection 3A BA 2
251 Output phase failure protection sel ection 3B BB 2
252 Override bias 3C BC 2
Additional
function
253 Override gain 3D BD 2
261 Power failure stop selection 45 C5 2
262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 46 C6 2
263 Subtraction st arting frequency 47 C7 2
264 Power-failure dec el erat i on time 1 48 C8 2
265 Power-failure dec el erat i on time 2 49 C9 2
Power failure
stop functions
266 Power-failure deceleration time switch-over
frequency 4A CA 2
Function
selection
270 Stop-on-contact/ l oad t orque hi gh-speed
frequency c ontrol selection 53 CE 2
271 High-speed s etting maximum current 45 CF 2
272 Mid-speed setting m i ni mum current 46 D0 2
273 Current averaging range 47 D1 2
High speed
frequency
control
274 Current averaging f i l ter constant 48 D2 2
275 Stop-on-contact exciti ng current low-speed
multiplying factor 53 D3 2
Stop on
contact
276 Stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequenc y 54 D4 2
278 Brake openi ng f requency 56 D6 2
279 Brake openi ng current 57 D7 2
280 Brake openi ng current detection time 58 D8 2
281 Brake operat i on time at start 59 D9 2
282 Brake operat i on frequency 5A DA 2
283 Brake operat i on time at stop 5B DB 2
284 Decelerat i on detection f unction sel ection 5C DC 2
Brake sequence
functions
285 Overspeed detection frequenc y 5D DD 2
286 Droop gain SE DE 2
Droop
control
287 Droop filter const ant SF DF 2
300 BCD code i nput bias 00 80 3
301 BCD code i nput gain 01 81 3
302 Binary input bias 02 82 3
303 Binary i nput gain 03 83 3
304 Selection of whether digital input and analog
com pensation input are enabl ed or di sabled 04 84 3
12-bit digital
input
305 Data read ti ming si gnal on/ off selection 05 85 3
306 Analog out put signal selection 06 86 3
307 Sett i ng for zero analog output 07 87 3
308 Sett i ng for maxim um analog output 08 88 3
309 Analog output signal voltage/current switch-
over 09 89 3
310 Analog meter voltage output selection 0A 8A 3
311 Sett i ng for zero analog meter voltage output 0B 8B 3
312 Setti ng for maxim um analog m eter voltage
output 0C 8C 3
313 Y0 output selecti on 0D 8D 3
314 Y1 output selecti on 0E 8E 3
315 Y2 output selecti on 0F 8F 3
316 Y3 output selecti on 10 90 3
Analog output , digital output
317 Y4 output selecti on 11 91 3
APPENDICES
206
Data Codes
Func-
tion Parameter
Number Name Read Write Link Param et er Extension
Setting (Data code 7F/FF)
318 Y5 output selecti on 12 92 3
Analog
output, di gi tal
output
319 Y6 output selecti on 13 93 3
320 RA1 output selecti on 14 94 3
321 RA2 output selecti on 15 95 3
Relay
output
322 RA3 output selecti on 16 96 3
330 RA output selecti on 1E 9E 3
331 Inverter station number 1F 9F 3
332 Communication speed 20 A 0 3
333 Stop bi t l ength 21 A1 3
334 Parit y c heck yes/no 22 A2 3
335 Com munication retry count 23 A3 3
336 Communication check tim e i nterval 24 A4 3
337 Waiti ng time setting 25 A5 3
338 Operation c omm and ri ght 26 A6 3
339 Speed comm and ri ght 27 A 7 3
340 Link s tart m ode s el ection 28 A8 3
341 CR, LF yes/no select i on 29 A9 3
Comput er l i nk function
342 E2PROM write yes/no 2A A A 3
900 FM term i nal c al i bration 5C DC 1
901 AM terminal cali bration 5D DD 1
902 Frequency setting volt age bi as 5E DE 1
903 Frequency setting volt age gai n 5F DF 1
904 Frequency setting current bi as 60 E0 1
905 Frequency setting current gai n 61 E 1 1
Calibration
functions
990 Buzzer c ont rol 5A DA 9
Second parameter switc h-over 6C EC
Running frequency (RAM) 6D ED
Frequency
setting
Running frequency (E2PROM) 6E EE
Monitor 6F
Output current monitor 70
Output volt age monitor 71
Special monitor 72
Frequency
monitor
Special monitor s el ection No. 73 F 3
Most recent No. 1, No. 2/al arm displ ay
clear 74 F4
Most recent No. 3, No. 4 75
Most recent No. 5, No. 6 76
Alarm
display
Most recent No. 7, No. 8 77
Inverter status monitor/run command 7A FA
Operation mode acquisi t i on 7B FB
All clear FC
Inverter res et FD
Link parameter extension setting 7F FF
APPENDICES
207
Appendix 2 List of Parameters Classified by Purposes of Use
Appendix 2 List of Parameters Classified by Purposes of Use
Set the parameters according to the operating conditions. The following list indicates purposes of use and
parameters. (For full information on the parameters, Refer to Chapter 4.)
Parameter Numbers
Purpose of Use Parameter numbers which must be set
Adjustment of acceleration/deceleration time and
pattern Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21
Motor overheat protection Pr. 9
Selection of optimum output characteristic for load
characteristic Pr. 3
Limit of output frequency Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18
Operation over 60Hz Pr. 903, Pr. 905
Adjustment of frequency setting signal and output Pr. 73, Pr. 902, Pr. 903, Pr. 904, Pr. 905
Calibration of frequency meter Pr. 54, Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 158, Pr. 900
Adjustment of digital frequency meter Pr. 54, Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 900
Adjustment of motor output torque Pr. 0, Pr. 80, Pr. 81
Multi-speed operation Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 6, Pr. 24, Pr. 25, Pr. 26, Pr. 27, Pr. 232,
Pr. 234, Pr. 235, Pr. 236, Pr. 237, Pr. 238, Pr. 239
Jog operation Pr. 15, Pr. 16
Frequency jump operation Pr. 31, Pr. 32, Pr. 33, Pr. 34, Pr. 35, Pr. 36
Reversible operation according to analog signal polarity Pr. 28, Pr. 73
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Pr. 57, Pr. 58
Adjustment of brake operation Pr. 10, Pr. 11, Pr. 12
Timing of magnetic brake operation Pr. 42,
Display of speed, etc. Pr. 37, Pr. 52, Pr. 53
Function rewrite prevention Pr. 77
Reverse rotation prevention Pr. 78
Optimum acceleration/deceleration within continuous
rating range Pr. 60
Energy-saving operation Pr. 60
Automatic restart after alarm stop Pr. 65, Pr. 67, Pr. 68, Pr. 69
Sub-motor operation Pr. 0, Pr. 3, Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 46, Pr. 47, Pr.
110, Pr. 111, Pr. 112, Pr. 113
To make desired output characteristics (V/F pattern) Pr. 100 to Pr. 109
Operation via communication with personal computer Pr. 117 to Pr. 124
Operation under PID control Pr. 128 to Pr. 134
To perform commercial power supply-inverter switch-
over operation Pr. 135 to Pr. 139
To make backlash compensation Pr. 140 to Pr. 143
To detect current Pr. 150 to Pr. 153
Assignment of input terminal functions Pr. 180 to Pr. 186
Assignment of output terminal functions Pr. 190 to Pr. 195
To suppress noise Pr. 72, Pr. 240
To group parameters Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176
To set initial values for parameters Pr. 199
Clearing of inverter's actual operation time Pr. 171
High-speed frequency control operation Pr. 271 to Pr. 274
To exercise stop-on-contact control Pr. 275, Pr. 276
To increase cooling fan life Pr. 244
To decelerate inverter to a stop at power failure Pr. 261 to Pr. 266
Advanced magnetic flux vector control operation Pr. 80, Pr. 81
Programmed operation Pr. 200 to Pr. 231
Selection of key beep Pr. 990
APPENDICES
208
Appendix 3 Operating the Invert er Usi ng a S ingle-Phase Power Suppl y
Appendix 3 Operating the Inverter Using a Single-Phase Power Supply
If a single-phase power supply is used to operate the inverter only 4 of the 6 of the diodes will be used.
Therefore the ripple current of the capacitor will increase when compared to operation from a three-phase
power supply, resulting in a higher temper ature rise of the conver ter and the capac itor. Operating the inverter
using a single-phase power supply requies derating of the output current.
y
Rating for inverter operation using single-phase power supply
Type FR-A520-
K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
Continuous current
(Constant Torque) 1.5 2.5 4 5 7
Out-
put
Voltage (Not e 1) Three phase, 200 to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz
Rated input A C current (A)
(Single phas e) 4.5 6.4 11.2 12.9 17.4
Rated input A C vol t age Single phase, 200 to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz
Power
supply
Power supply sys tem
capact y (k V A) (Note 2) 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9
(Note 1) The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output
voltage may be set as desired below supply voltage.
(Note 2) The power supply capacity changes with the values of power supply side inverter impedance
(including those of the input reactor and cables).
y
Cautions on operating the inverter using single-phase power supply
(1)Connect the single-phase power supply to the terminals R and S of the inverter.
(2)If the capacity of the power s upply is insuff icient, the output voltage will become uns table under changing
load conditions. Therefore, be certain the power supply is adequate.
<Example circuit>
R
S
T
U
V
W
IM
Inverter
NFB Motor
STF (STR)
SD Grounding
Power supply
Single phase
AC200 - 220V 50Hz
AC200 - 240V 60Hz
Start signal
Note: Only the NA version A500 is UL listed for the above single-phase ratings.
The A500 inverter is not CE marked for single-phase operation. The A500 is not EMC compliant for
single-phase operation.
REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Data *Manual Number Revision
Sep., 1997 IB(NA)-66790-A First edition
Oct., 1997 IB(NA)-66790-B Partly modified
Front cover
Nov., 1997 IB(NA)-66790-C Additions
z
Instructions for Standard-compliant products (pages 38, 39)
z
FR-A540-30K to 55K
Modifications
z
Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 <adjustment procedure>
z
External options
z
Dedicated in boar d optio ns
Mar., 1998 IB(NA)-66790-D Additions
z
In accordance with NA and EC
Modifications
z
In accordanc e with Stan dar d-c ompliant m odels
z
User group setting
z
Input terminal function selection
Oct., 1998 IB(NA)-66790-E Additions
z
Description of the data line filter
Partial additions
z
Alarm displays (E.E6, E.E7)
Modifications
z
Change in ground terminal position of FR-A520-0.4K, 0.75K
z
Change in ground terminal screw size of FR-A520-5.5K, 7.5K
z
About RS-485/RS-232C converter
